Carilion Materials Management

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Carilion Materials Management Drugs

Equaline Childrens Acet...

Equaline Childrens Acetaminophen

Active Duodenal Ulcer: The current recommended adult oral dosage of ranitidine for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg or 20 mL of oral solution (4 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 300 mg of ranitidine) once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150-mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome): The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily. In some patients it may be necessary to administer ranitidine 150-mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) at bedtime.

GERD: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Erosive Esophagitis: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) 4 times daily.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Pediatric Use: The safety and effectiveness of ranitidine have been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of ranitidine in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations.

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications. Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers: The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients. Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers: The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients. Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis: Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg/day, usually given as 2 divided doses. Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function: On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with ranitidine, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) every 24 hours. Should the patient's condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis. Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatrics and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Plaquenil

Plaquenil

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Throat Formula

Throat Formula

General

Because of the variable bioavailability of propranolol, the dose should be individualized based on response.

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride twice daily, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. Dosage may be increased gradually until adequate blood pressure control is achieved. The usual maintenance dosage is 120 mg to 240 mg per day. In some instances a dosage of 640 mg a day may be required. The time needed for full antihypertensive response to a given dosage is variable and may range from a few days to several weeks.

While twice-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, some patients, especially when lower doses are used, may experience a modest rise in blood pressure toward the end of the 12-hour dosing interval. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. If control is not adequate, a larger dose, or 3-times-daily therapy may achieve better control.

Angina Pectoris

Total daily doses of 80 mg to 320 mg propranolol hydrochloride, when administered orally, twice a day, three times a day, or four times a day, have been shown to increase exercise tolerance and to reduce ischemic changes in the ECG. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce dosage gradually over a period of several weeks. (See .) WARNINGS

Atrial Fibrillation

The recommended dose is 10 mg to 30 mg propranolol hydrochloride three or four times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Myocardial Infarction

In the Beta-Blocker Heart Attack Trial (BHAT), the initial dose was 40 mg t.i.d., with titration after 1 month to 60 mg to 80 mg t.i.d. as tolerated. The recommended daily dosage is 180 mg to 240 mg propranolol hydrochloride per day in divided doses. Although a t.i.d. regimen was used in the BHAT and a q.i.d. regimen in the Norwegian Multicenter Trial, there is a reasonable basis for the use of either a t.i.d. or b.i.d. regimen (see ). The effectiveness and safety of daily dosages greater than 240 mg for prevention of cardiac mortality have not been established. However, higher dosages may be needed to effectively treat coexisting diseases such as angina or hypertension (see above). PHARMACODYNAMICS AND CLINICAL EFFECTS

Migraine

The initial dose is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride daily in divided doses. The usual effective dose range is 160 mg to 240 mg per day. The dosage may be increased gradually to achieve optimum migraine prophylaxis. If a satisfactory response is not obtained within four to six weeks after reaching the maximum dose, propranolol therapy should be discontinued. It may be advisable to withdraw the drug gradually over a period of several weeks.

Essential Tremor

The initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride twice daily. Optimum reduction of essential tremor is usually achieved with a dose of 120 mg per day. Occasionally, it may be necessary to administer 240 mg to 320 mg per day.

Hypertrophic Subaortic Stenosis

The usual dosage is 20 mg to 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride three or four times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Pheochromocytoma

The usual dosage is 60 mg propranolol hydrochloride daily in divided doses for three days prior to surgery as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade. For the management of inoperable tumors, the usual dosage is 30 mg daily in divided doses as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade.
Phentermine Hydrochlori...

Phentermine Hydrochloride

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Calcium Carbonate

Calcium Carbonate

take one to four tablets daily do not take more than 4 tablets in 24 hours do not use the maximum dosage for more than 2 weeks
Liothyronine Sodium

Liothyronine Sodium

The dosage of thyroid hormones is determined by the indication and must in every case be individualized according to patient response and laboratory findings.

Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP are intended for oral administration; once-a-day dosage is recommended. Although liothyronine sodium has a rapid cutoff, its metabolic effects persist for a few days following discontinuance.

Mild Hypothyroidism

Recommended starting dosage is 25 mcg daily. Daily dosage then may be increased by up to 25 mcg every 1 or 2 weeks. Usual maintenance dose is 25 to 75 mcg daily.

The rapid onset and dissipation of action of liothyronine sodium (T ), as compared with levothyroxine sodium (T ), has led some clinicians to prefer its use in patients who might be more susceptible to the untoward effects of thyroid medication. However, the wide swings in serum T levels that follow its administration and the possibility of more pronounced cardiovascular side effects tend to counterbalance the stated advantages. 343

Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP may be used in preference to levothyroxine (T ) during radioisotope scanning procedures, since induction of hypothyroidism in those cases is more abrupt and can be of shorter duration. It may also be preferred when impairment of peripheral conversion of T to T is suspected. 443

Myxedema

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily. This may be increased by 5 to 10 mcg daily every 1 or 2 weeks. When 25 mcg daily is reached, dosage may be increased by 5 to 25 mcg every 1 or 2 weeks until a satisfactory therapeutic response is attained. Usual maintenance dose is 50 to 100 mcg daily.

Myxedema Coma

Myxedema coma is usually precipitated in the hypothyroid patient of long standing by intercurrent illness or drugs such as sedatives and anesthetics and should be considered a medical emergency.

An intravenous preparation of liothyronine sodium is marketed under the trade name Triostat for use in myxedema coma/precoma. ®

Congenital Hypothyroidism

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily, with a 5 mcg increment every 3 to 4 days until the desired response is achieved. Infants a few months old may require only 20 mcg daily for maintenance. At 1 year, 50 mcg daily may be required. Above 3 years, full adult dosage may be necessary (see ). PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use

Simple (non-toxic) Goiter

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily. This dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mcg daily every 1 or 2 weeks. When 25 mcg daily is reached, dosage may be increased every week or two by 12.5 or 25 mcg. Usual maintenance dosage is 75 mcg daily.

therapy should be started with 5 mcg daily and increased only by 5 mcg increments at the recommended intervals. In the elderly or in pediatric patients,

from thyroid, L-thyroxine or thyroglobulin, discontinue the other medication, initiate Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP at a low dosage, and increase gradually according to the patient's response. When selecting a starting dosage, bear in mind that this drug has a rapid onset of action, and that residual effects of the other thyroid preparation may persist for the first several weeks of therapy. When switching a patient to Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP

Thyroid Suppression Therapy

Administration of thyroid hormone in doses higher than those produced physiologically by the gland results in suppression of the production of endogenous hormone. This is the basis for the thyroid suppression test and is used as an aid in the diagnosis of patients with signs of mild hyperthyroidism in whom baseline laboratory tests appear normal or to demonstrate thyroid gland autonomy in patients with Graves' ophthalmopathy. I uptake is determined before and after the administration of the exogenous hormone. A 50% or greater suppression of uptake indicates a normal thyroid-pituitary axis and thus rules out thyroid gland autonomy. 131

Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP are given in doses of 75 to 100 mcg/day for 7 days, and radioactive iodine uptake is determined before and after administration of the hormone. If thyroid function is under normal control, the radioiodine uptake will drop significantly after treatment. Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP should be administered cautiously to patients in whom there is a strong suspicion of thyroid gland autonomy, in view of the fact that the exogenous hormone effects will be additive to the endogenous source.
Dyrenium

Dyrenium

Adult Dosage

Dosage should be titrated to the needs of the individual patient. When used alone, the usual starting dose is 100 mg twice daily after meals. When combined with another diuretic or antihypertensive agent, the total daily dosage of each agent should usually be lowered initially and then adjusted to the patient’s needs. The total daily dosage should not exceed 300 mg. Please refer to PRECAUTIONS−General.

When Dyrenium (triamterene) is added to other diuretic therapy or when patients are switched to Dyrenium from other diuretics, all potassium supplementation should be discontinued.
Famotidine

Famotidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Acute Therapy: The recommended adult oral dosage for active duodenal ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime. Most patients heal within 4 weeks; there is rarely reason to use famotidine at full dosage for longer than 6 to 8 weeks. A regimen of 20 mg b.i.d. is also effective.Maintenance Therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg once a day at bedtime.

Benign Gastric Ulcer

Acute Therapy: The recommended adult oral dosage for active benign gastric ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime.

The recommended oral dosage for treatment of adult patients with symptoms of GERD is 20 mg b.i.d. for up to 6 weeks. The recommended oral dosage for the treatment of adult patients with esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 or 40 mg b.i.d. for up to 12 weeks (see ) Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY IN ADULTS, Clinical Studies.

Dosage for Pediatric Patients <1 year of ageGastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

See PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients <1 year of age.

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS, PediatricPatients <1 year of age suggest the following startingdoses in pediatric patients <1 year of age:Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD) - 0.5mg/kg/dose of famotidine oral suspension for thetreatment of GERD for up to 8 weeks once daily inpatients <3 months of age and 0.5 mg/kg/dose twicedaily in patients 3 months to <1 year of age. Patientsshould also be receiving conservative measures (e.g.,thickened feedings). The use of intravenous famotidinein pediatric patients <1 year of age with GERD has notbeen adequately studied.

Dosage for Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age

See PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age.

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age suggest the following starting doses in pediatric patients 1-16 years of age.

Peptic Ulcer - 0.5 mg/kg/day p.o. at bedtime or divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg/day.

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease with or without Esophagitis Including Erosions and Ulcerations – 1 mg/kg/day p.o. divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg b.i.d.

While published uncontrolled studies suggest effectiveness of famotidine in the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer, data in pediatric patients are insufficient to establish percent response with dose and duration of therapy. Therefore, treatment duration (initially based on adult duration recommendations) and dose should be individualized based on clinical response and/or pH determination (gastric or esophageal) and endoscopy. Published uncontrolled clinical studies in pediatric patients 1-16 years of age have employed doses up to 1 mg/kg/day for peptic ulcer and 2 mg/kg/day for GERD with or without esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (e.g., Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome, Multiple Endocrine Adenomas)

The dosage of famotidine in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose for pathological hypersecretory conditions is 20 mg q 6 h. In some patients, a higher starting dose may be required. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 160 mg q 6 h have been administered to some adult patients with severe Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome.

Concomitant Use of Antacids

Antacids may be given concomitantly if needed.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Moderate or Severe Renal Insufficiency

In adult patients with moderate (creatinine clearance < 50 mL/min) or severe (creatinine clearance < 10 mL/min) renal insufficiency, the elimination half-life of famotidine is increased. For patients with severe renal insufficiency, it may exceed 20 hours, reaching approximately 24 hours in anuric patients. Since CNS adverse effects have been reported in patients with moderate and severe renal insufficiency, to avoid excess accumulation of the drug in patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency, the dose of famotidine may be reduced to half the dose or the dosing interval may be prolonged to 36-48 hours as indicated by the patient’s clinical response.

Based on the comparison of pharmacokinetic parameters for famotidine in adults and pediatric patients, dosage adjustment in pediatric patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency should be considered.
Norpace

Norpace

The dosage of Norpace or Norpace CR must be individualized for each patient on the basis of response and tolerance. The usual adult dosage of Norpace or Norpace CR is 400 to 800 mg per day given in divided doses. The recommended dosage for most adults is 600 mg/day given in divided doses (either 150 mg every 6 hours for immediate-release Norpace or 300 mg every 12 hours for Norpace CR). For patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds (50 kg), the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (either 100 mg every 6 hours for immediate-release Norpace or 200 mg every 12 hours for Norpace CR). In the event of increased anticholinergic side effects, plasma levels of disopyramide should be monitored and the dose of the drug adjusted accordingly. A reduction of the dose by one third, from the recommended 600 mg/day to 400 mg/day, would be reasonable, without changing the dosing interval.

Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made gradually, with close monitoring for the possible development of hypotension and/or congestive heart failure (see ). For patients with cardiomyopathy or possible cardiac decompensation, a loading dose, as discussed below, should not be given, and initial dosage should be limited to 100 mg of immediate-release Norpace every 6 to 8 hours.Warnings

For patients with moderate renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance greater than 40 ml/min) or hepatic insufficiency, the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (either 100 mg every 6 hours for immediate-release Norpace or 200 mg every 12 hours for Norpace CR).

For patients with severe renal insufficiency (C 40 ml/min or less), the recommended dosage regimen of immediate-release Norpace is 100 mg at intervals shown in the table below, with or without an initial loading dose of 150 mg. cr
IMMEDIATE-RELEASE NORPACE DOSAGE INTERVAL FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY Creatinine clearance (ml/min) 40–30 30–15 less than 15 Approximate maintenance-dosing interval q 8 hr q 12 hr q 24 hr
The above dosing schedules are for Norpace immediate-release capsules; Norpace CR is not recommended for patients with severe renal insufficiency.

For patients in whom rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 300 mg of immediate-release Norpace (200 mg for patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds) is recommended, followed by the appropriate maintenance dosage. Therapeutic effects are usually attained 30 minutes to 3 hours after administration of a 300-mg loading dose. If there is no response or evidence of toxicity within 6 hours of the loading dose, 200 mg of immediate-release Norpace every 6 hours may be prescribed instead of the usual 150 mg. If there is no response to this dosage within 48 hours, either Norpace should then be discontinued or the physician should consider hospitalizing the patient for careful monitoring while subsequent immediate-release Norpace doses of 250 mg or 300 mg every 6 hours are given. A limited number of patients with severe refractory ventricular tachycardia have tolerated daily doses of Norpace up to 1600 mg per day (400 mg every 6 hours), resulting in disopyramide plasma levels up to 9 mcg/ml. If such treatment is warranted, it is essential that patients be hospitalized for close evaluation and continuous monitoring.

Norpace CR should not be used initially if rapid establishment of disopyramide plasma levels is desired.

Transferring to Norpace or Norpace CR

The following dosage schedule based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data is suggested for transferring patients with normal renal function from either quinidine sulfate or procainamide therapy (Type 1 antiarrhythmic agents) to Norpace or Norpace CR therapy:

Norpace or Norpace CR should be started using the regular maintenance schedule 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate or 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide. without a loading dose

In patients in whom withdrawal of quinidine sulfate or procainamide is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, the physician should consider hospitalization of the patient. When transferring a patient from immediate-release Norpace to Norpace CR, the maintenance schedule of Norpace CR may be started 6 hours after the last dose of immediate-release Norpace.

Pediatric Dosage

Controlled clinical studies have not been conducted in pediatric patients; however, the following suggested dosage table is based on published clinical experience.

Total daily dosage should be divided and equal doses administered orally every 6 hours or at intervals according to individual patient needs. Disopyramide plasma levels and therapeutic response must be monitored closely. Patients should be hospitalized during the initial treatment period, and dose titration should start at the lower end of the ranges provided below.
SUGGESTED TOTAL DAILY DOSAGE * Age (years) Disopyramide (mg/kg body weight/day) * Dosage is expressed in milligrams of disopyramide base. Since Norpace (disopyramide phosphate) 100-mg capsules contain 100 mg of disopyramide base, the pharmacist can readily prepare a 1-mg/mL to 10-mg/mL liquid suspension by adding the entire contents of Norpace capsules to cherry syrup. (Prepare cherry syrup as follows: cherry juice, 475 ml; sucrose 800 g; alcohol, 20 ml; purified water, a sufficient quantity to make 1000 ml.) The resulting suspension, when refrigerated, is stable for one month and should be thoroughly shaken before the measurement of each dose. The suspension should be dispensed in an amber glass bottle with a child-resistant closure. Under 1 10 to 30 1 to 4 10 to 20 4 to 12 10 to 15 12 to 18 6 to 15
Norpace CR capsules should not be used to prepare the above suspension.
Isosorbide

Isosorbide

The recommended starting dose of Isosorbide Mononitrate Tablets is 30 mg (given as a single 30 mg tablet or as 1/2 of a 60 mg tablet) or 60 mg (given as a single tablet) once daily. After several days, the dosage may be increased to 120 mg (given as a single 120 mg tablet or as two 60 mg tablets) once daily. Rarely, 240 mg may be required. The daily dose of Isosorbide Mononitrate Tablets should be taken in the morning on arising. Isosorbide Mononitrate Extended-Release Tablets should not be chewed or crushed and should be swallowed together with a half-glassful of fluid. Do not break the 30 mg tablet.
Hyoscyamine Sulfate

Hyoscyamine Sulfate

Dosage may be adjusted according to the conditions and severity of symptoms. The tablets may be taken sublingually, orally or chewed.

1 to 2 tablets every four hours or as needed. Do not exceed 12 tablets in 24 hours. Adults and pediatric patients 12 years of age and older:

1/2 to 1 tablet every four hours or as needed. Do not exceed 6 tablets in 24 hours. Pediatric patients 2 to under 12 years of age:
Pindolol

Pindolol

The dosage of pindolol tablets should be individualized. The recommended initial dose of pindolol tablets is 5 mg b.i.d. alone or in combination with other antihypertensive agents. An antihypertensive response usually occurs within the first week of treatment. Maximal response, however, may take as long as or occasionally longer than 2 weeks. If a satisfactory reduction in blood pressure does not occur within 3 to 4 weeks, the dose may be adjusted in increments of 10 mg/day at these intervals up to a maximum of 60 mg/day.
Disopyramide Phosphate

Disopyramide Phosphate

The dosage of Disopyramide Phosphate must be individualized for each patient on the basis of response and tolerance. The usual adult dosage of Disopyramide Phosphate is 400 to 800 mg per day given in divided doses. The recommended dosage for most adults is 600 mg/day given in divided doses (150 mg every 6 hours). For patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds (50 kg), the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (100 mg every 6 hours). In the event of increased anticholinergic side effects, plasma levels of disopyramide should be monitored and the dose of the drug adjusted accordingly. A reduction of the dose by one third, from the recommended 600 mg/day to 400 mg/day, would be reasonable, without changing the dosing interval.

Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made gradually, with close monitoring for the possible development of hypotension and/or congestive heart failure (see ). For patients with cardiomyopathy or possible cardiac decompensation, a loading dose, as discussed below, should not be given, and initial dosage should be limited to 100 mg every 6 to 8 hours.WARNINGS

For patients with moderate renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance greater than 40 mL/min) or hepatic insufficiency, the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (100 mg every 6 hours).

For patients with severe renal insufficiency (C 40 mL/min or less), the recommended dosage regimen is 100 mg at intervals shown in the table below, with or without an initial loading dose of 150 mg. cr
DISOPYRAMIDE PHOSPHATE DOSAGE INTERVAL FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY Creatinine clearance (mL/min) 40 to 30 30 to 15 less than 15 Approximate maintenance – dosing interval q 8 hr q 12 hr q 24 hr
For patients in whom rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 300 mg of Disopyramide Phosphate (200 mg for patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds) is recommended, followed by the appropriate maintenance dosage. Therapeutic effects are usually attained 30 minutes to 3 hours after administration of a 300 mg loading dose. If there is no response or evidence of toxicity within 6 hours of the loading dose, 200 mg of Disopyramide Phosphate every 6 hours may be prescribed instead of the usual 150 mg. If there is no response to this dosage within 48 hours, either Disopyramide Phosphate should then be discontinued or the physician should consider hospitalizing the patient for careful monitoring while subsequent Disopyramide Phosphate doses of 250 mg or 300 mg every 6 hours are given. A limited number of patients with severe refractory ventricular tachycardia have tolerated daily doses of Disopyramide Phosphate up to 1600 mg per day (400 mg every 6 hours), resulting in disopyramide plasma levels up to 9 mcg/mL. If such treatment is warranted, it is essential that patients be hospitalized for close evaluation and continuous monitoring.

Transferring to Disopyramide Phosphate

The following dosage schedule based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data is suggested for transferring patients with normal renal function from either quinidine sulfate or procainamide therapy (Type 1 antiarrhythmic agents) to Disopyramide Phosphate therapy:

Disopyramide Phosphate should be started using the regular maintenance schedule 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate or 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide. without a loading dose

In patients in whom withdrawal of quinidine sulfate or procainamide is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, the physician should consider hospitalization of the patient.

Pediatric Dosage

Controlled clinical studies have not been conducted in pediatric patients; however, the following suggested dosage table is based on published clinical experience.

Total daily dosage should be divided and equal doses administered orally every 6 hours or at intervals according to individual patient needs. Disopyramide plasma levels and therapeutic response must be monitored closely. Patients should be hospitalized during the initial treatment period, and dose titration should start at the lower end of the ranges provided below.
SUGGESTED TOTAL DAILY DOSAGE * * Dosage is expressed in milligrams of disopyramide base. Since disopyramide phosphate 100 mg capsules contain 100 mg of disopyramide base, the pharmacist can readily prepare a 1 mg/mL to 10 mg/mL liquid suspension by adding the entire contents of disopyramide capsules to cherry syrup. (Prepare cherry syrup as follows: cherry juice, 475 mL; sucrose 800 g; alcohol 20 mL; purified water, a sufficient quantity to make 1000 mL.) The resulting suspension, when refrigerated, is stable for one month and should be thoroughly shaken before the measurement of each dose. The suspension should be dispensed in an amber glass bottle with a child-resistant closure. Age (years) Disopyramide (mg/kg body weight/day) Under 1 10 to 30 1 to 4 10 to 20 4 to 12 10 to 15 12 to 18 6 to 15
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is one capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5-10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10-80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5-10 mg and benazepril doses of 10-40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage adjustment in renal impairment

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance ≤ 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly ≤3 mg/dL or 265 μmol/L) [see ]. Renal Impairment:Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Adult Hypertensive Patients

Losartan potassium tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents, and with or without food.

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan potassium tablets is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg used in patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension ─ Volume-Depleted Patients and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS, General Losartan potassium tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg. )).

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. The effect of losartan is substantially present within one week but in some studies the maximal effect occurred in 3-6 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension ).

If blood pressure is not controlled by losartan potassium tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension ).

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or for patients with renal impairment, including patients on dialysis.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥6 years of age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.7 mg/kg once daily (up to 50 mg total) administered as a tablet or a suspension (see Preparation of Suspension Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 1.4 mg/kg (or in excess of 100 mg) daily have not been studied in pediatric patients (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations and Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, and WARNINGS, Hypotension ─ Volume-Depleted Patients. ).)

Losartan potassium tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients <6 years of age or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, and PRECAUTIONS). 2

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to an 8 ounce (240 mL) amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 50 mg losartan potassium tablets. Immediately shake for at least 2 minutes. Let the concentrate stand for 1 hour and then shake for 1 minute to disperse the tablet contents. Separately prepare a 50/50 volumetric mixture of Ora-Plus and Ora-Sweet SF . Add 190 mL of the 50/50 Ora-Plus /Ora-Sweet SF mixture to the tablet and water slurry in the PET bottle and shake for 1 minute to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2-8°C (36-46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension prior to each use and return promptly to the refrigerator. TM1TM1TMTM

__________________________________________

Trademark of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. 1

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

The usual starting dose is 50 mg of losartan potassium tablets once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg daily should be added and/or the dose of losartan potassium tablets should be increased to 100 mg once daily followed by an increase in hydrochlorothiazide to 25 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke ).

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The usual starting dose is 50 mg once daily. The dose should be increased to 100 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients Losartan potassium tablets may be administered with insulin and other commonly used hypoglycemic agents (e.g., sulfonylureas, glitazones and glucosidase inhibitors). ).
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride is one capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient's clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5 to 10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10 to 80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5 to 10 mg and benazepril doses of 10 to 40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment In Renal Impairment

Renal Impairment

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride is not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance ≤ 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min (serum creatinine roughly ≤3 mg/dL or 265 μmol/L). [see ( ), ( ) and ( )]. WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS5.7USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS8.7CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY12.3

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride may be substituted for the titrated components.
Cimetidine

Cimetidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Active Duodenal Ulcer

Clinical studies have indicated that suppression of nocturnal acid is the most important factor in duodenal ulcer healing (see , ). This is supported by recent clinical trials (see , ). Therefore, there is no apparent rationale, except for familiarity with use, for treating with anything other than a once-daily at bedtime oral dosage regimen. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYAcid SecretionClinical TrialsActive duodenal ulcer

In a U.S. oral dose-ranging study of 400 mg at bedtime, 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime, a continuous dose response relationship for ulcer healing was demonstrated.

However, 800 mg at bedtime is the dose of choice for most patients, as it provides a high healing rate (the difference between 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime being small), maximal pain relief, a decreased potential for drug interactions (see , ) and maximal patient convenience. Patients unhealed at four weeks, or those with persistent symptoms, have been shown to benefit from two to four weeks of continued therapy. PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

It has been shown that patients who both have an endoscopically demonstrated ulcer larger than 1 cm and are also heavy smokers (i.e., smoke one pack of cigarettes or more per day) are more difficult to heal. There is some evidence which suggests that more rapid healing can be achieved in this subpopulation with cimetidine 1600 mg at bedtime. While early pain relief with either 800 mg at bedtime or 1600 mg at bedtime is equivalent in all patients, 1600 mg at bedtime provides an appropriate alternative when it is important to ensure healing within four weeks for this subpopulation. Alternatively, approximately 94% of all patients will also heal in eight weeks with cimetidine 800 mg at bedtime.

Other cimetidine oral regimens in the U.S. which have been shown to be effective are: 300 mg four times daily, with meals and at bedtime, the original regimen with which U.S. physicians have the most experience, and 400 mg twice daily, in the morning and at bedtime (see , ). Clinical TrialsActive duodenal ulcer

Concomitant antacids should be given as needed for relief of pain. However, simultaneous administration of oral cimetidine and antacids is not recommended, since antacids have been reported to interfere with the absorption of cimetidine.

While healing with cimetidine often occurs during the first week or two, treatment should be continued for 4 to 6 weeks unless healing has been demonstrated by endoscopic examination.

Maintenance Therapy for Duodenal Ulcer

In those patients requiring maintenance therapy, the recommended adult oral dose is 400 mg at bedtime.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for short-term treatment of active benign gastric ulcer is 800 mg at bedtime, or 300 mg four times a day with meals and at bedtime. Controlled clinical studies were limited to six weeks of treatment (see ). 800 mg at bedtime is the preferred regimen for most patients based upon convenience and reduced potential for drug interactions. Symptomatic response to cimetidine dose not preclude the presence of a gastric malignancy. It is important to follow gastric ulcer patients to assure rapid progress to complete healing. Clinical Trials

Erosive Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dosage for the treatment of erosive esophagitis that has been diagnosed by endoscopy is 1600 mg daily in divided doses (800 mg twice daily or 400 mg four times daily) for 12 weeks. The use of cimetidine beyond 12 weeks has not been established.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome)

Recommended adult oral dosage: 300 mg four times a day with meals at bedtime. In some patients it may be necessary to administer higher doses more frequently. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs, but should not usually exceed 2400 mg per day and should continue as long as clinically needed.

Dosage Adjustments for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Patients with severely impaired renal function have been treated with cimetidine. However, such dosage has been very limited. On the basis of this experience the recommended dosage is 300 mg every 12 hours orally. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 8 hours or even further with caution. In severe renal failure, accumulation may occur and the lower frequency of dosing comparable with an adequate patient response should be used. When liver impairment is also present, further reductions in dosage may be necessary. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating cimetidine. Ideally, the dosage schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.
Etidronate Disodium

Etidronate Disodium

Etidronate disodium tablets should be taken as a single, oral dose. As with other bisphosphonates, it is recommended that etidronate disodium tablets should be swallowed with a full glass of water (6 to 8 oz). Patients should not lie down after taking the medication. However, should gastrointestinal discomfort occur, the dose may be divided. To maximize absorption, patients should avoid taking the following items within 2 hours of dosing:
• Food, especially food high in calcium, such as milk or milk products. • Vitamins with mineral supplements or antacids which are high in metals such as calcium, iron, magnesium, or aluminum.
Paget’s Disease

Initial Treatment Regimens

5 to 10 mg/kg/day, not to exceed 6 months or 11 to 20 mg/kg/day, not to exceed 3 months.

The recommended initial dose is 5 mg/kg/day for a period not to exceed 6 months. Doses above 10 mg/kg/day should be reserved for when 1) lower doses are ineffective or 2) there is an overriding need to suppress rapid bone turnover (especially when irreversible neurologic damage is possible) or reduce elevated cardiac output. Doses in excess of 20 mg/kg/day are not recommended.

Retreatment Guidelines

Retreatment should be initiated only after 1) an etidronate disodium-free period of at least 90 days and 2) there is biochemical, symptomatic or other evidence of active disease process. It is advisable to monitor patients every 3 to 6 months although some patients may go drug free for extended periods. Retreatment regimens are the same as for initial treatment. For most patients the original dose will be adequate for retreatment. If not, consideration should be given to increasing the dose within the recommended guidelines.

Heterotopic Ossification

The following treatment regimens have been shown to be effective:
• Total Hip Replacement Patients: 20 mg/kg/day for 1 month before and 3 months after surgery (4 months total). • Spinal Cord Injured Patients: 20 mg/kg/day for 2 weeks followed by 10 mg/kg/day for 10 weeks (12 weeks total). Etidronate disodium therapy should begin as soon as medically feasible following the injury, preferably prior to evidence of heterotopic ossification.
Retreatment has not been studied.
Theophylline Anhydrous

Theophylline Anhydrous

Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets 400 or 600 mg can be taken once a day in the morning or evening. It is recommended that Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets be taken with meals. Patients should be advised that if they choose to take Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets with food it should be taken consistently with food and if they take it in a fasted condition it should routinely be taken fasted. It is important that the product whenever dosed be dosed consistently with or without food.

Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets are not to be chewed or crushed because it may lead to a rapid release of theophylline with the potential for toxicity. The scored tablet may be split. Infrequently, patients receiving Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets 400 or 600 mg may pass an intact matrix tablet in the stool or via colostomy. These matrix tablets usually contain little or no residual theophylline.

Stabilized patients, 12 years of age or older, who are taking an immediate-release or controlled-release theophylline product may be transferred to once-daily administration of 400 or 600 mg Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets on a mg-for-mg basis.

It must be recognized that the peak and trough serum theophylline levels produced by the once-daily dosing may vary from those produced by the previous product and/or regimen.

The steady-state peak serum theophylline concentration is a function of the dose, the dosing interval, and the rate of theophylline absorption and clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a peak serum theophylline concentration in the 10 to 20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance (e.g., 400 to 1600 mg/day in adults <60 years old and 10 to 36 mg/kg/day in children 1 to 9 years old). For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either sub-therapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. For example, at a dose of 900 mg/d in adults <60 years or 22 mg/kg/d in children 1 to 9 years, the steady-state peak serum theophylline concentration will be <10 mcg/mL in about 30% of patients, 10 to 20 mcg/mL in about 50% and 20 to 30 mcg/mL in about 20% of patients. General Considerations: The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of peak serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects.

Transient caffeine-like adverse effects and excessive serum concentrations in slow metabolizers can be avoided in most patients by starting with a sufficiently low dose and slowly increasing the dose, in small increments (see ). Dose increases should only be made if the previous dosage is well tolerated and at intervals of no less than 3 days to allow serum theophylline concentrations to reach the new steady-state. Dosage adjustment should be guided by serum theophylline concentration measurement (see and ). Healthcare providers should instruct patients and caregivers to discontinue any dosage that causes adverse effects, to withhold the medication until these symptoms are gone and to then resume therapy at a lower, previously tolerated dosage (see ). if judged to be clinically indicated,Table VPRECAUTIONS, Laboratory TestsDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Table VIWARNINGS

If the patient’s symptoms are well controlled, there are no apparent adverse effects, and no intervening factors that might alter dosage requirements (see and ), serum theophylline concentrations should be monitored at 6 month intervals for rapidly growing children and at yearly intervals for all others. In acutely ill patients, serum theophylline concentrations should be monitored at frequent intervals, e.g., every 24 hours. WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.

contains theophylline dosing titration schema recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. contains recommendations for theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Table VTable VIApplication of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.
If caffeine-like adverse effects occur, then consideration should be given to a lower dose and titrating the dose more slowly (see ). 1ADVERSE REACTIONS Table V. Dosing initiation and titration (as anhydrous theophylline).* Children (12 to 15 years) and adults (16 to 60 years) without risk factors for impaired clearance Titration Step Children <45 kg Children >45 kg and adults 1. Starting Dosage 12 to 14 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 300 mg/day admin. QD* 300 to 400 mg/day admin. QD* 1 2. After 3 days, if increase dose to: tolerated, 16 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 400 mg/day admin. QD* 400 to 600 mg/day admin. QD* 1 3. After 3 more days, and increase dose to: iftolerated,if needed 20 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 600 mg/day admin. QD* As with all theophylline products, doses greater than 600 mg should be titrated according to blood level (see Table VI).
In children 12 to 15 years of age, the theophylline dose should not exceed 16 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 400 mg/day in the presence of risk factors for reduced theophylline clearance (see ) or if it is not feasible to monitor serum theophylline concentrations. B.Patients with Risk Factors For Impaired Clearance, The Elderly (>60 Years), And those In Whom It Is Not Feasible To Monitor Serum Theophylline Concentrations: WARNINGS

In adolescents ≥16 years and adults, including the elderly, the theophylline dose should not exceed 400 mg/day in the presence of risk factors for reduced theophylline clearance (see ) or if it is not feasible to monitor serum theophylline concentrations. WARNINGS

*Patients with more rapid metabolism clinically identified by higher than average dose requirements, should receive a smaller dose more frequently (every 12 hours) to prevent breakthrough symptoms resulting from low trough concentrations before the next dose.
Table VI. Dosage adjustment guided by serum theophylline concentration. ¶Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g. sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see ). WARNINGS Peak Serum Concentration Dosage Adjustment <9.9 mcg/mL If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase dose about 25%. Recheck serum concentration after three days for further dosage adjustment. not 10 to 14.9 mcg/mL If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain dose and recheck serum concentration at 6 to12 month intervals.¶ If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated consider adding additional medication(s) to treatment regimen. 15 to 19.9 mcg/mL Consider 10% decrease in dose to provide greater margin of safety even if current dosage is tolerated. ¶ 20 to 24.9 mcg/mL Decrease dose by 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment. 25 to 30 mcg/mL Skip next dose and decrease subsequent doses at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). >30 mcg/mL Treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease dose by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment.
Isosorbide Mononitrate

Isosorbide Mononitrate

The recommended regimen of Isosorbide Mononitrate Tablets is 20 mg twice daily, with the doses seven hours apart. A starting dose of 5 mg (½ tablet of the 10 mg dosing strength) might be appropriate for persons of particularly small stature but should be increased to at least 10 mg by the second or third day of therapy. Dosage adjustments are not necessary for elderly patients or patients with altered hepatic or renal function.

As noted above ( ), multiple studies of organic nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. The asymmetric (2 doses, 7 hours apart) dosing regimen for Isosorbide Mononitrate Tablets provides a daily nitrate-free interval to minimize the development of tolerance. Clinical Pharmacology

As also noted under , well-controlled studies have shown that tolerance to Isosorbide Mononitrate Tablets occurs to some extent when using the twice-daily regimen in which the two doses are given seven hours apart. This regimen has been shown to have antianginal efficacy beginning one hour after the first dose and lasting at least seven hours after the second dose. The duration (if any) of antianginal activity beyond fourteen hours has not been studied. Clinical Pharmacology

In clinical trials, isosorbide mononitrate has been administered in a variety of regimens and doses. Doses above 20 mg twice a day (with the doses seven hours apart) have not been adequately studied. Doses of 5 mg twice a day are clearly effective (effectiveness based on exercise tolerance) for only the first day of a twice-a-day (with doses 7 hours apart) regimen.
Ramipril

Ramipril

2.1 Hypertension

The recommended initial dose for patients not receiving a diuretic is 2.5 mg once a day. Adjust dose according to blood pressure response. The usual maintenance dosage range is 2.5 mg to 20 mg per day administered as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, consider an increase in dosage or twice daily administration. If blood pressure is not controlled with ramipril alone, a diuretic can be added.

2.3 Heart Failure Post-Myocardial Infarction

For the treatment of post-myocardial infarction patients who have shown signs of congestive heart failure, the recommended starting dose of ramipril is 2.5 mg twice daily (5 mg per day). A patient who becomes hypotensive at this dose may be switched to 1.25 mg twice daily. After one week at the starting dose, increase dose (if tolerated) toward a target dose of 5 mg twice daily, with dosage increases being about 3 weeks apart.

After the initial dose of ramipril, observe the patient under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. If possible, reduce the dose of any concomitant diuretic as this may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of ramipril does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension [see , ] WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5)DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1).

2.4 General Dosing Information

Generally, swallow ramipril capsules whole. The ramipril capsule can also be opened and the contents sprinkled on a small amount (about 4 oz.) of applesauce or mixed in 4 oz. (120 mL) of water or apple juice. To be sure that ramipril is not lost when such a mixture is used, consume the mixture in its entirety. The described mixtures can be pre-prepared and stored for up to 24 hours at room temperature or up to 48 hours under refrigeration.

Concomitant administration of ramipril with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium‑sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium [see ]. WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.8)

2.5 Dosage Adjustment

Renal Impairment

Establish baseline renal function in patients initiating ramipril. Usual regimens of therapy with ramipril may be followed in patients with estimated creatinine clearance >40 mL/min. However, in patients with worse impairment, 25% of the usual dose of ramipril is expected to produce full therapeutic levels of ramiprilat [see ]. USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6)

Hypertension

For patients with hypertension and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose is 1.25 mg ramipril once daily. Dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum total daily dose of 5 mg.

Volume Depletion or Renal Artery Stenosis

Blood pressure decreases associated with any dose of ramipril depend, in part, on the presence or absence of volume depletion (e.g., past and current diuretic use) or the presence or absence of renal artery stenosis. If such circumstances are suspected to be present, initiate dosing at 1.25 mg once daily. Adjust dosage according to blood pressure response.
Nitro-time

Nitro-time

As noted above ( ) careful studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels of nitroglycerin results in tolerance (i.e., loss of clinical response). Every dosing regimen for Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should provide a daily nitrate-free interval to avoid the development of this tolerance. The minimum necessary length of such an interval has not been defined, but studies with other nitroglycerin formulations have shown that 10 to 12 hours is sufficient. Large controlled studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin show that no dosing regimen with Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The pharmacokinetics of Nitroglycerin capsules, and the clinical effects of multiple-dose regimens, have not been well studied. In clinical trials, the initial regimen of Nitroglycerin has been 2.5 to 6.5 mg three to four times a day, with subsequent upward dose adjustment guided by symptoms and side effects. In one trial, 5 of the 18 subjects were titrated up to a dose of 26 mg four times a day.
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Initial Treatment

The recommended starting dose for venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets is 75 mg/day, administered in two or three divided doses, taken with food. Depending on tolerability and the need for further clinical effect, the dose may be increased to 150 mg/day. If needed, the dose should be further increased up to 225 mg/day. When increasing the dose, increments of up to 75 mg/day should be made at intervals of no less than 4 days. In outpatient settings there was no evidence of usefulness of doses greater than 225 mg/day for moderately depressed patients, but more severely depressed inpatients responded to a mean dose of 350 mg/day. Certain patients, including more severely depressed patients, may therefore respond more to higher doses, up to a maximum of 375 mg/day, generally in three divided doses (see , , ). PRECAUTIONSGeneralUse in Patients With Concomitant Illness

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets, other SNRIs, or SSRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see ). When treating pregnant women with venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. PRECAUTIONS

Dosage for Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance and increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with hepatic cirrhosis and mild and moderate hepatic impairment compared to normal subjects (see ), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between subjects with cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose even more than 50%, and individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Dosage for Patients With Renal Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance for venlafaxine and the increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with renal impairment (GFR = 10 to 70 mL/min) compared to normals (see ), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 25% in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. It is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients undergoing hemodialysis. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Dosage for Elderly Patients

No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any antidepressant, however, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose.

Maintenance Treatment

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In one study, in which patients responding during 8 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules (75, 150, or 225 mg/day, qAM) during 26 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated. A second longer-term study has demonstrated the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets in maintaining an antidepressant response in patients with recurrent depression who had responded and continued to be improved during an initial 26 weeks of treatment and were then randomly assigned to placebo or venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets for periods of up to 52 weeks on the same dose (100 to 200 mg/day, on a b.i.d. schedule) (see ). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets/venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release capsules needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment. CLINICAL TRIALS

Discontinuing Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Tablets

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets, other SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported (see ). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate. PRECAUTIONS

Switching a Patient to or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets. Conversely, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

Use of Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Tablets With Other MAOls, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 7 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see ). WARNINGS

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with venlafaxine hydrochloride tablets is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see ). WARNINGS
Digox

Digox

Recommended dosages of digoxin may require considerable modification because of individual sensitivity of the patient to the drug, the presence of associated conditions, or the use of concurrent medications. In selecting a dose of digoxin, the following factors must be considered: General:
The body weight of the patient. Doses should be calculated based upon lean (i.e., ideal) body weight. The patient’s renal function, preferably evaluated on the basis of estimated creatinine clearance. The patient’s age. Infants and children require different doses of digoxin than adults. Also, advanced age may be indicative of diminished renal function even in patients with normal serum creatinine concentration (i.e., below 1.5 mg/dL). Concomitant disease states, concurrent medications, or other factors likely to alter the pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamic profile of digoxin (see ). PRECAUTIONS
In general, the dose of digoxin used should be determined on clinical grounds. However, measurement of serum digoxin concentrations can be helpful to the clinician in determining the adequacy of digoxin therapy and in assigning certain probabilities to the likelihood of digoxin intoxication. About two-thirds of adults considered adequately digitalized (without evidence of toxicity) have serum digoxin concentrations ranging from 0.8 to 2.0 ng/mL. However, digoxin may produce clinical benefits even at serum concentrations below this range. About two-thirds of adult patients with clinical toxicity have serum digoxin concentrations greater than 2.0 ng/mL. However, since one-third of patients with clinical toxicity have concentrations less than 2.0 ng/mL, values below 2.0 ng/mL do not rule out the possibility that a certain sign or symptom is related to digoxin therapy. Rarely, there are patients who are unable to tolerate digoxin at serum concentrations below 0.8 ng/mL. Consequently, the serum concentration of digoxin should always be interpreted in the overall clinical context, and an isolated measurement should not be used alone as the basis for increasing or decreasing the dose of the drug. Serum Digoxin Concentrations:

To allow adequate time for equilibration of digoxin between serum and tissue, sampling of serum concentrations should be done just before the next scheduled dose of the drug. If this is not possible, sampling should be done at least 6 to 8 hours after the last dose, regardless of the route of administration or the formulation used. On a once-daily dosing schedule, the concentration of digoxin will be 10% to 25% lower when sampled at 24 versus 8 hours, depending upon the patient’s renal function. On a twice-daily dosing schedule, there will be only minor differences in serum digoxin concentrations whether sampling is done at 8 or 12 hours after a dose.

If a discrepancy exists between the reported serum concentration and the observed clinical response, the clinician should consider the following possibilities:
Analytical problems in the assay procedure. Inappropriate serum sampling time. Administration of a digitalis glycoside other than digoxin Conditions (described in and ) causing an alteration in the sensitivity of the patient to digoxin. WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS Serum digoxin concentration may decrease acutely during periods of exercise without any associated change in clinical efficacy due to increased binding of digoxin to skeletal muscle.
Digitalization may be accomplished by either of two general approaches that vary in dosage and frequency of administration, but reach the same endpoint in terms of total amount of digoxin accumulated in the body. Heart Failure: Adults:
If rapid digitalization is considered medically appropriate, it may be achieved by administering a loading dose based upon projected peak digoxin body stores. Maintenance dose can be calculated as a percentage of the loading dose. More gradual digitalization may be obtained by beginning an appropriate maintenance dose, thus allowing digoxin body stores to accumulate slowly. Steady-state serum digoxin concentrations will be achieved in approximately five half-lives of the drug for the individual patient. Depending upon the patient's renal function, this will take between 1 and 3 weeks.
Peak digoxin body stores of 8 to 12 mcg/kg should provide therapeutic effect with minimum risk of toxicity in most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm. Because of altered digoxin distribution and elimination, projected peak body stores for patients with renal insufficiency should be conservative (i.e., 6 to 10 mcg/kg) [see ]. Rapid Digitalization with a Loading Dose:PRECAUTIONS

The loading dose should be administered in several portions, with roughly half the total given as the first dose. Additional fractions of this planned total dose may be given at 6 to 8-hour intervals, with careful assessment of clinical response before each additional dose.

If the patient’s clinical response necessitates a change from the calculated loading dose of digoxin, then calculation of the maintenance dose should be based upon the amount actually given.

A single initial dose of 500 to 750 mcg (0.5 to 0.75 mg) of digoxin tablets usually produces a detectable effect in 0.5 to 2 hours that becomes maximal in 2 to 6 hours. Additional doses of 125 to 375 mcg (0.125 to 0.375 mg) may be given cautiously at 6 to 8-hour intervals until clinical evidence of an adequate effect is noted. The usual amount of digoxin tablets that a 70 kg patient requires to achieve 8 to 12 mcg/kg peak body stores is 750 to 1250 mcg (0.75 to 1.25 mg).

Digoxin Injection is frequently used to achieve rapid digitalization, with conversion to digoxin tablets or digoxin solution in capsules for maintenance therapy. If patients are switched from intravenous to oral digoxin formulations, allowances must be made for differences in bioavailability when calculating maintenance dosages (see Table 1, ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The doses of digoxin used in controlled trials in patients with heart failure have ranged from 125 to 500 mcg (0.125 to 0.5 mg) once daily. In these studies, the digoxin dose has been generally titrated according to the patient’s age, lean body weight, and renal function. Therapy is generally initiated at a dose of 250 mcg (0.25 mg) once daily in patients under age 70 with good renal function, at a dose of 125 mcg (0.125 mg) once daily in patients over age 70 or with impaired renal function, and at a dose of 62.5 mcg (0.0625 mg) in patients with marked renal impairment. Doses may be increased every 2 weeks according to clinical response. Maintenance Dosing:

In a subset of approximately 1800 patients enrolled in the DIG trial (wherein dosing was based on an algorithm similar to that in Table 5) the mean (± SD) serum digoxin concentrations at 1 month and 12 months were 1.01 ± 0.47 ng/mL and 0.97 ± 0.43 ng/mL, respectively.

The maintenance dose should be based upon the percentage of the peak body stores lost each day through elimination. The following formula has had wide clinical use:

Maintenance Dose = Peak Body Stores (i.e., Loading Dose) x % Daily Loss/100 Where: % Daily Loss = 14 + Ccr/5

(Ccr is creatinine clearance, corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m body surface area.) 2

Table 5 provides average daily maintenance dose requirements of digoxin tablets for patients with heart failure based upon lean body weight and renal function:
Table 5: Usual Daily Maintenance Dose Requirements (mcg) of Digoxin for Estimated Peak Body Stores of 10 mcg/kg *
Ccr is creatinine clearance, corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m body surface area. , if only serum creatinine concentrations (Scr) are available, a Ccr (corrected to 70 kg body weight) may be estimated in men as (140 - Age)/Scr. For women, this result should be multiplied by 0.85. This equation cannot be used for estimating creatinine clearance in infants or children. 2For adultsNote:
†
If no loading dose administered.
‡ 62.5 mcg = 0.0625 mg Lean Body Weight
Corrected Ccr (mL/min per 70 kg) *
kg 50 lb 110 60 132 70 154 80 176 90 198 100 220 Number of Days Before Steady State Achieved † 0 62.5 ‡ 125 125 125 187.5 187.5 22 10 125 125 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 19 20 125 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 250 16 30 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 250 250 14 40 125 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 13 50 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 250 12 60 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 375 11 70 187.5 250 250 250 250 375 10 80 187.5 250 250 250 375 375 9 90 187.5 250 250 250 375 500 8 100 250 250 250 375 375 500 7
Based on Table 5, a patient in heart failure with an estimated lean body weight of 70 kg and a Ccr of 60 mL/min should be given a dose of 250 mcg (0.25 mg) daily of digoxin tablets, usually taken after the morning meal. If no loading dose is administered, steady-state serum concentrations in this patient should be anticipated at approximately 11 days. Example:

In general, divided daily dosing is recommended for infants and young children (under age 10). In the newborn period, renal clearance of digoxin is diminished and suitable dosage adjustments must be observed. This is especially pronounced in the premature infant. Beyond the immediate newborn period, children generally require proportionally larger doses than adults on the basis of body weight or body surface area. Children over 10 years of age require adult dosages in proportion to their body weight. Some researchers have suggested that infants and young children tolerate slightly higher serum concentrations than do adults. Infants and Children:

Daily maintenance doses for each age group are given in Table 6 and should provide therapeutic effects with minimum risk of toxicity in most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm. These recommendations assume the presence of normal renal function:
Table 6: Daily Maintenance Doses in Children with Normal Renal Function Age Daily Maintenance Dose (mcg/kg) 2 to 5 Years 10 to 15 5 to 10 Years 7 to 10 Over 10 Years 3 to 5
In children with renal disease, digoxin must be carefully titrated based upon clinical response.

It cannot be overemphasized that both adult and pediatric dosage guidelines provided are based upon average patient response and substantial individual variation can be expected. Accordingly, ultimate dosage selection must be based upon clinical assessment of the patient.

Peak digoxin body stores larger than the 8 to 12 mcg/kg required for most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm have been used for control of ventricular rate in patients with atrial fibrillation. Doses of digoxin used for the treatment of chronic atrial fibrillation should be titrated to the minimum dose that achieves the desired ventricular rate control without causing undesirable side effects. Data are not available to establish the appropriate resting or exercise target rates that should be achieved. Atrial Fibrillation:

The difference in bio-availability between Digoxin Injection or Digoxin Solution in Capsules and Digoxin Elixir Pediatric or Digoxin Tablets must be considered when changing patients from one dosage form to another. Doses of 100 mcg (0.1 mg) and 200 mcg (0.2 mg) of Digoxin Solution in Capsules are approximately equivalent to 125 mcg (0.125 mg) and 250 mcg (0.25 mg) doses of Digoxin Tablets and Elixir Pediatric, respectively (see Table 1 in ). Dosage Adjustment When Changing Preparations: CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics
Glycopyrrolate

Glycopyrrolate

The dosage of Glycopyrrolate tablets 1 and 2 mg should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patient to assure symptomatic control with a minimum of adverse reactions. The presently recommended maximum daily dosage of Glycopyrrolate is 8 mg.

The recommended initial dosage of Glycopyrrolate for adults is one tablet three times daily (in the morning, early afternoon, and at bedtime). Some patients may require two tablets at bedtime to assure overnight control of symptoms. For maintenance, a dosage of one tablet twice a day is frequently adequate. Glycopyrrolate, 1 mg Tablets.

. The recommended dosage of Glycopyrrolate for adults is one tablet two or three times daily at equally spaced intervals. Glycopyrrolate, 2 mg Tablets

Glycopyrrolate tablets are not recommended for use in pediatric patients under the age of 12 years.
Erythromycin Base

Erythromycin Base

In most patients, Erythromycin Tablets are well absorbed and may be dosed orally without regard to meals. However, optimal blood levels are obtained when Erythromycin Tablets are given in the fasting state (at least 1/2 hour and preferably 2 hours before meals).

Adults

The usual dosage of Erythromycin Tablets is one 250 mg tablet four times daily in equally spaced doses or one 500 mg tablet every 12 hours. Dosage may be increased up to 4 g per day according to the severity of the infection. However, twice-a-day dosing is not recommended when doses larger than 1 g daily are administered.

Children

Age, weight, and severity of the infection are important factors in determining the proper dosage. The usual dosage is 30 to 50 mg/kg/day, in equally divided doses. For more severe infections this dosage may be doubled but should not exceed 4 g per day.

In the treatment of streptococcal infections of the upper respiratory tract (e.g., tonsillitis or pharyngitis), the therapeutic dosage of erythromycin should be administered for at least ten days.

The American Heart Association suggests a dosage of 250 mg of erythromycin orally, twice a day in long-term prophylaxis of streptococcal upper respiratory tract infections for the prevention of recurring attacks of rheumatic fever in patients allergic to penicillin and sulfonamides. 4

Conjunctivitis of the Newborn Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

Oral erythromycin suspension 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses for at least 2 weeks. 4

Pneumonia of Infancy Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

Although the optimal duration of therapy has not been established, the recommended therapy is oral erythromycin suspension 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses for at least 3 weeks.

Urogenital Infections During Pregnancy Due to Chlamydia trachomatis

Although the optimal dose and duration of therapy have not been established, the suggested treatment is 500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day on an empty stomach for at least 7 days. For women who cannot tolerate this regimen, a decreased dose of one erythromycin 500 mg tablet orally every 12 hours or 250 mg by mouth four times a day should be used for at least 14 days. 6

For adults with uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infections caused by Chlamydia trachomatis, when tetracycline is contraindicated or not tolerated

500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day for at least 7 days. 6

For patients with nongonococcal urethritis caused by Ureaplasma urealyticum when tetracycline is contraindicated or not tolerated

500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day for at least seven days. 6

Primary syphilis

30 to 40 g given in divided doses over a period of 10 to 15 days.

Acute Pelvic Inflammatory Disease Caused by N. gonorrhoeae

500 mg Erythrocin Lactobionate-I.V. (erythromycin lactobionate for injection, USP) every 6 hours for 3 days, followed by 500 mg of erythromycin base orally every 12 hours for 7 days. ®

Intestinal Amebiasis

Adults

500 mg every 12 hours or 250 mg every 6 hours for 10 to 14 days.

Children

30 to 50 mg/kg/day in divided doses for 10 to 14 days.

Pertussis

Although optimal dosage and duration have not been established, doses of erythromycin utilized in reported clinical studies were 40 to 50 mg/kg/day, given in divided doses for 5 to 14 days.

Legionnaires' Disease

Although optimal dosage has not been established, doses utilized in reported clinical data were 1 to 4 g daily in divided doses.
Chloroquine

Chloroquine

The dosage of chloroquine phosphate is often expressed in terms of equivalent chloroquine base. Each 250 mg tablet of chloroquine phosphate is equivalent to 150 mg base and each 500 mg tablet of chloroquine phosphate is equivalent to 300 mg base. In infants and children the dosage is preferably calculated by body weight.

Suppression – 500 mg (= 300 mg base) on exactly the same day of each week. Malaria:Adult Dose:

The weekly suppressive dosage is 5 mg calculated as base, per kg of body weight, but should not exceed the adult dose regardless of weight. Pediatric Dose:

If circumstances permit, suppressive therapy should begin two weeks prior to exposure. However, failing this in adults, an initial double (loading) dose of 1 g (= 600 mg base), or in children 10 mg base/kg may be taken in two divided doses, six hours apart. The suppressive therapy should be continued for eight weeks after leaving the endemic area.

For Treatment of Acute Attack

An initial dose of 1 g (= 600 mg base) followed by an additional 500 mg (= 300 mg base) after six to eight hours and a single dose of 500 mg (= 300 mg base) on each of two consecutive days. This represents a total dose of 2.5 g chloroquine phosphate of 1.5 g base in three days. Adults:

The dosage for adults of low body weight and for infants and children should be determined as follows:

First dose: 10 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single dose of 600 mg base).

Second dose: (6 hours after first dose) 5 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single dose of 300 mg base).

Third dose: (24 hours after first dose) 5 mg base per kg.

Fourth dose: (36 hours after first dose) 5 mg base per kg.

For radical cure of vivax and malariae malaria concomitant therapy with an 8-aminoquinoline compound is necessary.

1 g (600 mg base) daily for two days, followed by 500 mg (300 mg base) daily for at least two to three weeks. Treatment is usually combined with an effective intestinal amebicide. Extraintestinal Amebiasis: Adults:

See . Geriatric Use:PRECAUTIONS, Geriatric Use
Ethambutol Hydrochlorid...

Ethambutol Hydrochloride

Ethambutol hydrochloride should not be used alone, in initial treatment or in retreatment. Ethambutol hydrochloride should be administered on a once every 24-hour basis only. Absorption is not significantly altered by administration with food. Therapy, in general, should be continued until bacteriological conversion has become permanent and maximal clinical improvement has occurred.

Ethambutol hydrochloride is not recommended for use in pediatric patients under thirteen years of age since safe conditions for use have not been established.

Initial Treatment

In patients who have not received previous antituberculous therapy, administer ethambutol hydrochloride 15 mg/ kg (7 mg/lb) of body weight, as a single oral dose once every 24 hours. In the more recent studies, isoniazid has been administered concurrently in a single, daily, oral dose.

Retreatment

In patients who have received previous antituberculous therapy, administer ethambutol hydrochloride 25 mg/kg (11 mg/lb) of body weight, as a single oral dose once every 24 hours. Concurrently administer at least one other antituberculous drug to which the organisms have been demonstrated to be susceptible by appropriate tests. Suitable drugs usually consist of those not previously used in the treatment of the patient. After 60 days of ethambutol hydrochloride administration, decrease the dose to 15 mg/kg (7 mg/lb) of body weight, and administer as a single oral dose once every 24 hours. in-vitro

During the period when a patient is on a daily dose of 25 mg/kg, monthly eye examinations are advised.

See Table for easy selection of proper weight-dose tablet(s).
Weight-Dose Table
15 mg/kg (7 mg/lb) Schedule

Weight Range

Daily Dose

Pounds

Kilograms

-----------------
In mg Under 85 lbs. Under 37 kg
-----------------
500 85 – 94.5 37 – 43
-----------------
600 95 – 109.5 43 – 50
-----------------
700 110 – 124.5 50 – 57
-----------------
800 125 – 139.5 57 – 64
-----------------
900 140 – 154.5 64 – 71
-----------------
1000 155 – 169.5 71 – 79
-----------------
1100 170 – 184.5 79 – 84
-----------------
1200 185 – 199.5 84 – 90
-----------------
1300 200 – 214.5 90 – 97
-----------------
1400 215 and Over Over 97
-----------------
1500
25 mg/kg (11 mg/lb) Schedule
Under 85 lbs. Under 38 kg
-----------------
900 85 – 92.5 38 – 42
-----------------
1000 93 – 101.5 42 – 45.5
-----------------
1100 102 – 109.5 45.5 – 50
-----------------
1200 110 – 118.5 50 – 54
-----------------
1300 119 – 128.5 54 – 58
-----------------
1400 129 – 136.5 58 – 62
-----------------
1500 137 – 146.5 62 – 67
-----------------
1600 147 – 155.5 67 – 71
-----------------
1700 156 – 164.5 71 – 75
-----------------
1800 165 – 173.5 75 – 79
-----------------
1900 174 – 182.5 79 – 83
-----------------
2000 183 – 191.5 83 – 87
-----------------
2100 192 – 199.5 87 – 91
-----------------
2200 200 – 209.5 91 – 95
-----------------
2300 210 – 218.5 95 – 99
-----------------
2400 219 and Over Over 99
-----------------
2500
Liothyronine Sodium

Liothyronine Sodium

The dosage of thyroid hormones is determined by the indication and must in every case be individualized according to patient response and laboratory findings.

Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP are intended for oral administration; once-a-day dosage is recommended. Although liothyronine sodium has a rapid cutoff, its metabolic effects persist for a few days following discontinuance.

Mild Hypothyroidism

Recommended starting dosage is 25 mcg daily. Daily dosage then may be increased by up to 25 mcg every 1 or 2 weeks. Usual maintenance dose is 25 to 75 mcg daily.

The rapid onset and dissipation of action of liothyronine sodium (T ), as compared with levothyroxine sodium (T ), has led some clinicians to prefer its use in patients who might be more susceptible to the untoward effects of thyroid medication. However, the wide swings in serum T levels that follow its administration and the possibility of more pronounced cardiovascular side effects tend to counterbalance the stated advantages. 343

Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP may be used in preference to levothyroxine (T ) during radioisotope scanning procedures, since induction of hypothyroidism in those cases is more abrupt and can be of shorter duration. It may also be preferred when impairment of peripheral conversion of T to T is suspected. 443

Myxedema

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily. This may be increased by 5 to 10 mcg daily every 1 or 2 weeks. When 25 mcg daily is reached, dosage may be increased by 5 to 25 mcg every 1 or 2 weeks until a satisfactory therapeutic response is attained. Usual maintenance dose is 50 to 100 mcg daily.

Myxedema Coma

Myxedema coma is usually precipitated in the hypothyroid patient of long standing by intercurrent illness or drugs such as sedatives and anesthetics and should be considered a medical emergency.

An intravenous preparation of liothyronine sodium is marketed under the trade name Triostat for use in myxedema coma/precoma. ®

Congenital Hypothyroidism

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily, with a 5 mcg increment every 3 to 4 days until the desired response is achieved. Infants a few months old may require only 20 mcg daily for maintenance. At 1 year, 50 mcg daily may be required. Above 3 years, full adult dosage may be necessary (see ). PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use

Simple (non-toxic) Goiter

Recommended starting dosage is 5 mcg daily. This dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mcg daily every 1 or 2 weeks. When 25 mcg daily is reached, dosage may be increased every week or two by 12.5 or 25 mcg. Usual maintenance dosage is 75 mcg daily.

therapy should be started with 5 mcg daily and increased only by 5 mcg increments at the recommended intervals. In the elderly or in pediatric patients,

from thyroid, L-thyroxine or thyroglobulin, discontinue the other medication, initiate Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP at a low dosage, and increase gradually according to the patient's response. When selecting a starting dosage, bear in mind that this drug has a rapid onset of action, and that residual effects of the other thyroid preparation may persist for the first several weeks of therapy. When switching a patient to Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP

Thyroid Suppression Therapy

Administration of thyroid hormone in doses higher than those produced physiologically by the gland results in suppression of the production of endogenous hormone. This is the basis for the thyroid suppression test and is used as an aid in the diagnosis of patients with signs of mild hyperthyroidism in whom baseline laboratory tests appear normal or to demonstrate thyroid gland autonomy in patients with Graves' ophthalmopathy. I uptake is determined before and after the administration of the exogenous hormone. A 50% or greater suppression of uptake indicates a normal thyroid-pituitary axis and thus rules out thyroid gland autonomy. 131

Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP are given in doses of 75 to 100 mcg/day for 7 days, and radioactive iodine uptake is determined before and after administration of the hormone. If thyroid function is under normal control, the radioiodine uptake will drop significantly after treatment. Liothyronine Sodium Tablets, USP should be administered cautiously to patients in whom there is a strong suspicion of thyroid gland autonomy, in view of the fact that the exogenous hormone effects will be additive to the endogenous source.
Etodolac

Etodolac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of etodolac extended-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use etodolac extended-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with etodolac extended-release tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of juvenile rheumatoid arthritis in patients 6 to 16 years of age, the recommended dose given orally once per day should be based on body weight, according to the following table:
Table 4. Body Weight Range (kg) Dose 20 to 30 400 mg Tablet x 1 31 to 45 600 mg Tablet x 1 46 to 60 400 mg Tablet x 2 > 60 500 mg Tablet x 2
Rheumatoid Arthritis and Osteoarthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting dose of etodolac extended-release tablets is 400 to 1000 mg given orally once per day.

As with other NSAIDs, the lowest effective dose should be sought for each patient. In chronic conditions, a therapeutic response to therapy with etodolac extended-release tablets is sometimes seen within one week of therapy, but most often is observed by two weeks.
Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex Sodium

Mania

Divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets are administered orally. The recommended initial dose is 750 mg daily in divided doses. The dose should be increased as rapidly as possible to achieve the lowest therapeutic dose which produces the desired clinical effect or the desired range of plasma concentrations. In placebo-controlled clinical trials of acute mania, patients were dosed to a clinical response with a trough plasma concentration between 50 and 125 µg/mL. Maximum concentrations were generally achieved within 14 days. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day.

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer term management of a patient who improves during divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets treatment of an acute manic episode. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the benefits of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets in such longer-term treatment. Although there are no efficacy data that specifically address longer-term antimanic treatment with divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, the safety of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets in long-term use is supported by data from record reviews involving approximately 360 patients treated with divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets for greater than 3 months.

Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets are administered orally. Divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets are indicated as monotherapy and adjunctive therapy in complex partial seizures in adults and pediatric patients down to the age of 10 years, and in simple and complex absence seizures. As the divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected (see , ). PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 µg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 µg/mL in females and 135 µg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50-100 µg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made. Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 µg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made. If the total daily dose exceeds 250 mg, it should be given in divided doses.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed (see ). However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs (see ), periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy (see , ). CLINICAL STUDIESDrug InteractionsPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day. If the total daily dose exceeds 250 mg, it should be given in divided doses.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentrations for most patients with absence seizures is considered to range from 50 to 100 µg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

As the divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected (see ). PRECAUTIONS

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

In epileptic patients previously receiving valproic acid therapy, divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets should be initiated at the same daily dose and dosing schedule. After the patient is stabilized on divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets, a dosing schedule of two or three times a day may be elected in selected patients.

Migraine

Divalproex sodium delayed-release tablets are administered orally. The recommended starting dose is 250 mg twice daily. Some patients may benefit from doses up to 1000 mg/day. In the clinical trials, there was no evidence that higher doses led to greater efficacy.

General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse events. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response (see ). WARNINGS

Dose-Related Adverse Events

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose-related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 µg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 µg/mL (males) (see ). The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions. PRECAUTIONS

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.
Digox

Digox

Recommended dosages of digoxin may require considerable modification because of individual sensitivity of the patient to the drug, the presence of associated conditions, or the use of concurrent medications. In selecting a dose of digoxin, the following factors must be considered: General:
The body weight of the patient. Doses should be calculated based upon lean (i.e., ideal) body weight. The patient’s renal function, preferably evaluated on the basis of estimated creatinine clearance. The patient’s age. Infants and children require different doses of digoxin than adults. Also, advanced age may be indicative of diminished renal function even in patients with normal serum creatinine concentration (i.e., below 1.5 mg/dL). Concomitant disease states, concurrent medications, or other factors likely to alter the pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamic profile of digoxin (see ). PRECAUTIONS
In general, the dose of digoxin used should be determined on clinical grounds. However, measurement of serum digoxin concentrations can be helpful to the clinician in determining the adequacy of digoxin therapy and in assigning certain probabilities to the likelihood of digoxin intoxication. About two-thirds of adults considered adequately digitalized (without evidence of toxicity) have serum digoxin concentrations ranging from 0.8 to 2.0 ng/mL. However, digoxin may produce clinical benefits even at serum concentrations below this range. About two-thirds of adult patients with clinical toxicity have serum digoxin concentrations greater than 2.0 ng/mL. However, since one-third of patients with clinical toxicity have concentrations less than 2.0 ng/mL, values below 2.0 ng/mL do not rule out the possibility that a certain sign or symptom is related to digoxin therapy. Rarely, there are patients who are unable to tolerate digoxin at serum concentrations below 0.8 ng/mL. Consequently, the serum concentration of digoxin should always be interpreted in the overall clinical context, and an isolated measurement should not be used alone as the basis for increasing or decreasing the dose of the drug. Serum Digoxin Concentrations:

To allow adequate time for equilibration of digoxin between serum and tissue, sampling of serum concentrations should be done just before the next scheduled dose of the drug. If this is not possible, sampling should be done at least 6 to 8 hours after the last dose, regardless of the route of administration or the formulation used. On a once-daily dosing schedule, the concentration of digoxin will be 10% to 25% lower when sampled at 24 versus 8 hours, depending upon the patient’s renal function. On a twice-daily dosing schedule, there will be only minor differences in serum digoxin concentrations whether sampling is done at 8 or 12 hours after a dose.

If a discrepancy exists between the reported serum concentration and the observed clinical response, the clinician should consider the following possibilities:
Analytical problems in the assay procedure. Inappropriate serum sampling time. Administration of a digitalis glycoside other than digoxin Conditions (described in and ) causing an alteration in the sensitivity of the patient to digoxin. WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS Serum digoxin concentration may decrease acutely during periods of exercise without any associated change in clinical efficacy due to increased binding of digoxin to skeletal muscle.
Digitalization may be accomplished by either of two general approaches that vary in dosage and frequency of administration, but reach the same endpoint in terms of total amount of digoxin accumulated in the body. Heart Failure: Adults:
If rapid digitalization is considered medically appropriate, it may be achieved by administering a loading dose based upon projected peak digoxin body stores. Maintenance dose can be calculated as a percentage of the loading dose. More gradual digitalization may be obtained by beginning an appropriate maintenance dose, thus allowing digoxin body stores to accumulate slowly. Steady-state serum digoxin concentrations will be achieved in approximately five half-lives of the drug for the individual patient. Depending upon the patient's renal function, this will take between 1 and 3 weeks.
Peak digoxin body stores of 8 to 12 mcg/kg should provide therapeutic effect with minimum risk of toxicity in most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm. Because of altered digoxin distribution and elimination, projected peak body stores for patients with renal insufficiency should be conservative (i.e., 6 to 10 mcg/kg) [see ]. Rapid Digitalization with a Loading Dose:PRECAUTIONS

The loading dose should be administered in several portions, with roughly half the total given as the first dose. Additional fractions of this planned total dose may be given at 6 to 8-hour intervals, with careful assessment of clinical response before each additional dose.

If the patient’s clinical response necessitates a change from the calculated loading dose of digoxin, then calculation of the maintenance dose should be based upon the amount actually given.

A single initial dose of 500 to 750 mcg (0.5 to 0.75 mg) of digoxin tablets usually produces a detectable effect in 0.5 to 2 hours that becomes maximal in 2 to 6 hours. Additional doses of 125 to 375 mcg (0.125 to 0.375 mg) may be given cautiously at 6 to 8-hour intervals until clinical evidence of an adequate effect is noted. The usual amount of digoxin tablets that a 70 kg patient requires to achieve 8 to 12 mcg/kg peak body stores is 750 to 1250 mcg (0.75 to 1.25 mg).

Digoxin Injection is frequently used to achieve rapid digitalization, with conversion to digoxin tablets or digoxin solution in capsules for maintenance therapy. If patients are switched from intravenous to oral digoxin formulations, allowances must be made for differences in bioavailability when calculating maintenance dosages (see Table 1, ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The doses of digoxin used in controlled trials in patients with heart failure have ranged from 125 to 500 mcg (0.125 to 0.5 mg) once daily. In these studies, the digoxin dose has been generally titrated according to the patient’s age, lean body weight, and renal function. Therapy is generally initiated at a dose of 250 mcg (0.25 mg) once daily in patients under age 70 with good renal function, at a dose of 125 mcg (0.125 mg) once daily in patients over age 70 or with impaired renal function, and at a dose of 62.5 mcg (0.0625 mg) in patients with marked renal impairment. Doses may be increased every 2 weeks according to clinical response. Maintenance Dosing:

In a subset of approximately 1800 patients enrolled in the DIG trial (wherein dosing was based on an algorithm similar to that in Table 5) the mean (± SD) serum digoxin concentrations at 1 month and 12 months were 1.01 ± 0.47 ng/mL and 0.97 ± 0.43 ng/mL, respectively.

The maintenance dose should be based upon the percentage of the peak body stores lost each day through elimination. The following formula has had wide clinical use:

Maintenance Dose = Peak Body Stores (i.e., Loading Dose) x % Daily Loss/100 Where: % Daily Loss = 14 + Ccr/5

(Ccr is creatinine clearance, corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m body surface area.) 2

Table 5 provides average daily maintenance dose requirements of digoxin tablets for patients with heart failure based upon lean body weight and renal function:
Table 5: Usual Daily Maintenance Dose Requirements (mcg) of Digoxin for Estimated Peak Body Stores of 10 mcg/kg *
Ccr is creatinine clearance, corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m body surface area. , if only serum creatinine concentrations (Scr) are available, a Ccr (corrected to 70 kg body weight) may be estimated in men as (140 - Age)/Scr. For women, this result should be multiplied by 0.85. This equation cannot be used for estimating creatinine clearance in infants or children. 2For adultsNote:
†
If no loading dose administered.
‡ 62.5 mcg = 0.0625 mg Lean Body Weight
Corrected Ccr (mL/min per 70 kg) *
kg 50 lb 110 60 132 70 154 80 176 90 198 100 220 Number of Days Before Steady State Achieved † 0 62.5 ‡ 125 125 125 187.5 187.5 22 10 125 125 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 19 20 125 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 250 16 30 125 187.5 187.5 187.5 250 250 14 40 125 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 13 50 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 250 12 60 187.5 187.5 250 250 250 375 11 70 187.5 250 250 250 250 375 10 80 187.5 250 250 250 375 375 9 90 187.5 250 250 250 375 500 8 100 250 250 250 375 375 500 7
Based on Table 5, a patient in heart failure with an estimated lean body weight of 70 kg and a Ccr of 60 mL/min should be given a dose of 250 mcg (0.25 mg) daily of digoxin tablets, usually taken after the morning meal. If no loading dose is administered, steady-state serum concentrations in this patient should be anticipated at approximately 11 days. Example:

In general, divided daily dosing is recommended for infants and young children (under age 10). In the newborn period, renal clearance of digoxin is diminished and suitable dosage adjustments must be observed. This is especially pronounced in the premature infant. Beyond the immediate newborn period, children generally require proportionally larger doses than adults on the basis of body weight or body surface area. Children over 10 years of age require adult dosages in proportion to their body weight. Some researchers have suggested that infants and young children tolerate slightly higher serum concentrations than do adults. Infants and Children:

Daily maintenance doses for each age group are given in Table 6 and should provide therapeutic effects with minimum risk of toxicity in most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm. These recommendations assume the presence of normal renal function:
Table 6: Daily Maintenance Doses in Children with Normal Renal Function Age Daily Maintenance Dose (mcg/kg) 2 to 5 Years 10 to 15 5 to 10 Years 7 to 10 Over 10 Years 3 to 5
In children with renal disease, digoxin must be carefully titrated based upon clinical response.

It cannot be overemphasized that both adult and pediatric dosage guidelines provided are based upon average patient response and substantial individual variation can be expected. Accordingly, ultimate dosage selection must be based upon clinical assessment of the patient.

Peak digoxin body stores larger than the 8 to 12 mcg/kg required for most patients with heart failure and normal sinus rhythm have been used for control of ventricular rate in patients with atrial fibrillation. Doses of digoxin used for the treatment of chronic atrial fibrillation should be titrated to the minimum dose that achieves the desired ventricular rate control without causing undesirable side effects. Data are not available to establish the appropriate resting or exercise target rates that should be achieved. Atrial Fibrillation:

The difference in bio-availability between Digoxin Injection or Digoxin Solution in Capsules and Digoxin Elixir Pediatric or Digoxin Tablets must be considered when changing patients from one dosage form to another. Doses of 100 mcg (0.1 mg) and 200 mcg (0.2 mg) of Digoxin Solution in Capsules are approximately equivalent to 125 mcg (0.125 mg) and 250 mcg (0.25 mg) doses of Digoxin Tablets and Elixir Pediatric, respectively (see Table 1 in ). Dosage Adjustment When Changing Preparations: CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics
Demeclocycline Hydrochl...

Demeclocycline Hydrochloride

Therapy should be continued for at least 24 to 48 hours after symptoms and fever have subsided.

Concomitant therapy: Absorption of tetracyclines is impaired by antacids containing aluminum, calcium, or magnesium, and by iron-containing preparations. Foods and some dairy products also interfere with absorption. Oral forms of tetracycline should be given at least 1 hour before or 2 hours after meals.

In patients with renal impairment: (See .) Tetracyclines should be used cautiously in patients with impaired renal function. Total dosage should be decreased by reduction of recommended individual doses and/or by extending time intervals between doses. WARNINGS

In patients with liver impairment: Tetracyclines should be used cautiously in patients with impaired liver function. Total dosage should be decreased by reduction of recommended individual doses and/or by extending time intervals between doses.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid with the oral formulations of tetracyclines is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. (See .) ADVERSE REACTIONS

Adults: Usual daily dose - Four divided doses of 150 mg each or two divided doses of 300 mg each.

For pediatric patients above eight years of age: Usual daily dose, 7 to 13 mg per kg body weight per day, depending upon the severity of the disease, divided into two to four doses not to exceed adult dosage of 600 mg per day.

Gonorrhea patients sensitive to penicillin may be treated with demeclocycline administered as an initial oral dose of 600 mg followed by 300 mg every 12 hours for four days to a total of 3 grams.
Bromocriptine Mesylate

Bromocriptine Mesylate

General

It is recommended that bromocriptine mesylate tablets be taken with food. Patients should be evaluated frequently during dose escalation to determine the lowest dosage that produces a therapeutic response.

Hyperprolactinemic Indications

The initial dosage of bromocriptine mesylate tablets in adults is ½ to one 2.5 mg scored tablet daily. An additional 2.5 mg tablet may be added to the treatment regimen as tolerated every 2-7 days until an optimal therapeutic response is achieved. The therapeutic dosage ranged from 2.5-15 mg daily in adults studied clinically.

Based on limited data in children of age 11 to 15, (see subsection) the initial dose is ½ to one 2.5 mg scored tablet daily. Pediatric Use

Dosing may need to be increased as tolerated until a therapeutic response is achieved. The therapeutic dosage ranged from 2.5-10 mg daily in children with prolactin-secreting pituitary adenomas.

In order to reduce the likelihood of prolonged exposure to bromocriptine mesylate tablets should an unsuspected pregnancy occur, a mechanical contraceptive should be used in conjunction with bromocriptine mesylate tablets therapy until normal ovulatory menstrual cycles have been restored. Contraception may then be discontinued in patients desiring pregnancy.

Thereafter, if menstruation does not occur within 3 days of the expected date, bromocriptine mesylate therapy should be discontinued and a pregnancy test performed.

Acromegaly

Virtually all acromegalic patients receiving therapeutic benefit from bromocriptine mesylate tablets also have reductions in circulating levels of growth hormone. Therefore, periodic assessment of circulating levels of growth hormone will, in most cases, serve as a guide in determining the therapeutic potential of bromocriptine mesylate tablets. If, after a brief trial with bromocriptine mesylate tablets therapy, no significant reduction in growth hormone levels has taken place, careful assessment of the clinical features of the disease should be made, and if no change has occurred, dosage adjustment or discontinuation of therapy should be considered.

The initial recommended dosage is ½ to one 2.5 mg bromocriptine mesylate tablet on retiring (with food) for 3 days. An additional ½ to 1 tablet should be added to the treatment regimen as tolerated every 3-7 days until the patient obtains optimal therapeutic benefit. Patients should be reevaluated monthly and the dosage adjusted based on reductions of growth hormone or clinical response. The usual optimal therapeutic dosage range of bromocriptine mesylate tablets varies from 20-30 mg/day in most patients. The maximal dosage should not exceed 100 mg/day.

Patients treated with pituitary irradiation should be withdrawn from bromocriptine mesylate tablets therapy on a yearly basis to assess both the clinical effects of radiation on the disease process as well as the effects of bromocriptine mesylate tablets therapy. Usually a 4-8 week withdrawal period is adequate for this purpose. Recurrence of the signs/symptoms or increases in growth hormone indicate the disease process is still active and further courses of bromocriptine mesylate tablets should be considered.

Parkinson's Disease

The basic principle of bromocriptine mesylate tablets therapy is to initiate treatment at a low dosage and, on an individual basis, increase the daily dosage slowly until a maximum therapeutic response is achieved. The dosage of levodopa during this introductory period should be maintained, if possible. The initial dose of bromocriptine mesylate tablets is ½ of a 2.5 mg tablet twice daily with meals. Assessments are advised at 2-week intervals during dosage titration to ensure that the lowest dosage producing an optimal therapeutic response is not exceeded. If necessary, the dosage may be increased every 14-28 days by 2.5 mg/day with meals. Should it be advisable to reduce the dosage of levodopa because of adverse reactions, the daily dosage of bromocriptine mesylate tablets, if increased, should be accomplished gradually in small (2.5 mg) increments.

The safety of bromocriptine mesylate tablets has not been demonstrated in dosages exceeding 100 mg/day.
Guanfacine

Guanfacine

The recommended initial dose of guanfacine (as the hydrochloride) when given alone or in combination with another antihypertensive drug is 1 mg daily given at bedtime to minimize somnolence. If after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, 1 mg does not give a satisfactory result, a dose of 2 mg may be given, although most of the effect of guanfacine is seen at 1 mg (see ). Higher daily doses have been used, but adverse reactions increase significantly with doses above 3 mg/day. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The frequency of rebound hypertension is low, but it can occur. When rebound occurs, it does so after 2-4 days, which is delayed compared with clonidine hydrochloride. This is consistent with the longer half-life of guanfacine. In most cases, after abrupt withdrawal of guanfacine, blood pressure returns to pretreatment levels slowly (within 2-4 days) without ill effects.
Nabumetone

Nabumetone

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of nabumetone tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use nabumetone tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with nabumetone tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Osteoarthritis and Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose is 1,000 mg taken as a single dose with or without food. Some patients may obtain more symptomatic relief from 1,500 mg to 2,000 mg per day. Nabumetone tablets can be given in either a single or twice-daily dose. Dosages greater than 2,000 mg per day have not been studied. The lowest effective dose should be used for chronic treatment (see ). Patients weighing under 50 kg may be less likely to require dosages beyond 1,000 mg; therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy, the dose should be adjusted to meet individual patients' requirements. WARNINGS, Renal Effects
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride Syrup

Cetirizine Hydrochloride Syrup, 1 mg/mL can be taken without regard to food consumption.

The recommended initial dose of Cetirizine Hydrochloride Syrup, 1 mg/mL in children aged 2 to 5 years is 2.5 mg (1/2 teaspoonful) syrup once daily. The dosage in this age group can be increased to a maximum dose of 5 mg per day given as 1 teaspoonful syrup once a day, or one 1/2 teaspoonful syrup given every 12 hours. Children 2 to 5 Years for Chronic Urticaria:

The recommended dose of Cetirizine Hydrochloride Syrup, 1 mg/mL in children 6 months to 23 months of age is 2.5 mg (1/2 teaspoonful) once daily. The dose in children 12 to 23 months of age can be increased to a maximum dose of 5 mg per day, given as 1/2 teaspoonful (2.5 mg) every 12 hours. Children 6 Months to <2 Years for Perennial Allergic Rhinitis and Chronic Urticaria:
Mephyton

Mephyton

MEPHYTON Summary of Dosage Guidelines (See circular text for details) Adults Initial Dosage (caused by coumarin or indanedione derivatives) Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency 2.5 mg-10 mg or up to 25 mg (rarely 50 mg) (Antibiotics; Salicylates or other drugs; Factors limiting absorption or synthesis) Hypoprothrombinemia due to other causes 2.5 mg-25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg)
Anticoagulant-Induced Prothrombin Deficiency in Adults

To correct excessively prolonged prothrombin times caused by oral anticoagulant therapy – 2.5 to 10 mg or up to 25 mg initially is recommended. In rare instances 50 mg may be required, Frequency and amount of subsequent doses should be determined by prothrombin time response or clinical condition. (See .) If, in 12 to 48 hours after oral administration, the prothrombin time has not been shortened satisfactorily, the dose should be repeated. WARNINGS

Hypoprothrombinemia Due to Other Causes in Adults

If possible, discontinuation or reduction of the dosage of drugs interfering with coagulation mechanisms (such as salicylates, antibiotics) is suggested as an alternative to administering concurrent MEPHYTON. The severity of the coagulation disorder should determine whether the immediate administration of MEPHYTON is required in addition to discontinuation or reduction of interfering drugs.

A dosage of 2.5 to 25 mg or more (rarely up to 50 mg) is recommended, the amount and route of administration depending upon the severity of the condition and response obtained.

The oral route should be avoided when the clinical disorder would prevent proper absorption. Bile salts must be given with the tablets when the endogenous supply of bile to the gastrointestinal tract is deficient.
Famotidine

Famotidine

Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for active duodenal ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime. Most patients heal within 4 weeks; there is rarely reason to use famotidine at full dosage for longer than 6 to 8 weeks. A regimen of 20 mg b.i.d. is also effective. Acute Therapy:

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg once a day at bedtime. Maintenance Therapy:

Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for active benign gastric ulcer is 40 mg once a day at bedtime. Acute Therapy:

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended oral dosage for treatment of adult patients with symptoms of GERD is 20 mg b.i.d. for up to 6 weeks. The recommended oral dosage for the treatment of adult patients with esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 or 40 mg b.i.d. for up to 12 weeks (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY IN ADULTS, Clinical Studies

Dosage for Pediatric Patients <1 year of age Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

See . PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients <1 year of age

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS, suggest the following starting doses in pediatric patients <1 year of age: -0.5 mg/kg/dose of famotidine oral suspension for the treatment of GERD for up to 8 weeks once daily in patients <3 months of age and 0.5 mg/kg/dose twice daily in patients 3 months to <1 year of age. Patients should also be receiving conservative measures (e.g., thickened feedings). The use of intravenous famotidine in pediatric patients <1 year of age with GERD has not been adequately studied. Pediatric Patients <1 year of ageGastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

Dosage for Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age

See . PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age

The studies described in PRECAUTIONS, suggest the following starting doses in pediatric patients 1-16 years of age: Pediatric Patients 1-16 years of age

- 0.5 mg/kg/day p.o. at bedtime or divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg/day. Peptic ulcer

- 1.0 mg/kg/day p.o. divided b.i.d. up to 40 mg b.i.d. Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease with or without esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations

While published uncontrolled studies suggest effectiveness of famotidine in the treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease and peptic ulcer, data in pediatric patients are insufficient to establish percent response with dose and duration of therapy. Therefore, treatment duration (initially based on adult duration recommendations) and dose should be individualized based on clinical response and/or pH determination (gastric or esophageal) and endoscopy. Published uncontrolled clinical studies in pediatric patients 1-16 years of age have employed doses up to 1 mg/kg/day for peptic ulcer and 2 mg/kg/day for GERD with or without esophagitis including erosions and ulcerations.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (e.g., Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome, Multiple Endocrine Adenomas)

The dosage of famotidine in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose for pathological hypersecretory conditions is 20 mg q 6 h. In some patients, a higher starting dose may be required. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 160 mg q 6 h have been administered to some adult patients with severe Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome.

Concomitant Use of Antacids

Antacids may be given concomitantly if needed.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Moderate or Severe Renal Insufficiency

In adult patients with moderate (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min) or severe (creatinine clearance <10 mL/min) renal insufficiency, the elimination half-life of famotidine is increased. For patients with severe renal insufficiency, it may exceed 20 hours, reaching approximately 24 hours in anuric patients. Since CNS adverse effects have been reported in patients with moderate and severe renal insufficiency, to avoid excess accumulation of the drug in patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency, the dose of famotidine may be reduced to half the dose or the dosing interval may be prolonged to 36-48 hours as indicated by the patient's clinical response.

Based on the comparison of pharmacokinetic parameters for famotidine in adults and pediatric patients, dosage adjustment in pediatric patients with moderate or severe renal insufficiency should be considered.
Lithium Carbonate

Lithium Carbonate

Doses of extended-release tablets are usually given b.i.d. (approximately 12-hour intervals). When initiating therapy with immediate-release or extended-release lithium, dosage must be individualized according to serum levels and clinical response.

When switching a patient from immediate-release capsules to the Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets, give the same total daily dose when possible. Most patients on maintenance therapy are stabilized on 900 mg daily, e.g., Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets, 450 mg b.i.d. When the previous dosage of immediate-release lithium is not a multiple of 450 mg, e.g., 1500 mg, initiate lithium extended-release tablet at the multiple of 450 mg nearest to, but , the original daily dose, i.e., 1350 mg. When the two doses are unequal, give the larger dose in the evening. In the above example, with a total daily dose of 1350 mg, generally 450 mg of Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets should be given in the morning and 900 mg of Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets in the evening. If desired, the total daily dose of 1350 mg can be given in three equal 450 mg doses of Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets. These patients should be monitored at 1- to 2-week intervals, and dosage adjusted if necessary, until stable and satisfactory serum levels and clinical state are achieved. below

When patients require closer titration than that available with doses of lithium carbonate extended-release tablets in increments of 450 mg, immediate-release capsules should be used.

Acute Mania

Optimal patient response to lithium can usually be established and maintained with 1800 mg per day in divided doses. Such doses will normally produce the desired serum lithium level ranging between 1 and 1.5 mEq/L.

Dosage must be individualized according to serum levels and clinical response. Regular monitoring of the patient's clinical state and serum lithium levels is necessary. Serum levels should be determined twice per week during the acute phase, and until the serum level and clinical condition of the patient have been stabilized.

Long-Term Control

The desirable serum lithium levels are 0.6 to 1.2 mEq/L. Dosage will vary from one individual to another, but usually 900 mg to 1200 mg per day in divided doses will maintain this level. Serum lithium levels in uncomplicated cases receiving maintenance therapy during remission should be monitored at least every two months.

Patients unusually sensitive to lithium may exhibit toxic signs at serum levels below 1 mEq/L.

N.B.

Blood samples for serum lithium determinations should be drawn immediately prior to the next dose when lithium concentrations are relatively stable (i.e., 8 to 12 hours after the previous dose). Total reliance must not be placed on serum levels alone. Accurate patient evaluation requires both clinical and laboratory analysis.

Elderly patients often respond to reduced dosage, and may exhibit signs of toxicity at serum levels ordinarily tolerated by younger patients.
Cimetidine

Cimetidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Active Duodenal Ulcer

Clinical studies have indicated that suppression of nocturnal acid is the most important factor in duodenal ulcer healing (see ). This is supported by recent clinical trials (see ). Therefore, there is no apparent rationale, except for familiarity with use, for treating with anything other than a once daily at bedtime dosage regimen. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Antisecretory Activity: Acid SecretionCLINICAL TRIALS: Duodenal Ulcer: Active Duodenal Ulcer

In a U.S. dose-ranging study of 400 mg at bedtime, 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime, a continuous dose-response relationship for ulcer healing was demonstrated.

However, 800 mg at bedtime is the dose of choice for most patients, as it provides a high healing rate (the difference between 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime being small), maximal pain relief, a decreased potential for drug interactions (see ) and maximal patient convenience. Patients unhealed at 4 weeks, or those with persistent symptoms, have been shown to benefit from 2 to 4 weeks of continued therapy. PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions

It has been shown that patients who both have an endoscopically demonstrated ulcer larger than 1 cm and are also heavy smokers (i.e., smoke one pack of cigarettes or more per day) are more difficult to heal. There is some evidence which suggests that more rapid healing can be achieved in this subpopulation with 1600 mg of cimetidine tablets at bedtime. While early pain relief with either 800 mg at bedtime or 1600 mg at bedtime is equivalent in all patients, 1600 mg at bedtime provides an appropriate alternative when it is important to ensure healing within 4 weeks for this subpopulation. Alternatively, approximately 94% of all patients will also heal in 8 weeks with 800 mg of cimetidine tablets at bedtime

Other regimens of cimetidine tablets in the United States which have been shown to be effective are: 300 mg 4 times daily, with meals and at bedtime, the original regimen with which U.S. physicians have the most experience, and 400 mg twice daily, in the morning and at bedtime (see ). CLINICAL TRIALS: Duodenal Ulcer: Active Duodenal Ulcer

Concomitant antacids should be given as needed for relief of pain. However, simultaneous administration of cimetidine tablets and antacids is not recommended, since antacids have been reported to interfere with the absorption of cimetidine.

While healing with cimetidine tablets often occurs during the first week or two, treatment should be continued for 4 to 6 weeks unless healing has been demonstrated by endoscopic examination.

Maintenance Therapy for Duodenal Ulcer

In those patients requiring maintenance therapy, the recommended adult oral dose is 400 mg at bedtime.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for short-term treatment of active benign gastric ulcer is 800 mg at bedtime, or 300 mg 4 times a day with meals and at bedtime. Controlled clinical studies were limited to 6 weeks of treatment (see ). A dose of 800 mg at bedtime is the preferred regimen for most patients based upon convenience and reduced potential for drug interactions. Symptomatic response to cimetidine tablets does not preclude the presence of a gastric malignancy. It is important to follow gastric ulcer patients to assure rapid progress to complete healing. CLINICAL TRIALS

Erosive Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dosage for the treatment of erosive esophagitis that has been diagnosed by endoscopy is 1600 mg daily in divided doses (800 mg twice daily or 400 mg 4 times daily) for 12 weeks. The use of cimetidine tablets beyond 12 weeks has not been established.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome)

Recommended adult oral dosage: 300 mg 4 times a day with meals and at bedtime. In some patients it may be necessary to administer higher doses more frequently. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs, but should not usually exceed 2400 mg per day and should continue as long as clinically indicated.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Patients with severely impaired renal function have been treated with cimetidine tablets. However, such usage has been very limited. On the basis of this experience the recommended dosage is 300 mg every 12 hours orally. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 8 hours or even further with caution. In severe renal failure, accumulation may occur and the lowest frequency of dosing compatible with an adequate patient response should be used. When liver impairment is also present, further reductions in dosage may be necessary. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating cimetidine. Ideally, the dosage schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.
Butalbital

Butalbital

One or 2 tablets every 4 hours as needed. Total daily dosage should not exceed 6 tablets.

Extended and repeated use of this product is not recommended because of the potential for physical dependence.
Orphenadrine Citrate

Orphenadrine Citrate

Adults-Two tablets per day; one in the morning and one in the evening.
Amiloride Hydrochloride...

Amiloride Hydrochloride

Amiloride HCl should be administered with food.

Amiloride HCl, one 5 mg tablet daily, should be added to the usual antihypertensive or diuretic dosage of a kaliuretic diuretic. The dosage may be increased to 10 mg per day, if necessary. More than two 5 mg tablets of amiloride HCl daily usually are not needed, and there is little controlled experience with such doses. If persistent hypokalemia is documented with 10 mg, the dose can be increased to 15 mg, then 20 mg, with careful monitoring of electrolytes.

In treating patients with congestive heart failure after an initial diuresis has been achieved, potassium loss may also decrease and the need for amiloride HCl should be re-evaluated. Dosage adjustment may be necessary. Maintenance therapy may be on an intermittent basis.

If it is necessary to use amiloride HCl alone (see INDICATIONS), the starting dosage should be one 5 mg tablet daily. This dosage may be increased to 10 mg per day, if necessary. More than two 5 mg tablets usually are not needed, and there is little controlled experience with such doses. If persistent hypokalemia is documented with 10 mg, the dose can be increased to 15 mg, then 20 mg, with careful monitoring of electrolytes.
Trandolapril

Trandolapril

Hypertension

The recommended initial dosage of trandolapril tablets for patients not receiving a diuretic is 1 mg once daily in non-black patients and 2 mg in black patients. Dosage should be adjusted according to the blood pressure response. Generally, dosage adjustments should be made at intervals of at least 1 week. Most patients have required dosages of 2 to 4 mg once daily. There is little clinical experience with doses above 8 mg.

Patients inadequately treated with once-daily dosing at 4 mg may be treated with twice-daily dosing. If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with trandolapril tablets monotherapy, a diuretic may be added.

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of trandolapril tablets. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued two to three days prior to beginning therapy with trandolapril tablets (see ). Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with trandolapril tablets alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 0.5 mg trandolapril tablets should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours until blood pressure has stabilized. The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response (see , PRECAUTIONS, and ). WARNINGSWARNINGSDRUG INTERACTIONS

Concomitant administration of trandolapril tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium (see ). PRECAUTIONS

Heart Failure Post Myocardial Infarction or Left-Ventricular Dysfunction Post Myocardial Infarction

The recommended starting dose is 1 mg, once daily. Following the initial dose, all patients should be titrated (as tolerated) toward a target dose of 4 mg, once daily. If a 4 mg dose is not tolerated, patients can continue therapy with the greatest tolerated dose.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment or Hepatic Cirrhosis

For patients with a creatinine clearance <30 mL/min. or with hepatic cirrhosis, the recommended starting dose, based on clinical and pharmacokinetic data, is 0.5 mg daily. Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimal response.
Diclofenac Potassium

Diclofenac Potassium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac potassium tablets USP and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac potassium tablets USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac potassium tablets USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

For treatment of pain or primary dysmenorrhea the recommended dosage is 50 mg t.i.d. With experience, physicians may find that in some patients an initial dose of 100 mg of diclofenac potassium tablets USP, followed by 50 mg doses, will provide better relief.

For the relief of osteoarthritis the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.

Different formulations of diclofenac [diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium tablets USP] are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Lithium Carbonate

Lithium Carbonate

Acute Mania

Optimal patient response can usually be established with 1800 mg/day in the following dosages:
ACUTE MANIA Morning Afternoon Nighttime Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets
3 tabs

(900 mg)

3 tabs

(900 mg)

Such doses will normally produce an effective serum lithium concentration ranging between 1 and 1.5 mEq/L. Dosage must be individualized according to serum concentrations and clinical response. Regular monitoring of the patient’s clinical state and of serum lithium concentrations is necessary. Serum concentrations should be determined twice per week during the acute phase, and until the serum concentrations and clinical condition of the patient have been stabilized.

Long-Term Control

Desirable serum lithium concentrations are 0.6 to 1.2 mEq/L which can usually be achieved with 900 to 1200 mg/day. Dosage will vary from one individual to another, but generally the following dosages will maintain this concentration:
* Can be administered on TID recommended dosing interval up to 1200 mg/day LONG-TERM CONTROL Morning Afternoon Nighttime Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets *
2 tabs

(600 mg)

2 tabs

(600 mg)

Serum lithium concentrations in uncomplicated cases receiving maintenance therapy during remission should be monitored at least every two months. Patients abnormally sensitive to lithium may exhibit toxic signs at serum concentrations of 1 to 1.5 mEq/L. Geriatric patients often respond to reduced dosage, and may exhibit signs of toxicity at serum concentrations ordinarily tolerated by other patients. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting the greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Important Considerations
Blood samples for serum lithium determinations should be drawn immediately prior to the next dose when lithium concentrations are relatively stable (i.e., 8 to 12 hours after previous dose). Total reliance must not be placed on serum concentrations alone. Accurate patient evaluation requires both clinical and laboratory analysis. Lithium Carbonate Extended Release Tablets USP must be swallowed whole and never chewed or crushed.
Moexipril Hydrochloride...

Moexipril Hydrochloride

Hypertension

The recommended initial dose of moexipril hydrochloride tablets in patients not receiving diuretics is 7.5 mg, one hour prior to meals, once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The antihypertensive effect of moexipril hydrochloride tablets may diminish towards the end of the dosing interval. Blood pressure should, therefore, be measured just prior to dosing to determine whether satisfactory blood pressure control is obtained. If control is not adequate, increased dose or divided dosing can be tried. The recommended dose range is 7.5 to 30 mg daily, administered in one or two divided doses one hour before meals. Total daily doses above 60 mg a day have not been studied in hypertensive patients.

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension may occasionally occur following the initial dose of moexipril hydrochloride tablets. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for 2 to 3 days before therapy with moexipril hydrochloride tablets is begun, to reduce the likelihood of hypotension (see ). If the patient’s blood pressure is not controlled with moexipril hydrochloride tablets alone, diuretic therapy may then be reinstituted. If diuretic therapy cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 3.75 mg of moexipril hydrochloride tablets should be used with medical supervision until blood pressure has stabilized (see and , ). WARNINGSWARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

For patients with a creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min/1.73 m , an initial dose of 3.75 mg once daily should be given cautiously. Doses may be titrated upward to a maximum daily dose of 15 mg. 2
Desmopressin Acetate

Desmopressin Acetate

Central Diabetes Insipidus

The dosage of desmopressin acetate tablets must be determined for each individual patient and adjusted according to the diurnal pattern of response. Response should be estimated by two parameters: adequate duration of sleep and adequate, not excessive, water turnover. Patients previously on intranasal desmopressin acetate therapy should begin tablet therapy twelve hours after the last intranasal dose. During the initial dose titration period, patients should be observed closely and appropriate safety parameters measured to assure adequate response. Patients should be monitored at regular intervals during the course of desmopressin acetate tablet therapy to assure adequate antidiuretic response. Modifications in dosage regimen should be implemented as necessary to assure adequate water turnover. Fluid restriction should be observed (see ; , and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSPediatric UseGeriatric Use

Adults and Children

It is recommended that patients be started on doses of 0.05 mg (½ of the 0.1 mg tablet) two times a day and individually adjusted to their optimum therapeutic dose. Most patients in clinical trials found that the optimal dosage range is 0.1 mg to 0.8 mg daily, administered in divided doses. Each dose should be separately adjusted for an adequate diurnal rhythm of water turnover. Total daily dosage should be increased or decreased in the range of 0.1 mg to 1.2 mg divided into two or three daily doses as needed to obtain adequate antidiuresis. See subsection for special considerations when administering desmopressin acetate to pediatric diabetes insipidus patients. Pediatric Use

Geriatric Use

This drug is known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see , ; ; and , ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYHumanPharmacokineticsCONTRAINDICATIONSPRECAUTIONSGeriatric Use

Primary Nocturnal Enuresis

The dosage of desmopressin acetate tablets must be determined for each individual patient and adjusted according to response. Patients previously on intranasal desmopressin acetate therapy can begin tablet therapy the night following (24 hours after) the last intranasal dose. The recommended initial dose for patients age 6 years and older is 0.2 mg at bedtime. The dose may be titrated up to 0.6 mg to achieve the desired response. Fluid restriction should be observed, and fluid intake should be limited to a minimum from 1 hour before desmopressin administration, until the next morning, or at least 8 hours after administration (see and , and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSPediatric UseGeriatric Use
Verapamil Hydrochloride...

Verapamil Hydrochloride

The dose of verapamil must be individualized by titration. The usefulness and safety of dosages exceeding 480 mg/day have not been established; therefore, this daily dosage should not be exceeded. Since the half-life of verapamil increases during chronic dosing, maximum response may be delayed.

Angina:

Clinical trials show that the usual dose is 80 mg to 120 mg three times a day. However, 40 mg three times a day may be warranted in patients who may have an increased response to verapamil (e.g., decreased hepatic function, elderly, etc.). Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety evaluated approximately eight hours after dosing. Dosage may be increased at daily (e.g., patients with unstable angina) or weekly intervals until optimum clinical response is obtained.

Arrhythmias:

The dosage in digitalized patients with chronic atrial fibrillation (see ) ranges from 240 to 320 mg/day in divided (three times a day or four times a day) doses. The dosage for prophylaxis of PSVT (non-digitalized patients) ranges from 240 to 480 mg/day in divided (three times a day or four times a day) doses. In general, maximum effects for any given dosage will be apparent during the first 48 hours of therapy. PRECAUTIONS

Essential hypertension:

Dose should be individualized by titration. The usual initial monotherapy dose in clinical trials was 80 mg three times a day (240 mg/day). Daily dosages of 360 and 480 mg have been used but there is no evidence that dosages beyond 360 mg provided added effect. Consideration should be given to beginning titration at 40 mg three times per day in patients who might respond to lower doses, such as the elderly or people of small stature. The antihypertensive effects of verapamil are evident within the first week of therapy. Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy, assessed at the end of the dosing interval.
Ticlopidine Hydrochlori...

Ticlopidine Hydrochloride

Stroke

The recommended dose of ticlopidine hydrochloride is 250 mg bid taken with food. Other doses have not been studied in controlled trials for these indications.

Coronary Artery Stenting

The recommended dose of ticlopidine hydrochloride is 250 mg bid taken with food together with antiplatelet doses of aspirin for up to 30 days of therapy following successful stent implantation.
Donnatal

Donnatal

The dosage of Donnatal® should be adjusted to the needs of the dividual patient to assure symptomatic control with a

minimum of adverse effects.

Donnatal® Tablets. Adults: One or two Donnatal® tablets three or four times a day according to condition and severity

of symptoms.
Dimenhydrinate

Dimenhydrinate

to prevent motion sickness, the first dose should be taken 1/2 to 1 hour before starting activity to prevent or treat motion sickness, use the following dosing
adults and children 12 years and over

1-2 tablets every 4-6 hours; not more than 8 tablets in 24 hours, or as directed by a doctor

children 6 years to under 12 years

1/2-1 tablet every 6-8 hours; not more than 3 tablets in 24 hours, or as directed by a doctor

children 2 years to under 6 years

1/4-1/2 tablet every 6-8 hours; not more than 1 1/2 tablets in 24 hours, or as directed by a doctor
Flucytosine

Flucytosine

Flucytosine Capsules should be used in combination with amphotericin B for the treatment of systemic candidiasis and cryptococcosis because of the emergence of resistance to Flucytosine Capsules (see ).

The usual dosage of Flucytosine Capsules is 50 to 150 mg/kg/day administered in divided doses at 6-hour intervals. Nausea or vomiting may be reduced or avoided if the capsules are given a few at a time over a 15-minute period. If the BUN or the serum creatinine is elevated, or if there are other signs of renal impairment, the initial dose should be at the lower level (see ). WARNINGS
MICROBIOLOGY
Simvastatin

Simvastatin

2.1 Recommended Dosing

The usual dosage range is 5 to 40 mg/day. In patients with CHD or at high risk of CHD, simvastatin tablets USP can be started simultaneously with diet. The recommended usual starting dose is 10 or 20 mg once a day in the evening. For patients at high risk for a CHD event due to existing CHD, diabetes, peripheral vessel disease, history of stroke or other cerebrovascular disease, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg/day. Lipid determinations should be performed after 4 weeks of therapy and periodically thereafter.

2.2 Restricted Dosing for 80 mg

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, particularly during the first year of treatment, use of the 80 mg dose of simvastatin tablets USP should be restricted to patients who have been taking simvastatin, USP 80 mg chronically (e.g., for 12 months or more) without evidence of muscle toxicity [ ]. see Warnings and Precautions ( ) 5.1

Patients who are currently tolerating the 80 mg dose of simvastatin tablets USP who need to be initiated on an interacting drug that is contraindicated or is associated with a dose cap for simvastatin, USP should be switched to an alternative statin with less potential for the drug-drug interaction.

Due to the increased risk of myopathy, including rhabdomyolysis, associated with the 80 mg dose of simvastatin tablets USP, patients unable to achieve their LDL-C goal utilizing the 40 mg dose of simvastatin tablets USP should not be titrated to the 80 mg dose, but should be placed on alternative LDL-C-lowering treatment(s) that provides greater LDL-C lowering.

2.3 Coadministration With Other Drugs

Patients taking Verapamil, Diltiazem, or Dronedarone
The dose of simvastatin tablets USP should not exceed 10 mg/day [ ]. see Warnings and Precautions ( ), Drug Interactions ( ), and Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 5.17.312.3
Patients taking Amiodarone, Amlodipine or Ranolazine
The dose of simvastatin tablets USP should not exceed 20 mg/day [ ]. see Warnings and Precautions ( ), Drug Interactions ( ), and Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 5.17.312.3
2.4 Patients With Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended dosage is 40 mg/day in the evening [ ]. Simvastatin tablets USP should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable. see Dosage and Administration, Restricted Dosing for 80 mg ( ) 2.2

Simvastatin exposure is approximately doubled with concomitant use of lomitapide; therefore, the dose of simvastatin tablets USP should be reduced by 50% if initiating lomitapide. Simvastatin tablets USP dosage should not exceed 20 mg/day (or 40 mg/day for patients who have previously taken simvastatin tablets USP, 80 mg/day chronically, e.g., for 12 months or more, without evidence of muscle toxicity) while taking lomitapide.

2.5 Adolescents (10 to 17 Years of Age) With Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended usual starting dose is 10 mg once a day in the evening. The recommended dosing range is 10 to 40 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 40 mg/day. Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [ ]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more. see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines1and Clinical Studies ( ) 14.2

National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. . 89(3):495-501. 1992. 1Pediatrics

2.6 Patients With Renal Impairment

Because simvastatin tablets USP do not undergo significant renal excretion, modification of dosage should not be necessary in patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. However, caution should be exercised when simvastatin tablets USP are administered to patients with severe renal impairment; such patients should be started at 5 mg/day and be closely monitored [ ]. see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 5.112.3

2.7 Chinese Patients Taking Lipid-Modifying Doses (Greater Than or Equal to 1 g/day Niacin) of Niacin-Containing Products

Because of an increased risk for myopathy in Chinese patients taking simvastatin 40 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses (greater than or equal to 1 g/day niacin) of niacin-containing products, caution should be used when treating Chinese patients with simvastatin doses exceeding 20 mg/day coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. Because the risk for myopathy is dose-related, Chinese patients should not receive simvastatin 80 mg coadministered with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products. The cause of the increased risk of myopathy is not known. It is also unknown if the risk for myopathy with coadministration of simvastatin with lipid-modifying doses of niacin-containing products observed in Chinese patients applies to other Asian patients [ ]. see Warnings and Precautions ( ) 5.1
Dilantin

Dilantin

Serum concentrations should be monitored in changing from Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) to Prompt Phenytoin Sodium Capsules, USP, and from the sodium salt to the free acid form.

Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) are formulated with the sodium salt of phenytoin. The free acid form of phenytoin is used in Dilantin-125 Suspension and Dilantin Infatabs. Because there is approximately an 8% increase in drug content with the free acid form over that of the sodium salt, dosage adjustments and serum level monitoring may be necessary when switching from a product formulated with the free acid to a product formulated with the sodium salt and vice versa.

General

Dosage should be individualized to provide maximum benefit. In some cases, serum blood level determinations may be necessary for optimal dosage adjustments—the clinically effective serum level is usually 10–20 mcg/mL. With recommended dosage, a period of seven to ten days may be required to achieve steady-state blood levels with phenytoin and changes in dosage (increase or decrease) should not be carried out at intervals shorter than seven to ten days.

Adult Dosage

Divided daily dosage

Patients who have received no previous treatment may be started on one 100-mg Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsule, USP) three times daily and the dosage then adjusted to suit individual requirements. For most adults, the satisfactory maintenance dosage will be one capsule three to four times a day. An increase up to two capsules three times a day may be made, if necessary.

Once-a-day dosage

In adults, if seizure control is established with divided doses of three 100-mg Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) daily, once-a-day dosage with 300 mg of Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) may be considered. Studies comparing divided doses of 300 mg with a single daily dose of this quantity indicated absorption, peak plasma levels, biologic half-life, difference between peak and minimum values, and urinary recovery were equivalent. Once-a-day dosage offers a convenience to the individual patient or to nursing personnel for institutionalized patients and is intended to be used only for patients requiring this amount of drug daily. A major problem in motivating noncompliant patients may also be lessened when the patient can take this drug once a day. However, patients should be cautioned not to miss a dose, inadvertently.

Only Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) are recommended for once-a-day dosing. Inherent differences in dissolution characteristics and resultant absorption rates of phenytoin due to different manufacturing procedures and/or dosage forms preclude such recommendation for other phenytoin products. When a change in the dosage form or brand is prescribed, careful monitoring of phenytoin serum levels should be carried out.

Loading dose

Some authorities have advocated use of an oral loading dose of phenytoin in adults who require rapid steady-state serum levels and where intravenous administration is not desirable. This dosing regimen should be reserved for patients in a clinic or hospital setting where phenytoin serum levels can be closely monitored. Patients with a history of renal or liver disease should not receive the oral loading regimen.

Initially, one gram of Dilantin (extended phenytoin sodium capsules, USP) is divided into three doses (400 mg, 300 mg, 300 mg) and administered at two-hour intervals. Normal maintenance dosage is then instituted 24 hours after the loading dose, with frequent serum level determinations.

Dosing in Special Populations

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Disease

Due to an increased fraction of unbound phenytoin in patients with renal or hepatic disease, or in those with hypoalbuminemia, the interpretation of total phenytoin plasma concentrations should be made with caution. Unbound phenytoin concentrations may be more useful in these patient populations.

Elderly Patients

Phenytoin clearance is decreased slightly in elderly patients and lower or less frequent dosing may be required.

Pediatric

Initially, 5 mg/kg/day in two or three equally divided doses, with subsequent dosage individualized to a maximum of 300 mg daily. A recommended daily maintenance dosage is usually 4 to 8 mg/kg. Children over 6 years old and adolescents may require the minimum adult dose (300 mg/day).
Indapamide

Indapamide

Hypertension

The adult starting indapamide dose for hypertension is 1.25 mg as a single daily dose taken in the morning. If the response to 1.25 mg is not satisfactory after 4 weeks, the daily dose may be increased to 2.5 mg taken once daily. If the response to 2.5 mg is not satisfactory after 4 weeks, the daily dose may be increased to 5 mg taken once daily, but adding another antihypertensive should be considered.

Edema of Congestive Heart Failure

The adult starting indapamide dose for edema of congestive heart failure is 2.5 mg as a single daily dose taken in the morning. If the response to 2.5 mg is not satisfactory after one week, the daily dose may be increased to 5 mg taken once daily.

If the antihypertensive response to indapamide is insufficient, indapamide may be combined with other antihypertensive drugs, with careful monitoring of blood pressure. It is recommended that the usual dose of other agents be reduced by 50% during initial combination therapy. As the blood pressure response becomes evident, further dosage adjustments may be necessary.

In general, doses of 5 mg and larger have not appeared to provide additional effects on blood pressure or heart failure, but are associated with a greater degree of hypokalemia. There is minimal clinical trial experience in patients with doses greater than 5 mg once a day.
Oxaprozin

Oxaprozin

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of oxaprozin tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use oxaprozin tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with oxaprozin tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient s needs. '

Rheumatoid Arthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, the usual recommended dose of oxaprozin tablets is 1200 mg (two 600 mg tablets) given orally once a day (see ). Individualization of Dosage

Osteoarthritis

For relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis, the usual recommended dose of oxaprozin tablets is 1200 mg (two 600 mg tablets) given orally once a day (see ). Individualization of Dosage

Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of JRA in patients 6 to 16 years of age, the recommended dose given orally once per day should be based on body weight of the patient as given in Table 3 (see also ). Individualization of Dosage
Table 3
Body Weight Range (kg)

Dose (mg)

22-31

600

32-54

900

≥55

1200

(see ) CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations, Pediatric Patients

Individualization of Dosage

As with other NSAIDs, the lowest dose should be sought for each patient. Therefore, after observing the response to initial therapy with oxaprozin tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs. In osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis and juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, the dosage should be individualized to the lowest effective dose of oxaprozin tablets to minimize adverse effects. The recommended total daily dose of oxaprozin tablets in adults is 1800 mg (26 mg/kg, whichever is ) in divided doses. In children, doses greater than 1200 mg have not been studied. maximumlower

Patients of low body weight should initiate therapy with 600 mg once daily. Patients with severe renal impairment or on dialysis should also initiate therapy with 600 mg once daily. If there is insufficient relief of symptoms in such patients, the dose may be cautiously increased to 1200 mg, but only with close monitoring (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Special Populations

In adults, in cases where a quick onset of action is important, the pharmacokinetics of oxaprozin allows therapy to be started with a one-time loading dose of 1200 mg to 1800 mg (not to exceed 26 mg/kg). Doses larger than 1200 mg/day on a chronic basis should be reserved for patients who weigh more than 50 kg, have normal renal and hepatic function, are at low risk of peptic ulcer, and whose severity of disease justifies maximal therapy. Physicians should ensure that patients are tolerating doses in the 600 mg/day to 1200 mg/day range without gastroenterologic, renal, hepatic, or dermatologic adverse effects before advancing to the larger doses. Most patients will tolerate once-a-day dosing with oxaprozin, although divided doses may be tried in patients unable to tolerate single doses.

Safety and Handling

Oxaprozin is supplied as a solid dosage form in closed containers, is not known to produce contact dermatitis, and poses no known risk to healthcare workers. It may be disposed of in accordance with applicable local regulations governing the disposal of pharmaceuticals.
Norpace

Norpace

The dosage of Norpace or Norpace CR must be individualized for each patient on the basis of response and tolerance. The usual adult dosage of Norpace or Norpace CR is 400 to 800 mg per day given in divided doses. The recommended dosage for most adults is 600 mg/day given in divided doses (either 150 mg every 6 hours for immediate-release Norpace or 300 mg every 12 hours for Norpace CR). For patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds (50 kg), the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (either 100 mg every 6 hours for immediate-release Norpace or 200 mg every 12 hours for Norpace CR). In the event of increased anticholinergic side effects, plasma levels of disopyramide should be monitored and the dose of the drug adjusted accordingly. A reduction of the dose by one third, from the recommended 600 mg/day to 400 mg/day, would be reasonable, without changing the dosing interval.

Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made gradually, with close monitoring for the possible development of hypotension and/or congestive heart failure (see ). For patients with cardiomyopathy or possible cardiac decompensation, a loading dose, as discussed below, should not be given, and initial dosage should be limited to 100 mg of immediate-release Norpace every 6 to 8 hours.Warnings

For patients with moderate renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance greater than 40 ml/min) or hepatic insufficiency, the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (either 100 mg every 6 hours for immediate-release Norpace or 200 mg every 12 hours for Norpace CR).

For patients with severe renal insufficiency (C 40 ml/min or less), the recommended dosage regimen of immediate-release Norpace is 100 mg at intervals shown in the table below, with or without an initial loading dose of 150 mg. cr
IMMEDIATE-RELEASE NORPACE DOSAGE INTERVAL FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY Creatinine clearance (ml/min) 40–30 30–15 less than 15 Approximate maintenance-dosing interval q 8 hr q 12 hr q 24 hr
The above dosing schedules are for Norpace immediate-release capsules; Norpace CR is not recommended for patients with severe renal insufficiency.

For patients in whom rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 300 mg of immediate-release Norpace (200 mg for patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds) is recommended, followed by the appropriate maintenance dosage. Therapeutic effects are usually attained 30 minutes to 3 hours after administration of a 300-mg loading dose. If there is no response or evidence of toxicity within 6 hours of the loading dose, 200 mg of immediate-release Norpace every 6 hours may be prescribed instead of the usual 150 mg. If there is no response to this dosage within 48 hours, either Norpace should then be discontinued or the physician should consider hospitalizing the patient for careful monitoring while subsequent immediate-release Norpace doses of 250 mg or 300 mg every 6 hours are given. A limited number of patients with severe refractory ventricular tachycardia have tolerated daily doses of Norpace up to 1600 mg per day (400 mg every 6 hours), resulting in disopyramide plasma levels up to 9 mcg/ml. If such treatment is warranted, it is essential that patients be hospitalized for close evaluation and continuous monitoring.

Norpace CR should not be used initially if rapid establishment of disopyramide plasma levels is desired.

Transferring to Norpace or Norpace CR

The following dosage schedule based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data is suggested for transferring patients with normal renal function from either quinidine sulfate or procainamide therapy (Type 1 antiarrhythmic agents) to Norpace or Norpace CR therapy:

Norpace or Norpace CR should be started using the regular maintenance schedule 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate or 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide. without a loading dose

In patients in whom withdrawal of quinidine sulfate or procainamide is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, the physician should consider hospitalization of the patient. When transferring a patient from immediate-release Norpace to Norpace CR, the maintenance schedule of Norpace CR may be started 6 hours after the last dose of immediate-release Norpace.

Pediatric Dosage

Controlled clinical studies have not been conducted in pediatric patients; however, the following suggested dosage table is based on published clinical experience.

Total daily dosage should be divided and equal doses administered orally every 6 hours or at intervals according to individual patient needs. Disopyramide plasma levels and therapeutic response must be monitored closely. Patients should be hospitalized during the initial treatment period, and dose titration should start at the lower end of the ranges provided below.
SUGGESTED TOTAL DAILY DOSAGE * Age (years) Disopyramide (mg/kg body weight/day) * Dosage is expressed in milligrams of disopyramide base. Since Norpace (disopyramide phosphate) 100-mg capsules contain 100 mg of disopyramide base, the pharmacist can readily prepare a 1-mg/mL to 10-mg/mL liquid suspension by adding the entire contents of Norpace capsules to cherry syrup. (Prepare cherry syrup as follows: cherry juice, 475 ml; sucrose 800 g; alcohol, 20 ml; purified water, a sufficient quantity to make 1000 ml.) The resulting suspension, when refrigerated, is stable for one month and should be thoroughly shaken before the measurement of each dose. The suspension should be dispensed in an amber glass bottle with a child-resistant closure. Under 1 10 to 30 1 to 4 10 to 20 4 to 12 10 to 15 12 to 18 6 to 15
Norpace CR capsules should not be used to prepare the above suspension.
Methenamine Hippurate

Methenamine Hippurate

1 tablet (1 g) twice daily (morning and night) for adults and pediatric patients over 12 years of age. 1/2 to 1 tablet (0.5 to 1 g) twice daily (morning and night) for pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age. Since the antibacterial activity of methenamine hippurate tablets, USP is greater in acid urine, restriction of alkalinizing foods and medications is desirable. If necessary, as indicated by urinary pH and clinical response, supplemental acidification of the urine should be instituted. The efficacy of therapy should be monitored by repeated urine cultures.
Diflunisal

Diflunisal

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diflunisal tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diflunisal tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with diflunisal tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Concentration-dependent pharmacokinetics prevail when diflunisal is administered; a doubling of dosage produces a greater than doubling of drug accumulation. The effect becomes more apparent with repetitive doses.

For mild to moderate pain, an initial dose of 1000 mg followed by 500 mg every 12 hours is recommended for most patients. Following the initial dose, some patients may require 500 mg every 8 hours.

A lower dosage may be appropriate depending on such factors as pain severity, patient response, weight, or advanced age; for example, 500 mg initially, followed by 250 mg every 8 to 12 hours.

For osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis, the suggested dosage range is 500 mg to 1000 mg daily in two divided doses. The dosage of diflunisal may be increased or decreased according to patient response.

Maintenance doses higher than 1500 mg a day are not recommended.

Tablets should be swallowed whole, not crushed or chewed.
Ery-tab

Ery-tab

In most patients, ERY-TAB (erythromycin delayed-release tablets) are well absorbed and may be dosed orally without regard to meals. However, optimal blood levels are obtained when ERY-TAB 250 mg, ERY-TAB 333 mg or ERY-TAB 500 mg tablets are given in the fasting state (at least 1/2 hour and preferably 2 hours before meals). ®®®®

Adults

The usual dose is 250 mg four times daily in equally spaced doses. The 333 mg tablet is recommended if dosage is desired every 8 hours. If twice-a-day dosage is desired, the recommended dose is 500 mg every 12 hours. Dosage may be increased up to 4 g per day according to the severity of the infection. However, twice-a-day dosing is not recommended when doses larger than 1 g daily are administered.

Children

Age, weight, and severity of the infection are important factors in determining the proper dosage. The usual dosage is 30 to 50 mg/kg/day, in equally divided doses. For more severe infections, this dose may be doubled but should not exceed 4 g per day.

In the treatment of streptococcal infections of the upper respiratory tract (e.g., tonsillitis or pharyngitis), the therapeutic dosage of erythromycin should be administered for at least ten days.

The American Heart Association suggests a dosage of 250 mg of erythromycin orally, twice a day in long-term prophylaxis of streptococcal upper respiratory tract infections for the prevention of recurring attacks of rheumatic fever in patients allergic to penicillin and sulfonamides. 4

Conjunctivitis of the Newborn Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

Oral erythromycin suspension 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses for at least 2 weeks. 4

Pneumonia of Infancy Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

Although the optimal duration of therapy has not been established, the recommended therapy is oral erythromycin suspension 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses for at least 3 weeks.

Urogenital Infections During Pregnancy Due to Chlamydia trachomatis

Although the optimal dose and duration of therapy have not been established, the suggested treatment is 500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day or two erythromycin 333 mg tablets orally every 8 hours on an empty stomach for at least 7 days. For women who cannot tolerate this regimen, a decreased dose of one erythromycin 500 mg tablet orally every 12 hours, one 333 mg tablet orally every 8 hours or 250 mg by mouth four times a day should be used for at least 14 days. 6

For adults with uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infections caused by Chlamydia trachomatis, when tetracycline is contraindicated or not tolerated

500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day or two 333 mg tablets orally every 8 hours for at least 7 days. 6

For patients with nongonococcal urethritis caused by Ureaplasma urealyticum when tetracycline is contraindicated or not tolerated

500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day or two 333 mg tablets orally every 8 hours for at least seven days. 6

Primary Syphilis

30 to 40 g given in divided doses over a period of 10 to 15 days.

Acute pelvic inflammatory disease caused by N. gonorrhoeae

500 mg Erythrocin Lactobionate-I.V. (erythromycin lactobionate for injection, USP) every 6 hours for 3 days, followed by 500 mg of erythromycin base orally every 12 hours, or 333 mg of erythromycin base orally every 8 hours for 7 days.

Intestinal Amebiasis

Adults

500 mg every 12 hours, 333 mg every 8 hours or 250 mg every 6 hours for 10 to 14 days.

Children

30 to 50 mg/kg/day in divided doses for 10 to 14 days.

Pertussis

Although optimal dosage and duration have not been established, doses of erythromycin utilized in reported clinical studies were 40 to 50 mg/kg/day, given in divided doses for 5 to 14 days.

Legionnaires' Disease

Although optimal dosage has not been established, doses utilized in reported clinical data were 1 to 4 g daily in divided doses.

Preoperative Prophylaxis for Elective Colorectal Surgery

Listed below is an example of a recommended bowel preparation regimen.

A proposed surgery time of 8:00 a.m. has been used.

Pre-op Day 3

Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Bisacodyl, 1 tablet orally at 6:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 2

Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m., 2:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. Enema at 7:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 1

Clear liquid diet. Supplemental (IV) fluids as needed. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. Neomycin sulfate (1.0 g) and erythromycin base (two 500 mg tablets, three 333 mg tablets or four 250 mg tablets) orally at 1:00 p.m., 2:00 p.m. and 11:00 p.m. No enema.

Day of Operation

Patient evacuates rectum at 6:30 a.m. for scheduled operation at 8:00 a.m.
Flecainide Acetate

Flecainide Acetate

For patients with VT, no matter what their cardiac status, flecainide, like other antiarrhythmics, should be initiated in-hospital with rhythm monitoring. sustained

Flecainide has a long half-life (12 to 27 hours in patients). Steady-state plasma levels, in patients with normal renal and hepatic function, may not be achieved until the patient has received 3 to 5 days of therapy at a given dose. Therefore, , since during the first 2 to 3 days of therapy the optimal effect of a given dose may not be achieved. increases in dosage should be made no more frequently than once every four days

For patients with PSVT and patients with PAF the recommended starting dose is 50 mg every 12 hours. Flecainide doses may be increased in increments of 50 mg bid every four days until efficacy is achieved. For PAF patients, a substantial increase in efficacy without a substantial increase in discontinuations for adverse experiences may be achieved by increasing the flecainide dose from 50 mg to 100 mg bid. The maximum recommended dose for patients with paroxysmal supraventricular arrhythmias is 300 mg/day.

For VT the recommended starting dose is 100 mg every 12 hours. This dose may be increased in increments of 50 mg bid every four days until efficacy is achieved. Most patients with VT do not require more than 150 mg every 12 hours (300 mg/day), and the maximum dose recommended is 400 mg/day. sustainedsustained

In patients with VT, use of higher initial doses and more rapid dosage adjustments have resulted in an increased incidence of proarrhythmic events and CHF, particularly during the first few days of dosing (see ). Therefore, a loading dose is not recommended. sustainedWARNINGS

Intravenous lidocaine has been used occasionally with flecainide while awaiting the therapeutic effect of flecainide. No adverse drug interactions were apparent. However, no formal studies have been performed to demonstrate the usefulness of this regimen.

An occasional patient not adequately controlled by (or intolerant to) a dose given at 12-hour intervals may be dosed at eight-hour intervals.

Once adequate control of the arrhythmia has been achieved, it may be possible in some patients to reduce the dose as necessary to minimize side effects or effects on conduction. In such patients, efficacy at the lower dose should be evaluated.

Flecainide should be used cautiously in patients with a history of CHF or myocardial dysfunction (see ). WARNINGS

Any use of flecainide in children should be directly supervised by a cardiologist skilled in the treatment of arrhythmias in children. Because of the evolving nature of information in this area, specialized literature should be consulted. Under six months of age, the initial starting dose of flecainide in children is approximately 50 mg/M body surface area daily, divided into two or three equally spaced doses. Over six months of age, the initial starting dose maybe increased to 100 mg/M per day. The maximum recommended dose is 200 mg/M per day. This dose should not be exceeded. In some children on higher doses, despite previously low plasma levels, the level has increased rapidly to far above therapeutic values while taking the same dose. Small changes in dose may also lead to disproportionate increases in plasma levels. Plasma trough (less than one hour pre-dose) flecainide levels and electrocardiograms should be obtained at presumed steady state (after at least five doses) either after initiation or change in flecainide dose, whether the dose was increased for lack of effectiveness, or increased growth of the patient. For the first year on therapy, whenever the patient is seen for reasons of clinical follow-up, it is suggested that a 12-lead electrocardiogram and plasma trough flecainide level are obtained. The usual therapeutic level of flecainide in children is 200 to 500 ng/mL. In some cases, levels as high as 800 ng/mL may be required for control. 222

In patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 35 mL/min/1.73 square meters or less), the initial dosage should be 100 mg once daily (or 50 mg bid); when used in such patients, frequent plasma level monitoring is required to guide dosage adjustments (see ). In patients with less severe renal disease, the initial dosage should be 100 mg every 12 hours; plasma level monitoring may also be useful in these patients during dosage adjustment. In both groups of patients, dosage increases should be made very cautiously when plasma levels have plateaued (after more than four days), observing the patient closely for signs of adverse cardiac effects or other toxicity. It should be borne in mind that in these patients it may take longer than four days before a new steady-state plasma level is reached following a dosage change. Plasma Level Monitoring

Based on theoretical considerations, rather than experimental data, the following suggestion is made: when transferring patients from another antiarrhythmic drug to flecainide allow at least two to four plasma half-lives to elapse for the drug being discontinued before starting flecainide at the usual dosage. In patients where withdrawal of a previous antiarrhythmic agent is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, the physician should consider hospitalizing the patient.

When flecainide is given in the presence of amiodarone, reduce the usual flecainide dose by 50% and monitor the patient closely for adverse effects.

Plasma level monitoring is strongly recommended to guide dosage with such combination therapy (see below).

Plasma Level Monitoring

The large majority of patients successfully treated with flecainide were found to have trough plasma levels between 0.2 and 1 mcg/mL. The probability of adverse experiences, especially cardiac, may increase with higher trough plasma levels, especially when these exceed 1 mcg/mL. Periodic monitoring of trough plasma levels may be useful in patient management. Plasma level monitoring is required in patients with severe renal failure or severe hepatic disease, since elimination of flecainide from plasma may be markedly slower. Monitoring of plasma levels is strongly recommended in patients on concurrent amiodarone therapy and may also be helpful in patients with CHF and in patients with moderate renal disease.
Senna

Senna

Take preferably at bedtime or as directed by a doctor. Shake Well Before Using.
age starting dose maximum dosage adults and children 12 years and older 2 - 3 teaspoons once a day 3 teaspoons twice a day children 6 to under 12 years 1 - 1 1/2 teaspoons once a day 1 1/2 teaspoons twice a day children 2 to under 6 years 1/2 - 3/4 teaspoon once a day 3/4 teaspoon twice a day children under 2 years ask a doctor ask a doctor
Calcitriol

Calcitriol

The optimal daily dose of calcitriol must be carefully determined for each patient. Calcitriol can be administered orally either as a capsule (0.25 mcg or 0.50 mcg) or as an oral solution (1 mcg/mL). Calcitriol therapy should always be started at the lowest possible dose and should not be increased without careful monitoring of serum calcium.

The effectiveness of calcitriol therapy is predicated on the assumption that each patient is receiving an adequate but not excessive daily intake of calcium. Patients are advised to have a dietary intake of calcium at a minimum of 600 mg daily. The U.S. RDA for calcium in adults is 800 mg to 1200 mg. To ensure that each patient receives an adequate daily intake of calcium, the physician should either prescribe a calcium supplement or instruct the patient in proper dietary measures.

Because of improved calcium absorption from the gastrointestinal tract, some patients on calcitriol may be maintained on a lower calcium intake. Patients who tend to develop hypercalcemia may require only low doses of calcium or no supplementation at all.

During the titration period of treatment with calcitriol, serum calcium levels should be checked at least twice weekly. When the optimal dosage of calcitriol has been determined, serum calcium levels should be checked every month (or as given below for individual indications). Samples for serum calcium estimation should be taken without a tourniquet.

Dialysis Patients

The recommended initial dose of calcitriol is 0.25 mcg/day. If a satisfactory response in the biochemical parameters and clinical manifestations of the disease state is not observed, dosage may be increased by 0.25 mcg/day at 4- to 8-week intervals. During this titration period, serum calcium levels should be obtained at least twice weekly, and if hypercalcemia is noted, the drug should be immediately discontinued until normocalcemia ensues (see ). Phosphorus, magnesium, and alkaline phosphatase should be determined periodically. PRECAUTIONS: General

Patients with normal or only slightly reduced serum calcium levels may respond to calcitriol doses of 0.25 mcg every other day. Most patients undergoing hemodialysis respond to doses between 0.5 and 1 mcg/day.

Oral calcitriol may normalize plasma-ionized calcium in some uremic patients, yet fail to suppress parathyroid hyperfunction. In these individuals with autonomous parathyroid hyperfunction, oral calcitriol may be useful to maintain normocalcemia, but has not been shown to be adequate treatment for hyperparathyroidism.

Hypoparathyroidism

The recommended initial dosage of calcitriol is 0.25 mcg/day given in the morning. If a satisfactory response in the biochemical parameters and clinical manifestations of the disease is not observed, the dose may be increased at 2- to 4-week intervals. During the dosage titration period, serum calcium levels should be obtained at least twice weekly and, if hypercalcemia is noted, calcitriol should be immediately discontinued until normocalcemia ensues (see ). Careful consideration should also be given to lowering the dietary calcium intake. Serum calcium, phosphorus, and 24-hour urinary calcium should be determined periodically. PRECAUTIONS: General

Most adult patients and pediatric patients age 6 years and older have responded to dosages in the range of 0.5 mcg to 2 mcg daily. Pediatric patients in the 1- to 5-year age group with hypoparathyroidism have usually been given 0.25 mcg to 0.75 mcg daily. The number of treated patients with pseudohypoparathyroidism less than 6 years of age is too small to make dosage recommendations.

Malabsorption is occasionally noted in patients with hypoparathyroidism; hence, larger doses of calcitriol may be needed.

Predialysis Patients

The recommended initial dosage of calcitriol is 0.25 mcg/day in adults and pediatric patients 3 years of age and older. This dosage may be increased if necessary to 0.5 mcg/day.

For pediatric patients less than 3 years of age, the recommended initial dosage of calcitriol is 10 to 15 ng/kg/day.
Buspirone Hydrochloride...

Buspirone Hydrochloride

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg daily (7.5 mg b.i.d.). To achieve an optimal therapeutic response, at intervals of 2 to 3 days the dosage may be increased 5 mg per day, as needed. The maximum daily dosage should not exceed 60 mg per day. In clinical trials allowing dose titration, divided doses of 20 to 30 mg per day were commonly employed.

The bioavailability of buspirone is increased when given with food as compared to the fasted state (see ). Consequently, patients should take buspirone in a consistent manner with regard to the timing of dosing; either always with or always without food. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

When buspirone is to be given with a potent inhibitor of CYP3A4, the dosage recommendations described in the , section should be followed. PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions
Nicardipine Hydrochlori...

Nicardipine Hydrochloride

Angina

The dose should be individually titrated for each patient beginning with 20 mg 3 times daily. Doses in the range of 20 mg to 40 mg 3 times a day have been shown to be effective. At least 3 days should be allowed before increasing the nicardipine hydrochloride dose to ensure achievement of steady-state plasma drug concentrations.

Concomitant Use With Other Antianginal Agents
1. may be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during nicardipine therapy. Sublingual NTG 2. –Nicardipine may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy 3. –(See .) Beta-blockers PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions
Hypertension

The dose of nicardipine hydrochloride should be individually adjusted according to the blood pressure response beginning with 20 mg 3 times daily. The effective doses in clinical trials have ranged from 20 mg to 40 mg 3 times daily. The maximum blood pressure lowering effect occurs approximately 1 to 2 hours after dosing. (See ; ; .) At least 3 days should be allowed before increasing the nicardipine dose to ensure achievement of steady-state plasma drug concentrations. To assess the adequacy of blood pressure response, the blood pressure should be measured at trough (8 hours after dosing). Because of the prominent peak effects of nicardipine, blood pressure should be measured 1 to 2 hours after dosing, particularly during initiation of therapy.PRECAUTIONS, Blood PressureINDICATIONS AND USAGECLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Effects in Hypertension

Concomitant Use With Other Antihypertensive Agents, Beta-blockers

(See .) PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions

Special Patient Populations

Renal Insufficiency

Although there is no evidence that nicardipine impairs renal function, careful dose titration beginning with 20 mg TID is advised. (See .) PRECAUTIONS

Hepatic Insufficiency

Nicardipine should be administered cautiously in patients with severely impaired hepatic function. A suggested starting dose of 20 mg twice a day is advised with individual titration based on clinical findings maintaining the twice a day schedule. (See .) PRECAUTIONS

Congestive Heart Failure

Caution is advised when titrating nicardipine dosage in patients with congestive heart failure. (See .) WARNINGS
Ergocalciferol

Ergocalciferol

THE RANGE BETWEEN THERAPEUTIC AND TOXIC DOSES IS NARROW.
Vitamin D Resistant Rickets:
12,000 to 500,000 USP Units daily.
Hypoparathyroidism:
50,000 to 200,000 USP Units daily concomitantly with calcium lactate 4 g, six times per day.

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED UNDER CLOSE MEDICAL SUPERVISION.

Calcium intake should be adequate. Blood calcium and phosphorus determinations must be made every 2 weeks or more frequently if necessary. X-rays of the bones should be taken every month until condition is corrected and stabilized.
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is one capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5-10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10-80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5-10 mg and benazepril doses of 10-40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage adjustment in renal impairment

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance ≤ 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly ≤3 mg/dL or 265 μmol/L) [see ]. Renal Impairment:Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Buspirone Hydrochloride...

Buspirone Hydrochloride

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg daily (7.5 mg b.i.d.). To achieve an optimal therapeutic response, at intervals of 2 to 3 days the dosage may be increased 5 mg per day, as needed. The maximum daily dosage should not exceed 60 mg per day. In clinical trials allowing dose titration, divided doses of 20 to 30 mg per day were commonly employed.

The bioavailability of buspirone is increased when given with food as compared to the fasted state (see ). Consequently, patients should take buspirone in a consistent manner with regard to the timing of dosing; either always with or always without food. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

When buspirone is to be given with a potent inhibitor of CYP3A4, the dosage recommendations described in the , section should be followed. PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

adults and children 12 years of age and over take one 60 mg tablet with water every 12 hours; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Adult Hypertensive Patients

Losartan potassium tablets USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents, and with or without food.

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan potassium tablets USP is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg used in patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see , ) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see , ). Losartan potassium tablets USP can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg. WARNINGSHypotension― Volume-Depleted PatientsPRECAUTIONSGeneral

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. The effect of losartan is substantially present within one week but in some studies the maximal effect occurred in 3 to 6 weeks (see , , ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacodynamics and Clinical EffectsHypertension

If blood pressure is not controlled by losartan potassium tablets USP alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see , , ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacodynamics and Clinical EffectsHypertension

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or for patients with renal impairment, including patients on dialysis.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of Age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.7 mg/kg once daily (up to 50 mg total) administered as a tablet or a suspension (see ). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 1.4 mg/kg (or in excess of 100 mg) daily have not been studied in pediatric patients (see , , and , and , ). Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL Suspension)CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacokineticsSpecial PopulationsPharmacodynamics and Clinical EffectsWARNINGSHypotension – Volume-Depleted Patients

Losartan potassium tablets USP are not recommended in pediatric patients less than 6 years of age or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate less than 30 mL/min/1.73 m (see , , , , and ). 2CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacokineticsSpecial PopulationsPharmacodynamics andClinical EffectsPRECAUTIONS

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to an 8 ounce (240 mL) amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 50 mg losartan potassium tablets USP. Immediately shake for at least 2 minutes. Let the concentrate stand for 1 hour and then shake for 1 minute to disperse the tablet contents. Separately prepare a 50/50 volumetric mixture of Ora-Plus™ and Ora-Sweet SF™ . Add 190 mL of the 50/50 Ora-Plus™/Ora-Sweet SF™ mixture to the tablet and water slurry in the PET bottle and shake for 1 minute to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension prior to each use and return promptly to the refrigerator.

Hypertensive Patients With Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

The usual starting dose is 50 mg of losartan potassium tablets USP once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg daily should be added and/or the dose of losartan potassium tablets USP should be increased to 100 mg once daily followed by an increase in hydrochlorothiazide to 25 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see , , ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacodynamics andClinical EffectsReduction in the Risk of Stroke

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The usual starting dose is 50 mg once daily. The dose should be increased to 100 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see , , ). Losartan potassium tablets USP may be administered with insulin and other commonly used hypoglycemic agents ( sulfonylureas, glitazones and glucosidase inhibitors). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacodynamics and Clinical EffectsNephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patientse.g.,
Amlodipine Besylate

Amlodipine Besylate

2.1. Adults

The usual initial antihypertensive oral dose of amlodipine besylate tablets is 5 mg once daily with a maximum dose of 10 mg once daily.

Small, fragile, or elderly patients, or patients with hepatic insufficiency may be started on 2.5 mg once daily and this dose may be used when adding amlodipine besylate tablets to other antihypertensive therapy.

Adjust dosage according to each patient’s need. In general, titration should proceed over 7 to 14 days so that the physician can fully assess the patient’s response to each dose level. Titration may proceed more rapidly, however, if clinically warranted, provided the patient is assessed frequently.

The recommended dose for chronic stable or vasospastic angina is 5 to10 mg, with the lower dose suggested in the elderly and in patients with hepatic insufficiency. Most patients will require 10 mg for adequate effect . [seeAdverse Reactions(6)]

The recommended dose range for patients with coronary artery disease is 5 to10 mg once daily. In clinical studies, the majority of patients required 10 mg . [seeClinical Studies(14.4)]

2.2. Children

The effective antihypertensive oral dose in pediatric patients ages 6 to 17 years is 2.5 mg to 5 mg once daily. Doses in excess of 5 mg daily have not been studied in pediatric patients . [seeClinical Pharmacology(12.4),Clinical Studies(14.1)]
Nicardipine Hydrochlori...

Nicardipine Hydrochloride

Angina

The dose should be individually titrated for each patient beginning with 20 mg 3 times daily. Doses in the range of 20 mg to 40 mg 3 times a day have been shown to be effective. At least 3 days should be allowed before increasing the nicardipine hydrochloride dose to ensure achievement of steady-state plasma drug concentrations.

Concomitant Use With Other Antianginal Agents
1. may be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during nicardipine therapy. Sublingual NTG 2. –Nicardipine may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy 3. –(See .) Beta-blockers PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions
Hypertension

The dose of nicardipine hydrochloride should be individually adjusted according to the blood pressure response beginning with 20 mg 3 times daily. The effective doses in clinical trials have ranged from 20 mg to 40 mg 3 times daily. The maximum blood pressure lowering effect occurs approximately 1 to 2 hours after dosing. (See ; ; .) At least 3 days should be allowed before increasing the nicardipine dose to ensure achievement of steady-state plasma drug concentrations. To assess the adequacy of blood pressure response, the blood pressure should be measured at trough (8 hours after dosing). Because of the prominent peak effects of nicardipine, blood pressure should be measured 1 to 2 hours after dosing, particularly during initiation of therapy.PRECAUTIONS, Blood PressureINDICATIONS AND USAGECLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Effects in Hypertension

Concomitant Use With Other Antihypertensive Agents, Beta-blockers

(See .) PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions

Special Patient Populations

Renal Insufficiency

Although there is no evidence that nicardipine impairs renal function, careful dose titration beginning with 20 mg TID is advised. (See .) PRECAUTIONS

Hepatic Insufficiency

Nicardipine should be administered cautiously in patients with severely impaired hepatic function. A suggested starting dose of 20 mg twice a day is advised with individual titration based on clinical findings maintaining the twice a day schedule. (See .) PRECAUTIONS

Congestive Heart Failure

Caution is advised when titrating nicardipine dosage in patients with congestive heart failure. (See .) WARNINGS
Glipizide Er

Glipizide Er

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glipizide extended-release tablets or any other hypoglycemic agent. Glycemic control should be monitored with hemoglobin A and/or blood-glucose levels to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood-glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Home blood-glucose monitoring may also provide useful information to the patient and physician. Short-term administration of glipizide extended-release tablets may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled on diet. 1C

In general, glipizide extended-release tablets should be given with breakfast.

The usual starting dose of glipizide extended-release tablets as initial therapy is 5 mg per day, given with breakfast. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs may be started at a lower dose. Recommended Dosing:

Dosage adjustment should be based on laboratory measures of glycemic control. While fasting blood-glucose levels generally reach steady-state following initiation or change in glipizide extended-release tablet dosage, a single fasting glucose determination may not accurately reflect the response to therapy. In most cases, hemoglobin A level measured at three month intervals is the preferred means of monitoring response to therapy. 1C

Hemoglobin A should be measured as glipizide extended-release tablet therapy is initiated and repeated approximately three months later. If the result of this test suggests that glycemic control over the preceding three months was inadequate, the glipizide extended-release tablet dose may be increased. Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made on the basis of hemoglobin A levels measured at three month intervals. If no improvement is seen after three months of therapy with a higher dose, the previous dose should be resumed. Decisions which utilize fasting blood glucose to adjust glipizide extended-release tablet therapy should be based on at least two or more similar, consecutive values obtained seven days or more after the previous dose adjustment. 1C1C

Most patients will be controlled with 5 mg to 10 mg taken once daily. However, some patients may require up to the maximum recommended daily dose of 20 mg. While the glycemic control of selected patients may improve with doses which exceed 10 mg, clinical studies conducted to date have not demonstrated an additional group average reduction of hemoglobin A beyond what was achieved with the 10 mg dose. 1C

Based on the results of a randomized crossover study, patients receiving immediate release glipizide may be switched safely to glipizide extended-release tablets once-a-day at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Patients receiving immediate release glipizide also may be titrated to the appropriate dose of glipizide extended-release tablets starting with 5 mg once daily. The decision to switch to the nearest equivalent dose or to titrate should be based on clinical judgment.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see section). PRECAUTIONS

When adding other blood-glucose-lowering agents to glipizide extended-release tablets for combination therapy, the agent should be initiated at the lowest recommended dose, and patients should be observed carefully for hypoglycemia. Refer to the product information supplied with the oral agent for additional information. Combination Use:

When adding glipizide extended-release tablets to other blood-glucose-lowering agents, glipizide extended-release tablets can be initiated at 5 mg. Those patients who may be more sensitive to hypoglycemic drugs may be started at a lower dose. Titration should be based on clinical judgment.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glipizide ER, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glipizide is reduced. Therefore, glipizide ER should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, many patients with stable type 2 diabetes receiving insulin may be transferred safely to treatment with glipizide extended-release tablets. When transferring patients from insulin to glipizide extended-release tablets, the following general guidelines should be considered: Patients Receiving Insulin:

For patients whose daily insulin requirement is 20 units or less, insulin may be discontinued and glipizide extended-release tablet therapy may begin at usual dosages. Several days should elapse between titration steps.

For patients whose daily insulin requirement is greater than 20 units, the insulin dose should be reduced by 50% and glipizide extended-release tablet therapy may begin at usual dosages. Subsequent reductions in insulin dosage should depend on individual patient response. Several days should elapse between titration steps.

During the insulin withdrawal period, the patient should test urine samples for sugar and ketone bodies at least three times daily. Patients should be instructed to contact the prescriber immediately if these tests are abnormal. In some cases, especially when the patient has been receiving greater than 40 units of insulin daily, it may be advisable to consider hospitalization during the transition period.

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, no transition period is necessary when transferring patients to glipizide extended-release tablets. Patients should be observed carefully (1 to 2 weeks) for hypoglycemia when being transferred from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) to glipizide extended-release tablets due to potential overlapping of drug effect. Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents:
Nizatidine

Nizatidine

– The recommended oral dosage for adults is 300 mg once daily at bedtime. An alternative dosage regimen is 150 mg twice daily. Active Duodenal Ulcer

– The recommended oral dosage for adults is 150 mg once daily at bedtime. Maintenance of Healed Duodenal Ulcer

– The recommended oral dosage in adults for the treatment of erosions, ulcerations, and associated heartburn is 150 mg twice daily. Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease

– The recommended oral dosage is 300 mg given either as 150 mg twice daily or 300 mg once daily at bedtime. Prior to treatment, care should be taken to exclude the possibility of malignant gastric ulceration. Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

– The dose for patients with renal dysfunction should be reduced as follows: Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Insufficiency
Active Duodenal Ulcer, GERD and Benign Gastric Ulcer C cr Dose 20-50 mL/min 150 mg daily <20 mL/min 150 mg every other day Maintenance Therapy C cr Dose 20-50 mL/min 150 mg every other day <20 mL/min 150 mg every 3 days
Some elderly patients may have creatinine clearances of less than 50 mL/min, and based on pharmacokinetic data in patients with renal impairment, the dose for such patients should be reduced accordingly. The clinical effects of this dosage reduction in patients with renal failure have not been evaluated.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

The usual dietary intake of potassium by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 or more mEq of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patients. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40 to 100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose. Because of the potential for gastric irritation (see ), Potassium Chloride Extended-release Capsules, USP, 8 mEq and 10 mEq should be taken with meals and with a full glass of water or other liquid. WARNINGS

Patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules may sprinkle the contents of the capsule onto a spoonful of soft food. The soft food, such as applesauce or pudding, should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water or juice to ensure complete swallowing of the microcapsules. The food used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any microcapsule/food mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use.
Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol Succinate

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets intended for once daily administration. For treatment of hypertension and angina, when switching from immediate release metoprolol to metoprolol succinate extended-release, use the same total daily dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. Titration may be needed in some patients.

Metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets are scored and can be divided; however, do not crush or chew the whole or half tablet.

2.1 Hypertension

Adults: The usual initial dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily in a single dose. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of age: A pediatric clinical hypertension study in patients 6 to 16 years of age did not meet its primary endpoint (dose response for reduction in SBP); however some other endpoints demonstrated effectiveness [see ]. If selected for treatment, the recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release is 1 mg/kg once daily, but the maximum initial dose should not exceed 50 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 2 mg/kg (or in excess of 200 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients [see ]. Use in Specific Populations ( 8.4)Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3

Metoprolol succinate extended-release is not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years of age [see ]. Use in Specific Populations ( ) 8.4

2.2 Angina Pectoris

Individualize the dosage of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets. The usual initial dosage is 100 mg daily, given in a single dose. Gradually increase the dosage at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is a pronounced slowing of the heart rate. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks [see ]. Warnings and Precautions (5)

2.3 Heart Failure

Dosage must be individualized and closely monitored during up-titration. Prior to initiation of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets, stabilize the dose of other heart failure drug therapy. The recommended starting dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets is 25 mg once daily for two weeks in patients with NYHA Class II heart failure and 12.5 mg once daily in patients with more severe heart failure. Double the dose every two weeks to the highest dosage level tolerated by the patient or up to 200 mg of metoprolol succinate extended-release. Initial difficulty with titration should not preclude later attempts to introduce metoprolol succinate extended-release. If patients experience symptomatic bradycardia, reduce the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release. If transient worsening of heart failure occurs, consider treating with increased doses of diuretics, lowering the dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets or temporarily discontinuing it. The dose of metoprolol succinate extended-release tablets should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure have been stabilized.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, usual starting doses are 120 to 240 mg once daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 120 to 540 mg once daily. Current clinical experience with 540 mg dose is limited; however, the dose may be increased to 540 mg once daily. Hypertension.

Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg to 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 540 mg once daily. When necessary, titration should be carried out over 7 to 14 days. Angina.

Concomitant use with Other Cardiovascular Agents.

May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride therapy. 1.Sublingual Nitroglycerin (NTG).

. Diltiazem hydrochloride may be safely co-administered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 2Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy.

(See and .) 3.Beta-blockersWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Diltiazem hydrochloride has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other. 4.Antihypertensives.

Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the capsule contents. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any capsule contents/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules is not recommended.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, usual starting doses are 120 to 240 mg once daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 120 to 540 mg once daily. Current clinical experience with 540 mg dose is limited; however, the dose may be increased to 540 mg once daily. Hypertension.

Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg to 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 540 mg once daily. When necessary, titration should be carried out over 7 to 14 days. Angina.

Concomitant use with Other Cardiovascular Agents.

May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride therapy. 1.Sublingual Nitroglycerin (NTG).

. Diltiazem hydrochloride may be safely co-administered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 2Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy.

(See and .) 3.Beta-blockersWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Diltiazem hydrochloride has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other. 4.Antihypertensives.

Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the capsule contents. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any capsule contents/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules is not recommended.
Zafirlukast

Zafirlukast

Because food can reduce the bioavailability of zafirlukast, zafirlukast tablets should be taken at least 1 hour before or 2 hours after meals.

Adults and Children 12 years of age and older

The recommended dose of zafirlukast tablets in adults and children 12 years and older is 20 mg twice daily.

Pediatric Patients 5 through 11 years of age

The recommended dose of zafirlukast tablets in children 5 through 11 years of age is 10 mg twice daily.

Based on cross-study comparisons, the clearance of zafirlukast is reduced in elderly patients (65 years of age and older), such that C and AUC are approximately twice those of younger adults. In clinical trials, a dose of 20 mg twice daily was not associated with an increase in the overall incidence of adverse events or withdrawals because of adverse events in elderly patients. Elderly Patients:max

The clearance of zafirlukast is reduced in patients with stable alcoholic cirrhosis such that the C and AUC are approximately 50 - 60% greater than those of normal adults. Zafirlukast has not been evaluated in patients with hepatitis or in long-term studies of patients with cirrhosis. Patients with Hepatic Impairment:max

Dosage adjustment is not required for patients with renal impairment. Patients with Renal Impairment:
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under " ," multiple-dose studies with isosorbide dinitrate and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release isosorbide dinitrate, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

As also noted under " ," the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Hydrocortisone

Hydrocortisone

The initial dosage of hydrocortisone tablets may vary from 20 mg to 240 mg of hydrocortisone per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated. In situations of less severity lower doses will generally suffice while in selected patients higher initial doses may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until a satisfactory response is noted. If after a reasonable period of time there is a lack of satisfactory clinical response, hydrocortisone tablets should be discontinued and the patient transferred to other appropriate therapy. IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. It should be kept in mind that constant monitoring is needed in regard to drug dosage. Included in the situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient's individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment; in this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of hydrocortisone tablets for a period of time consistent with the patient's condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually, rather than abruptly.

Multiple Sclerosis

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (20 mg of hydrocortisone is equivalent to 5 mg of prednisolone).
Fluvastatin Sodium

Fluvastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/day.

Fluvastatin capsules can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not open fluvastatin capsules prior to administration.

Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥ 25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of < 25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2 Adult Patients with Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on fluvastatin capsules. The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin capsules is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one fluvastatin 40 mg capsule twice daily. Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

2.3 Pediatric Patients (10 to 16 Years of Age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one 20 mg fluvastatin capsule. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered as fluvastatin capsules 40 mg twice daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy. [See NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and .] Clinical Studies (14)1

National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. 89(3):495-501. 1992. 1Pediatrics.

2.4 Use with Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin capsules in patients taking cyclosporine . [see ] Drug Interactions (7.1)

2.5 Use with Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin capsules in patients taking fluconazole . [see ] Drug Interactions (7.2)
Trimethoprim

Trimethoprim

The usual oral adult dosage is 100 mg of trimethoprim every 12 hours or 200 mg trimethoprim (two 100 mg tablets) every 24 hours, each for 10 days. The use of trimethoprim in patients with a creatinine clearance of less than 15 mL/min is not recommended.

For patients with a creatinine clearance of 15 to 30 mL/min, the dose should be 50 mg every 12 hours.
Childrens Chewable Mapa...

Childrens Chewable Mapap

■ ■ Find right dose on the chart below. If possible, use weight to dose; otherwise, use age. ■ Chew before swallowing ■ If needed, repeat dose every 4 hours while symptoms lasts ■ Do not give more than 5 times in 24 hours ■ Do not give for more than 5 days unless directed by a doctor. This products does not contain directions or complete warnings for adult use.
Weight Age Tablets Under 24 lbs Under 2 years Ask a doctor 24-35 lbs 2-3 years 2 tablets 36-47 lbs 4-5 years 3 tablets 48-59 lbs 6-8 years 4 tablets 60-71 lbs 9-10 years 5 tablets 72-95 lbs 11 years 6 tablets
Chlordiazepoxide Hydroc...

Chlordiazepoxide Hydrochloride And Clidinium Bromide

Because of the varied individual responses to tranquilizers and anticholinergics, the optimum dosage of Chlordiazepoxide HCl/Clidinium Bromide varies with the diagnosis and response of the individual patient. The dosage, therefore, should be individualized for maximum beneficial effects. The usual maintenance dose is 1 or 2 capsules, 3 or 4 times a day administered before meals and at bedtime.

Geriatric Dosing

Dosage should be limited to the smallest effective amount to preclude the development of ataxia, oversedation or confusion. The initial dose should not exceed 2 Chlordiazepoxide HCl/Clidinium Bromide capsules per day, to be increased gradually as needed and tolerated.
Organ-i Nr

Organ-i Nr

do not take more than 6 doses in any 24-hour period this adult product is not intended for use in children under 12 years of age adults and children 12 years and over 1 - 2 tablets every 4 hours children under 12 years do not use
Salsalate

Salsalate

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Salsalate tablet, USP and other treatment options before deciding to use Salsalate tablet, USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with Salsalate tablet, USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs. Salsalate is indicated for relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis and related rheumatic disorder.

The usual dosage is 3000 mg daily, given in divided doses as follows: Adults:

1) two doses of two 750 mg tablets; 2) two doses of three 500 mg tablets; or 3) three doses of two 500 mg tablets. Some patients, e.g., the elderly, may require a lower dosage to achieve therapeutic blood concentrations and to avoid the more common side effects such as auditory.

Alleviation of symptoms is gradual, and full benefit may not be evident for 3 to 4 days, when plasma salicylate levels have achieved steady state. There is no evidence for development of tissue tolerance (tachyphylaxis), but salicylate therapy may induce increased activity of metabolizing liver enzymes, causing a greater rate of salicyluric acid production and excretion, with a resultant increase in dosage requirement for maintenance of therapeutic serum salicylate levels.

Dosage recommendations and indications for salsalate use in children have not been established. Children:
Rimantadine Hydrochlori...

Rimantadine Hydrochloride

FOR PROPHYLAXIS IN ADULTS AND CHILDREN

Adults (17 years and older)

The recommended adult dose of rimantadine hydrochloride is 100 mg twice a day. Study durations ranged from 11 days to 6 weeks in adult and elderly patients. In patients with severe hepatic dysfunction, severe renal impairment (CrCl 5 to 29 mL/min) or renal failure (CrCl ≤ 10 mL/min) and in elderly nursing home patients, a dose reduction to 100 mg daily is recommended. Because of the potential for accumulation of rimantadine metabolites during multiple dosing, patients with hepatic or renal impairment should be monitored for adverse effects.

Children (1 year to 16 years of age)
Study duration ranged from 5 weeks to 6 weeks in pediatric subjects. In children 1 year to 9 years of age, rimantadine hydrochloride should be administered once a day, at a dose of 5 mg/kg but not exceeding 150 mg. For children 10 years of age or older, use the adult dose.
(see to prepare an oral suspension for administration to children and patients with difficulty swallowing tablets). Directions for Compounding of an Oral Suspension from Rimantadine Hydrochloride Tablets

Children (Birth to 11 months)

The safety and efficacy of rimantadine hydrochloride for prophylaxis of influenza in pediatric patients younger than 1 year of age have not been established.

FOR TREATMENT IN ADULTS

Adults (17 years and older)

The recommended adult dose of rimantadine hydrochloride is 100 mg twice a day for 7 days. In patients with severe hepatic dysfunction, severe renal impairment (CrCl 5 to 29 mL/min) or renal failure (CrCl ≤ 10 mL/min) and elderly nursing home patients, a dose reduction to 100 mg daily is recommended. Because of the potential for accumulation of rimantadine metabolites during multiple dosing, patients with hepatic or renal impairment should be monitored for adverse effects. Rimantadine hydrochloride therapy should be initiated as soon as possible, preferably within 48 hours after onset of signs and symptoms of influenza A infection. Therapy should be continued for approximately seven days from the initial onset of symptoms.

Children (16 years of age and younger)

Rimantadine hydrochloride is not indicated for treatment of influenza in pediatric patients 16 years or younger.

Directions for the Compounding of an Oral Suspension from Rimantadine Hydrochloride Tablets (Final Concentration = 10 mg/mL) 1

These directions are provided for use only during emergency situations, for patients who have difficulty swallowing tablets or where lower doses are needed. The pharmacist may compound a suspension (10 mg/mL) from rimantadine hydrochloride tablets, 100 mg using Ora-Sweet . Other vehicles have not been studied. ®1

To make an oral suspension (10 mg/mL) from 100 mg rimantadine hydrochloride tablets, you will need the following:
100 mg tablets of rimantadine hydrochloride Ora-Sweet® (a vehicle manufactured by Paddock Laboratories) a graduated cylinder a mortar and pestle an Amber Glass or Polyethylene terephthalate plastic (PET) bottle a funnel (optional) 1 Ora-Sweet® is a registered trademark of Paddock Laboratories
Compounding Procedures

A 100 mg tablet of rimantadine hydrochloride is required for each 10 mL of compounded oral suspension to make a concentration of 10 mg/mL.

Therefore, the maximum amount of oral suspension that can be dispensed to a patient A compounded oral suspension is stable for 14 days.should not exceed a 14 day supply.

Step A: Guidance for how to determine the Number of Tablets and Total Volume needed to compound a 10 mg/mL oral suspension for each patient
Verify the prescribed dose is correct. Calculate the mg amount of rimantadine hydrochloride needed for the duration of therapy. (Daily Dose) × (Number of days) = (mg of rimantadine hydrochloride) For example, 75 mg/day × 10 days = 750 mg Round up the mg of rimantadine hydrochloride amount to the next 100 mg designation. For example, Round up 750 mg to 800 mg Calculate the Number of 100 mg tablets that are required for the compounded oral suspension. (Rounded mg of rimantadine hydrochloride) ÷ (100 mg/tablet) = (Number of tablets) For example, 800 mg ÷100 mg/tablet = 8 tablets Calculate the Total Volume of compounded oral suspension (10 mg/mL) (Rounded mg of rimantadine hydrochloride) ÷ (10 mg/mL) = (Total Volume) For example, 800 mg ÷ 10 mg/mL = 80 mL
Step B: Once the total Number of Tablets and Volume are determined then follow the procedures below for compounding the oral suspension (10 mg/mL) from rimantadine hydrochloride tablets 100 mg

Verify your calculations before you begin to compound an oral suspension.

A 100 mg tablet of rimantadine hydrochloride is required for each 10 mL's of compounded oral suspension to make a concentration of 10 mg/mL.
Place the required number of rimantadine hydrochloride 100 mg tablets into a clean mortar of sufficient size to contain the tablets and volume of vehicle, Ora-Sweet® used in Step 3. Grind the tablets and triturate to a fine powder using a pestle. Powder on the sides of the mortar or pestle should be removed using a spatula and incorporated into the trituration throughout the process. Slowly add approximately one-third (1/3) of the total volume of vehicle to the mortar while triturating until a uniform suspension is achieved. Transfer the suspension to an amber glass or a PET plastic bottle. Other types of bottles, such as non-PET plastic or uncolored bottles, have not been evaluated and should not be used. A funnel may be used to eliminate any spillage. Slowly add the second one-third (1/3) of the total volume of vehicle to the mortar, rinse the pestle and mortar by a triturating motion and transfer the contents into the bottle. Repeat the rinsing (Step 5) with the remaining one-third (1/3) of the vehicle, transferring the remaining contents to the fullest extent possible. Verify that the suspension is at the desired total volume or add additional vehicle if needed. Close the bottle using a child-resistant cap. Shake well to ensure homogeneous suspension. (Note: The active drug, rimantadine HCl readily dissolves in the specified vehicle. The suspension is caused by some of the inert ingredients of rimantadine hydrochloride tablets 100 mg which are insoluble in this vehicle.)
Labeling and Dispensing Information for the Compounded Oral Suspension
Include an ancillary label on the bottle indicating "Shake Gently Before Use." This compounded suspension should be gently shaken prior to administration to minimize the tendency for air entrapment with the Ora-Sweet® preparation. The need to shake the compounded oral suspension gently prior to administration should be reviewed with the parent or guardian when the suspension is dispensed. Provide an oral dosing device (a graduated oral syringe or spoon) that will measure the prescribed dose (in mL). If possible, mark or highlight the graduation corresponding to the appropriate dose on the oral syringe or spoon for each patient. Include an Expiration Date label according to storage condition (see below) and a "Discard any Unused Portion" label to the bottle. Instruct the parent or guardian that any remaining material following completion of therapy or after the expiration date on the label must be discarded.
STORAGE OF THE PHARMACY-COMPOUNDED SUSPENSION

Room Temperature: Stable for 14 days when stored in ambient room temperature conditions. Other storage conditions have not been studied.

Note: The storage conditions are based on stability studies of compounded oral suspensions, using the above mentioned vehicle, which was placed in amber glass and PET plastic bottles at 25°C (77°F). Stability studies have not been conducted with other vehicles or bottle types.
Diclofenac Sodium

Diclofenac Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For the relief of osteoarthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses (50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d., or 75 mg b.i.d.).

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses (50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d., or 75 mg b.i.d.).

For the relief of ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended dosage is 100 to 125 mg/day, administered as 25 mg q.i.d., with an extra 25 mg dose at bedtime if necessary.

Different formulations of diclofenac (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets) are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Doxycycline Hyclate

Doxycycline Hyclate

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF DOXYCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS. Adults: The usual dose of oral doxycycline is 200 mg on the first day of treatment (administered 100 mg every 12 hours) followed by a maintenance dose of 100 mg/day.

In the management of more severe infections (particularly chronic infections of the urinary tract), 100 mg every 12 hours is recommended.

For children above eight years of age: The recommended dosage schedule for children weighing 100 pounds or less is 2 mg/lb of body weight divided into two doses on the first day of treatment, followed by 1 mg/lb of body weight given as a single daily dose or divided into two doses, on subsequent days. For more severe infections up to 2 mg/lb of body weight may be used. For children over 100 lb the usual adult dose should be used.

The therapeutic antibacterial serum activity will usually persist for 24 hours following recommended dosage.

When used in streptococcal infections, therapy should be continued for 10 days.

Administration of adequate amounts of fluid along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline class is recommended to wash down the drugs and reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration (See ). ADVERSE REACTIONS

If gastric irritation occurs, it is recommended that doxycycline be given with food or milk. The absorption of doxycycline is not markedly influenced by simultaneous ingestion of food or milk.

Studies to date have indicated that administration of doxycycline at the usual recommended doses does not lead to excessive accumulation of doxycycline in patients with renal impairment.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections in adults (except anorectal infections in men): 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. As an alternate single visit dose, administer 300 mg stat followed in one hour by a second 300 mg dose. The dose may be administered with food, including milk or carbonated beverage, as required.

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by : 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. Chlamydiatrachomatis

Nongonococcal urethritis (NGU) caused by or : 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 7 days. C. trachomatisU. urealyticum

Syphilis - early: Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 2 weeks.

Syphilis of more than one year’s duration: Patients who are allergic to penicillin should be treated with doxycycline 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for 4 weeks.

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by : 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days. N. gonorrhoeae

Acute epididymo-orchitis caused by : 100 mg, by mouth, twice a day for at least 10 days. C. trachomatis

For prophylaxis of malaria: For adults, the recommended dose is 100 mg daily. For children over 8 years of age, the recommended dose is 2 mg/kg given once daily up to the adult dose. Prophylaxis should begin 1 to 2 days before travel to the malarious area. Prophylaxis should be continued daily during travel in the malarious area and for 4 weeks after the traveler leaves the malarious area.

Inhalational anthrax (post-exposure):

ADULTS: 100 mg of doxycycline, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days.

CHILDREN: weighing less than 100 lb (45 kg); 1 mg/lb (2.2 mg/kg) of body weight, by mouth, twice a day for 60 days. Children weighing 100 lb or more should receive the adult dose.
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under " ," multiple-dose studies with isosorbide dinitrate and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release isosorbide dinitrate, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

As also noted under " ," the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Dantrolene Sodium

Dantrolene Sodium

For Use in Chronic Spasticity

Prior to the administration of dantrolene sodium capsules, consideration should be given to the potential response to treatment. A decrease in spasticity sufficient to allow a daily function not otherwise attainable should be the therapeutic goal of treatment with dantrolene sodium capsules. Refer to section for description of response to be anticipated. INDICATIONS AND USAGE

It is important to establish a therapeutic goal (regain and maintain a specific function such as therapeutic exercise program, utilization of braces, transfer maneuvers, etc.) before beginning dantrolene sodium capsule therapy. Dosage should be increased until the maximum performance compatible with the dysfunction due to underlying disease is achieved. No further increase in dosage is then indicated.

Usual Dosage

It is important that the dosage be titrated and individualized for maximum effect. The lowest dose compatible with optimal response is recommended.

In view of the potential for liver damage in long-term dantrolene sodium capsule use, therapy should be stopped if benefits are not evident within 45 days.

Adults

The following gradual titration schedule is suggested. Some patients will not respond until higher daily dosage is achieved. Each dosage level should be maintained for seven days to determine the patient's response. If no further benefit is observed at the next higher dose, dosage should be decreased to the previous lower dose.
25 mg once daily for seven days, then 25 mg t.i.d. for seven days 50 mg t.i.d. for seven days 100 mg t.i.d.
Therapy with a dose four times daily may be necessary for some individuals. Doses higher than 100 mg four times daily should not be used. (See .) Box Warning

Pediatric Patients

The following gradual titration schedule is suggested. Some patients will not respond until higher daily dosage is achieved. Each dosage level should be maintained for seven days to determine the patient's response. If no further benefit is observed at the next higher dose, dosage should be decreased to the previous lower dose.
0.5 mg/kg once daily for seven days, then 0.5 mg/kg t.i.d. for seven days 1 mg/kg t.i.d. for seven days 2 mg/kg t.i.d.
Therapy with a dose four times daily may be necessary for some individuals. Doses higher than 100 mg four times daily should not be used. (See .) Box Warning

For Malignant Hyperthermia

Preoperatively

Administer 4 to 8 mg/kg/day of oral dantrolene sodium caspules in 3 or 4 divided doses for one or two days prior to surgery, with the last dose being given approximately 3 to 4 hours before scheduled surgery with a minimum of water.

This dosage will usually be associated with skeletal muscle weakness and sedation (sleepiness or drowsiness); adjustment can usually be made within the recommended dosage range to avoid incapacitation or excessive gastrointestinal irritation (including nausea and/or vomiting).

Post Crisis Follow-up

Oral dantrolene sodium capsules should also be administered following a malignant hyperthermia crisis, in doses of 4 to 8 mg/kg per day in four divided doses, for a one to three day period to prevent recurrence of the manifestations of malignant hyperthermia.
Desipramine Hydrochlori...

Desipramine Hydrochloride

Not recommended for use in children (see ). WARNINGS

Lower dosages are recommended for elderly patients and adolescents. Lower dosages are also recommended for outpatients compared to hospitalized patients, who are closely supervised. Dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased according to clinical response and any evidence of intolerance. Following remission, maintenance medication may be required for a period of time and should be at the lowest dose that will maintain remission.

Usual Adult Dose

The usual adult dose is 100 to 200 mg per day. In more severely ill patients, dosage may be further increased gradually to 300 mg/day if necessary. Dosages above 300 mg/day are not recommended.

Dosage should be initiated at a lower level and increased according to tolerance and clinical response.

Treatment of patients requiring as much as 300 mg should generally be initiated in hospitals, where regular visits by the physician, skilled nursing care, and frequent electrocardiograms (ECG’s) are available.

The best available evidence of impending toxicity from very high doses of desipramine is prolongation of the QRS or QT intervals on the ECG. Prolongation of the PR interval is also significant, but less closely correlated with plasma levels. Clinical symptoms of intolerance, especially drowsiness, dizziness, and postural hypotension, should also alert the physician to the need for reduction in dosage.

Initial therapy may be administered in divided doses or a single daily dose.

Maintenance therapy may be given on a once-daily schedule for patient convenience and compliance.

Adolescent and Geriatric Dose

The usual adolescent and geriatric dose is 25 to 100 mg daily.

Dosage should be initiated at a lower level and increased according to tolerance and clinical response to a usual maximum of 100 mg daily. In more severely ill patients, dosage may be further increased to 150 mg/day. Doses above 150 mg/day are not recommended in these age groups.

Initial therapy may be administered in divided doses or a single daily dose.

Maintenance therapy may be given on a once-daily schedule for patient convenience and compliance.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with desipramine hydrochloride. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping desipramine hydrochloride before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

Use of desipramine hydrochloride With Other MAOI’s, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start desipramine hydrochloride in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

In some cases, a patient already receiving desipramine hydrochloride therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, Desipramine hydrochloride should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with desipramine hydrochloride may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see ). WARNINGS

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with desipramine hydrochloride is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see ). WARNINGS
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, usual starting doses are 120 to 240 mg once daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 120 to 540 mg once daily. Current clinical experience with 540 mg dose is limited; however, the dose may be increased to 540 mg once daily. Hypertension.

Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg to 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 540 mg once daily. When necessary, titration should be carried out over 7 to 14 days. Angina.

Concomitant use with Other Cardiovascular Agents.

May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride therapy. 1.Sublingual Nitroglycerin (NTG).

. Diltiazem hydrochloride may be safely co-administered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 2Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy.

(See and .) 3.Beta-blockersWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Diltiazem hydrochloride has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other. 4.Antihypertensives.

Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the capsule contents. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any capsule contents/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules is not recommended.
Probenecid

Probenecid

Gout

Therapy with probenecid should not be until an acute gouty attack has subsided. However, if an acute attack is precipitated therapy, probenecid may be continued without changing the dosage, and full therapeutic dosage of colchicine, or other appropriate therapy, should be given to control the acute attack. startedduring

The recommended adult dosage is 250 mg (1/2 probenecid tablet), twice a day for one week, followed by 500 mg (1 tablet) twice a day thereafter.

Some degree of renal impairment may be present in patients with gout. A daily dosage of 1000 mg may be adequate. However, if necessary, the daily dosage may be increased by 500 mg increments every 4 weeks within tolerance (and usually not above 2000 mg per day) if symptoms of gouty arthritis are not controlled or the 24 hour uric acid excretion is not above 700 mg. As noted, probenecid may not be effective in chronic renal insufficiency particularly when the glomerular filtration rate is 30 mL/minute or less.

Gastric intolerance may be indicative of overdosage, and may be corrected by decreasing the dosage.

As uric acid tends to crystallize out of an acid urine, a liberal fluid intake is recommended, as well as sufficient sodium bicarbonate (3 to 7.5 g daily), or potassium citrate (7.5 g daily) to maintain an alkaline urine (see ). PRECAUTIONS

Alkalization of the urine is recommended until the serum urate level returns to normal limits and tophaceous deposits disappear, i.e., during the period when urinary excretion of uric acid is at a high level. Thereafter, alkalization of the urine and the usual restriction of purine-producing foods may be somewhat relaxed.

Probenecid should be continued at the dosage that will maintain normal serum urate levels. When acute attacks have been absent for 6 months or more and serum urate levels remain within normal limits, the daily dosage may be decreased by 500 mg every 6 months. The maintenance dosage should not be reduced to the point where serum urate levels tend to rise.

Probenecid and Penicillin Therapy (General)

Adults

The recommended dosage is 2000 mg (4 tablets of probenecid) daily in divided doses. This dosage should be reduced in older patients in whom renal impairment may be present.

Children

2–14 years of age:

Initial dose: 25 mg/kg body weight (or 0.7 g/square meter body surface).

Maintenance Dose: 40 mg/kg body weight (or 1.2 g/square meter body surface) per day, divided into 4 doses.

For children weighing more than 50 kg (110 lb) the adult dosage is recommended.

Probenecid is contraindicated in children under 2 years of age.

The PSP excretion test may be used to determine the effectiveness of probenecid in retarding penicillin excretion and maintaining therapeutic levels. The renal clearance of PSP is reduced to about one-fifth the normal rate when dosage of probenecid is adequate.

Penicillin Therapy (Gonorrhea)*

In uncomplicated gonococcal infections in men and women (urethral, cervical, rectal), 1 g of probenecid should be given orally with 4.8 million units of aqueous procaine penicillin G (given IM), or 3 g of amoxicillin (given orally), or 3.5 g of ampicillin (given orally). 122

For further guidance, see CDC recommendations for definition of regimens of choice, alternative regimens, treatment of hypersensitive patients, and other aspects of therapy.

*Recommended by the Center for Disease Control, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service (Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report Supplement, Volume 34, Number 4S, October 18, 1985).
1 See package circulars of manufacturers for detailed information about CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, and ADVERSE REACTIONS.
Nitro-time

Nitro-time

As noted above ( ) careful studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels of nitroglycerin results in tolerance (i.e., loss of clinical response). Every dosing regimen for Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should provide a daily nitrate-free interval to avoid the development of this tolerance. The minimum necessary length of such an interval has not been defined, but studies with other nitroglycerin formulations have shown that 10 to 12 hours is sufficient. Large controlled studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin show that no dosing regimen with Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The pharmacokinetics of Nitroglycerin capsules, and the clinical effects of multiple-dose regimens, have not been well studied. In clinical trials, the initial regimen of Nitroglycerin has been 2.5 to 6.5 mg three to four times a day, with subsequent upward dose adjustment guided by symptoms and side effects. In one trial, 5 of the 18 subjects were titrated up to a dose of 26 mg four times a day.
Tamsulosin Hydrochlorid...

Tamsulosin Hydrochloride

Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules 0.4 mg once daily is recommended as the dose for the treatment of the signs and symptoms of BPH. It should be administered approximately one-half hour following the same meal each day. For those patients who fail to respond to the 0.4 mg dose after 2 to 4 weeks of dosing, the dose of tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules can be increased to 0.8 mg once daily. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules 0.4 mg should not be used in combination with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g., ketoconazole) [ ]. If tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules administration is discontinued or interrupted for several days at either the 0.4 mg or 0.8 mg dose, therapy should be started again with the 0.4 mg once-daily dose.
see Warnings and Precautions ( ) 5.2
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under , multiple studies with isosorbide dinitrate and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets (oral) must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release ISDN, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

As also noted under , the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate oral tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate tablets (oral) is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Cardene Sr

Cardene Sr

The dose of CARDENE SR should be individually adjusted according to the blood pressure response beginning with 30 mg two times daily. The effective doses in clinical trials have ranged from 30 mg to 60 mg two times daily. The maximum blood pressure lowering effect at steady-state is sustained from 2 hours until 6 hours after dosing.

When initiating therapy or upon increasing dose, blood pressure should be measured 2 to 4 hours after the first dose or dose increase, as well as at the end of a dosing interval.

The total daily dose of immediate release nicardipine (CARDENE) may not be a useful guide to judging the effective dose of CARDENE SR. Patients currently receiving immediate release nicardipine may be titrated with CARDENE SR starting at their current total daily dose of immediate release nicardipine and then reexamined to assess the adequacy of blood pressure control.

Concomitant Use With Other Antihypertensive Agents:
: CARDENE may be safely coadministered with thiazide diuretics. Diuretics : CARDENE may be safely coadministered with beta-blockers (see ). Beta-BlockersDrug Interactions
Special Patient Populations

Although there is no evidence that CARDENE SR impairs renal function, careful dose titration beginning with 30-mg CARDENE SR bid is advised (see ). Renal Insufficiency:PRECAUTIONS

CARDENE SR has not been studied in patients with severe liver impairment (see ). Hepatic Insufficiency:PRECAUTIONS

Caution is advised when titrating CARDENE SR dosage in patients with congestive heart failure (see ). Congestive Heart Failure:WARNINGS
Metronidazole

Metronidazole

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Clemastine Fumarate

Clemastine Fumarate

adults and children 12 years and older:

1 tablet every 12 hours; not more than 2 tablets in 24 hours

children under 12 years:

ask a doctor
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

General

Because of the variable bioavailability of propranolol, the dose should be individualized based on response.

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride twice daily, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. Dosage may be increased gradually until adequate blood pressure control is achieved. The usual maintenance dosage is 120 mg to 240 mg per day. In some instances a dosage of 640 mg a day may be required. The time needed for full antihypertensive response to a given dosage is variable and may range from a few days to several weeks.

While twice-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, some patients, especially when lower doses are used, may experience a modest rise in blood pressure toward the end of the 12-hour dosing interval. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. If control is not adequate, a larger dose, or 3-times-daily therapy may achieve better control.

Angina Pectoris

Total daily doses of 80 mg to 320 mg propranolol hydrochloride when administered orally, twice a day, three times a day, or four times a day, have been shown to increase exercise tolerance and to reduce ischemic changes in the ECG. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce dosage gradually over a period of several weeks. (See ) WARNINGS

Atrial Fibrillation

The recommended dose is 10 mg to 30 mg propranolol hydrochloride three or four times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Myocardial Infarction

In the Beta-Blocker Heart Attack Trial (BHAT), the initial dose was 40 mg t.i.d., with titration after 1- month to 60 mg to 80 mg t.i.d. as tolerated. The recommended daily dosage is 180 mg to 240 mg propranolol hydrochloride per day in divided doses. Although a t.i.d. regimen was used in BHAT and a q.i.d. regimen in the Norwegian Multicenter Trial, there is a reasonable basis for the use of either a t.i.d. or b.i.d. regimen (see The effectiveness and safety of daily dosages greater than 240 mg for prevention of cardiac mortality have not been established. However, higher dosages may be needed to effectively treat coexisting diseases such as angina or hypertension (see above). ). PHARMACODYNAMICS AND CLINICAL EFFECTS

Migraine

The initial dose is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride daily in divided doses. The usual effective dose range is 160 mg to 240 mg per day. The dosage may be increased gradually to achieve optimum migraine prophylaxis. If a satisfactory response is not obtained within four to six weeks after reaching the maximum dose, propranolol hydrochloride therapy should be discontinued. It may be advisable to withdraw the drug gradually over a period of several weeks.

Essential Tremor

The initial dosage is 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride twice daily. Optimum reduction of essential tremor is usually achieved with a dose of 120 mg per day. Occasionally, it may be necessary to administer 240 mg to 320 mg per day.

Hypertrophic Subaortic Stenosis

The usual dosage is 20 mg to 40 mg propranolol hydrochloride three or four times daily before meals and at bedtime.

Pheochromocytoma

The usual dosage is 60 mg propranolol hydrochloride daily in divided doses for three days prior to surgery as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade. For the management of inoperable tumors, the usual dosage is 30 mg daily in divided doses as adjunctive therapy to alpha-adrenergic blockade.
Danazol

Danazol

Endometriosis

In moderate to severe disease, or in patients infertile due to endometriosis, a starting dose of 800 mg given in two divided doses is recommended. Amenorrhea and rapid response to painful symptoms is best achieved at this dosage level. Gradual downward titration to a dose sufficient to maintain amenorrhea may be considered depending upon patient response. For mild cases, an initial daily dose of 200 mg to 400 mg given in two divided doses is recommended and may be adjusted depending on patient response. After termination of therapy, if symptoms recur, treatment can be reinstituted. Therapy should begin during menstruation. Otherwise, appropriate tests should be performed to ensure that the patient is not pregnant while on therapy with danazol (see and ). It is essential that therapy continue uninterrupted for 3 to 6 months but may be extended to 9 months if necessary. CONTRAINDICATIONSWARNINGS

Fibrocystic Breast Disease

The total daily dosage of danazol for fibrocystic breast disease ranges from 100 mg to 400 mg given in two divided doses depending upon patient response. A nonhormonal method of contraception is recommended when danazol is administered at this dose, since ovulation may not be suppressed. Therapy should begin during menstruation. Otherwise, appropriate tests should be performed to ensure that the patient is not pregnant while on therapy with danazol.

In most instances, breast pain and tenderness are significantly relieved by the first month and eliminated in 2 to 3 months. Usually elimination of nodularity requires 4 to 6 months of uninterrupted therapy. Regular menstrual patterns, irregular menstrual patterns, and amenorrhea each occur in approximately one-third of patients treated with 100 mg of danazol. Irregular menstrual patterns and amenorrhea are observed more frequently with higher doses. Clinical studies have demonstrated that 50% of patients may show evidence of recurrence of symptoms within one year. In this event, treatment may be reinstated.

Hereditary Angioedema

The dosage requirements for continuous treatment of hereditary angioedema with danazol should be individualized on the basis of the clinical response of the patient. It is recommended that the patient be started on 200 mg, two or three times a day. After a favorable initial response is obtained in terms of prevention of episodes of edematous attacks, the proper continuing dosage should be determined by decreasing the dosage by 50% or less at intervals of one to three months or longer if frequency of attacks prior to treatment dictates. If an attack occurs, the daily dosage may be increased by up to 200 mg. During the dose adjusting phase, close monitoring of the patient's response is indicated, particularly if the patient has a history of airway involvement.
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under , multiple studies with isosorbide dinitrate and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets (oral) must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release ISDN, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

As also noted under , the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate oral tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate tablets (oral) is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Mexiletine Hydrochlorid...

Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The dosage of mexiletine hydrochloride must be individualized on the basis of response and tolerance, both of which are dose-related. Administration with food or antacid is recommended. Initiate mexiletine therapy with 200 mg every eight hours when rapid control of arrhythmia is not essential. A minimum of two to three days between dose adjustments is recommended. Dose may be adjusted in 50 or 100 mg increments up or down.

As with any antiarrhythmic drug, clinical and electrocardiographic evaluation (including Holter monitoring if necessary for evaluation) are needed to determine whether the desired antiarrhythmic effect has been obtained and to guide titration and dose adjustment.

Satisfactory control can be achieved in most patients by 200 to 300 mg given every eight hours with food or antacid. If satisfactory response has not been achieved at 300 mg q8h, and the patient tolerates mexiletine well, a dose of 400 mg q8h may be tried. As the severity of CNS side effects increases with total daily dose, the dose should not exceed 1200 mg/day.

In general, patients with renal failure will require the usual doses of mexiletine hydrochloride. Patients with severe liver disease, however, may require lower doses and must be monitored closely. Similarly, marked right-sided congestive heart failure can reduce hepatic metabolism and reduce the needed dose. Plasma level may also be affected by certain concomitant drugs (see , ). PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Loading Dose

When rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 400 mg of mexiletine hydrochloride may be administered, followed by a 200 mg dose in eight hours. Onset of therapeutic effect is usually observed within 30 minutes to two hours.

Q12H Dosage Schedule

Some patients responding to mexiletine may be transferred to a 12 hour dosage schedule to improve convenience and compliance. If adequate suppression is achieved on a mexiletine hydrochloride dose of 300 mg or less every eight hours, the same total daily dose may be given in divided doses every 12 hours while carefully monitoring the degree of suppression of ventricular ectopy. This dose may be adjusted up to a maximum of 450 mg every 12 hours to achieve the desired response.

Transferring to Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The following dosage schedule, based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data, is suggested for transferring patients from other Class I oral antiarrhythmic agents to mexiletine: mexiletine hydrochloride treatment may be initiated with a 200 mg dose, and titrated to response as described above, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate, 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of disopryramide or 8 to 12 hours after the last dose of tocainide.

In patients in whom withdrawal of the previous antiarrhythmic agent is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, hospitalization of the patient is recommended.

When transferring from lidocaine to mexiletine, the lidocaine infusion should be stopped when the first oral dose of mexiletine hydrochloride is administered. The infusion line should be left open until suppression of the arrhythmia appears to be satisfactorily maintained. Consideration should be given to the similarity of the adverse effects of lidocaine and mexiletine and the possibility that they may be additive.
Phenazopyridine Hydroch...

Phenazopyridine Hydrochloride

100 mg Tablets: Average adult dosage is two tablets 3 times a day after meals.

200 mg Tablets: Average adult dosage is one tablet 3 times a day after meals.

When used concomitantly with an antibacterial agent for the treatment of a urinary tract infection, the administration of Phenazopyridine HCl should not exceed 2 days.
Cyproheptadine Hydrochl...

Cyproheptadine Hydrochloride

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

Each tablet contains 4 mg of cyproheptadine hydrochloride.

The total daily dosage for pediatric patients may be calculated on the basis of body weight or body area using approximately 0.25 mg/kg/day or 8 mg per square meter of body surface (8 mg/m2). Pediatric Patients: Age 2 to 6 years:

The usual dose is 2 mg (1⁄2 tablet) two or three times a day, adjusted as necessary to the size and response of the patient. The dose is not to exceed 12 mg a day.

The usual dose is 4 mg (1 tablet) two or three times a day adjusted as necessary to the size and response of the patient. The dose is not to exceed 16 mg a day. Age 7 to 14 years:

The total daily dose for adults should not exceed 0.5 mg/kg/day. The therapeutic range is 4 to 20 mg a day, with the majority of patients requiring 12 to 16 mg a day. An occasional patient may require as much as 32 mg a day for adequate relief. It is suggested that dosage be initiated with 4 mg (1 tablet) three times a day and adjusted according to the size and response of the patient. Adults:
Rifampin

Rifampin

Rifampin can be administered by the oral route (see ). INDICATIONS AND USAGE

See for dosing information in patients with renal failure. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Tuberculosis

Adults: 10 mg/kg, in a single daily administration, not to exceed 600 mg/day.

Pediatric Patients: 10-20 mg/kg, not to exceed 600 mg/day.

It is recommended that oral rifampin be administered once daily, either 1 hour before or 2 hours after a meal with a full glass of water.

Rifampin is indicated in the treatment of all forms of tuberculosis. A three-drug regimen consisting of rifampin, isoniazid, and pyrazinamide (RIFATER manufactured by sanofi-aventisU.S. LLC) is recommended in the initial phase of short-course therapy which is usually continued for 2 months. The Advisory Council for the Elimination of Tuberculosis, the American Thoracic Society, and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention recommend that either streptomycin or ethambutol be added as a fourth drug in a regimen containing isoniazid (INH), rifampin and pyrazinamide for initial treatment of tuberculosis unless the likelihood of INH resistance is very low. The need for a fourth drug should be reassessed when the results of susceptibility testing are known. If community rates of INH resistance are currently less than 4%, an initial treatment regimen with less than four drugs may be considered. ®

Following the initial phase, treatment should be continued with rifampin and isoniazid (RIFAMATE manufactured by sanofi-aventis U.S. LLC) for at least 4 months. Treatment should be continued for longer if the patient is still sputum or culture positive, if resistant organisms are present, or if the patient is HIV positive. ®

Meningococcal Carriers

Adults: For adults, it is recommended that 600 mg rifampin be administered twice daily for two days.

Pediatric Patients: Pediatric patients 1 month of age or older: 10 mg/kg (not to exceed 600 mg per dose) every 12 hours for two days.

Pediatric patients under 1 month of age: 5 mg/kg every 12 hours for two days.

Preparation of Extemporaneous Oral Suspension

For pediatric and adult patients in whom capsule swallowing is difficult or where lower doses are needed, a liquid suspension may be prepared as follows:

Rifampin 1% w/v suspension (10 mg/mL) can be compounded using Simple Syrup (Syrup NF):

1. Empty the contents of four Rifampin 300 mg capsules or eight Rifampin 150 mg capsules onto a piece of weighing paper.

2. If necessary, gently crush the capsule contents with a spatula to produce a fine powder.

3. Transfer the rifampin powder blend to a 4-ounce amber glass or plastic (high density polyethylene [HDPE], polypropylene, or polycarbonate) prescription bottle.

4. Rinse the paper and spatula with 20 mL of syrup, and add the rinse to the bottle. Shake vigorously.

5. Add 100 mL of syrup to the bottle and shake vigorously.

This compounding procedure results in a 1% w/v suspension containing 10 mg rifampin/mL. Stability studies indicate that the suspension is stable when stored at room temperature (25 ± 3°C) or in a refrigerator (2-8°C) for four weeks. This extemporaneously prepared suspension must be shaken well prior to administration.
Dibasic Sodium Phosphat...

Dibasic Sodium Phosphate

PHOSPHA 250 NEUTRAL tablets should be taken with a full glass of water, with meals and at bedtime. TM

One or two tablets, four times daily; Adults:

One tablet four times daily. Pediatric patients over 4 years of age:

Use only as directed by physician. Pediatric Patients under 4 years of age:
Ranitidine

Ranitidine

The current recommended adult dosage of Ranitidine Tablets, USP for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see ). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150-mg dose. Active Duodenal Ulcer:Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime. Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers:

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome):

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. In some patients it may be necessary to administer Ranitidine Tablets, USP 150-mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. Benign Gastric Ulcer:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime. Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. GERD:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg four times a day. Erosive Esophagitis:

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis:

The safety and effectiveness of Ranitidine Tablets, USP have been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of Ranitidine Tablets, USP in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations. Pediatric Use:

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications.

The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients. Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers:

The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients. Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers:

Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg per day, usually given as two divided doses. Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis:

On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with Ranitidine Tablets, USP, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg every 24 hours. Should the patient's condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis. Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function:

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see and ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: GeriatricsPRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use
Quinapril Hydrochloride...

Quinapril Hydrochloride

Hypertension

Monotherapy

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets in patients not on diuretics is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response measured at peak (2–6 hours after dosing) and trough (predosing). Generally, dosage adjustments should be made at intervals of at least 2 weeks. Most patients have required dosages of 20, 40, or 80 mg/day, given as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients an increase in dosage or twice daily administration may be warranted. In general, doses of 40–80 mg and divided doses give a somewhat greater effect at the end of the dosing interval.

Concomitant Diuretics

If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with quinapril hydrochloride monotherapy, a diuretic may be added. In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued 2 to 3 days prior to beginning therapy with quinapril hydrochloride tablets (see ). Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with quinapril hydrochloride tablets alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. WARNINGS

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg quinapril hydrochloride should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours and until blood pressure has stabilized.

The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response (see , , and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Renal Impairment

Kinetic data indicate that the apparent elimination half-life of quinaprilat increases as creatinine clearance decreases. Recommended starting doses, based on clinical and pharmacokinetic data from patients with renal impairment, are as follows:
Creatinine Clearance Maximum Recommended Initial Dose >60 mL/min 10 mg 30–60 mL/min 5 mg 10–30 mL/min 2.5 mg <10 mL/min Insufficient data for dosage recommendation
Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimal response.

Elderly (≥65 years)

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets in elderly patients is 10 mg given once daily followed by titration (as described above) to the optimal response.

Heart Failure

Quinapril hydrochloride tablets are indicated as adjunctive therapy when added to conventional therapy including diuretics and/or digitalis. The recommended starting dose is 5 mg twice daily. This dose may improve symptoms of heart failure, but increases in exercise duration have generally required higher doses. Therefore, if the initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets is well tolerated, patients should then be titrated at weekly intervals until an effective dose, usually 20 to 40 mg daily given in two equally divided doses, is reached or undesirable hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia (see ) prohibit reaching this dose. WARNINGS

Following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours for the presence of hypotension or orthostatis and, if present, until blood pressure stabilizes. The appearance of hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia early in dose titration should not preclude further careful dose titration. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics.

DOSE ADJUSTMENTS IN PATIENTS WITH HEART FAILURE AND RENAL IMPAIRMENT OR HYPONATREMIA

Pharmacokinetic data indicate that quinapril elimination is dependent on level of renal function. In patients with heart failure and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance above 30 mL/min and 2.5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance of 10 to 30 mL/min. There is insufficient data for dosage recommendation in patients with a creatinine clearance less than 10 mL/min (see , , and ). DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart FailureWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions

If the initial dose is well tolerated, quinapril hydrochloride tablets may be administered the following day as a twice daily regimen. In the absence of excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function, the dose may be increased at weekly intervals based on clinical and hemodynamic response.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, usual starting doses are 120 to 240 mg once daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 120 to 540 mg once daily. Current clinical experience with 540 mg dose is limited; however, the dose may be increased to 540 mg once daily. Hypertension.

Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg to 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 540 mg once daily. When necessary, titration should be carried out over 7 to 14 days. Angina.

Concomitant use with Other Cardiovascular Agents.

May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride therapy. 1.Sublingual Nitroglycerin (NTG).

. Diltiazem hydrochloride may be safely co-administered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 2Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy.

(See and .) 3.Beta-blockersWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Diltiazem hydrochloride has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other. 4.Antihypertensives.

Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the capsule contents. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any capsule contents/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules is not recommended.
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under “ ” multiple-dose studies with ISDN and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for Isosorbide Dinitrate Extended-release Tablets must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release ISDN, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long. The necessary dose- free interval for Isosorbide Dinitrate Extended-release Tablets has not been clearly identified, but is presumably somewhat longer. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

As also noted under “ , only one trial has ever studied the use of controlled-release isosorbide dinitrate for more than one dose. In that trial, 40 mg of a different formulation of controlled-release ISDN was administered twice daily in doses given 6 hours apart. After 4 weeks, active treatment could not be distinguished from placebo. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY”

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with Isosorbide Dinitrate Extended-release Tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

In clinical trials, immediate-release oral isosorbide dinitrate has been administered in a variety of regimens, with total daily doses ranging from 30 mg to 480 mg.
Nitro-time

Nitro-time

As noted above ( ) careful studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels of nitroglycerin results in tolerance (i.e., loss of clinical response). Every dosing regimen for Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should provide a daily nitrate-free interval to avoid the development of this tolerance. The minimum necessary length of such an interval has not been defined, but studies with other nitroglycerin formulations have shown that 10 to 12 hours is sufficient. Large controlled studies with other formulations of nitroglycerin show that no dosing regimen with Nitroglycerin Extended-Release Capsules should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The pharmacokinetics of Nitroglycerin capsules, and the clinical effects of multiple-dose regimens, have not been well studied. In clinical trials, the initial regimen of Nitroglycerin has been 2.5 to 6.5 mg three to four times a day, with subsequent upward dose adjustment guided by symptoms and side effects. In one trial, 5 of the 18 subjects were titrated up to a dose of 26 mg four times a day.
Quinapril Hydrochloride...

Quinapril Hydrochloride

Hypertension

Monotherapy

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets in patients not on diuretics is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response measured at peak (2–6 hours after dosing) and trough (predosing). Generally, dosage adjustments should be made at intervals of at least 2 weeks. Most patients have required dosages of 20, 40, or 80 mg/day, given as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients an increase in dosage or twice daily administration may be warranted. In general, doses of 40–80 mg and divided doses give a somewhat greater effect at the end of the dosing interval.

Concomitant Diuretics

If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with quinapril hydrochloride monotherapy, a diuretic may be added. In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued 2 to 3 days prior to beginning therapy with quinapril hydrochloride tablets (see ). Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with quinapril hydrochloride tablets alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. WARNINGS

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg quinapril hydrochloride should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours and until blood pressure has stabilized.

The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response (see , , and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Renal Impairment

Kinetic data indicate that the apparent elimination half-life of quinaprilat increases as creatinine clearance decreases. Recommended starting doses, based on clinical and pharmacokinetic data from patients with renal impairment, are as follows:
Creatinine Clearance Maximum Recommended Initial Dose >60 mL/min 10 mg 30–60 mL/min 5 mg 10–30 mL/min 2.5 mg <10 mL/min Insufficient data for dosage recommendation
Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimal response.

Elderly (≥65 years)

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets in elderly patients is 10 mg given once daily followed by titration (as described above) to the optimal response.

Heart Failure

Quinapril hydrochloride tablets are indicated as adjunctive therapy when added to conventional therapy including diuretics and/or digitalis. The recommended starting dose is 5 mg twice daily. This dose may improve symptoms of heart failure, but increases in exercise duration have generally required higher doses. Therefore, if the initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets is well tolerated, patients should then be titrated at weekly intervals until an effective dose, usually 20 to 40 mg daily given in two equally divided doses, is reached or undesirable hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia (see ) prohibit reaching this dose. WARNINGS

Following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours for the presence of hypotension or orthostatis and, if present, until blood pressure stabilizes. The appearance of hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia early in dose titration should not preclude further careful dose titration. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics.

DOSE ADJUSTMENTS IN PATIENTS WITH HEART FAILURE AND RENAL IMPAIRMENT OR HYPONATREMIA

Pharmacokinetic data indicate that quinapril elimination is dependent on level of renal function. In patients with heart failure and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance above 30 mL/min and 2.5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance of 10 to 30 mL/min. There is insufficient data for dosage recommendation in patients with a creatinine clearance less than 10 mL/min (see , , and ). DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart FailureWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions

If the initial dose is well tolerated, quinapril hydrochloride tablets may be administered the following day as a twice daily regimen. In the absence of excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function, the dose may be increased at weekly intervals based on clinical and hemodynamic response.
Salsalate

Salsalate

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Salsalate tablet, USP and other treatment options before deciding to use Salsalate tablet, USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with Salsalate tablet, USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs. Salsalate is indicated for relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis and related rheumatic disorder.

The usual dosage is 3000 mg daily, given in divided doses as follows: Adults:

1) two doses of two 750 mg tablets; 2) two doses of three 500 mg tablets; or 3) three doses of two 500 mg tablets. Some patients, e.g., the elderly, may require a lower dosage to achieve therapeutic blood concentrations and to avoid the more common side effects such as auditory.

Alleviation of symptoms is gradual, and full benefit may not be evident for 3 to 4 days, when plasma salicylate levels have achieved steady state. There is no evidence for development of tissue tolerance (tachyphylaxis), but salicylate therapy may induce increased activity of metabolizing liver enzymes, causing a greater rate of salicyluric acid production and excretion, with a resultant increase in dosage requirement for maintenance of therapeutic serum salicylate levels.

Dosage recommendations and indications for salsalate use in children have not been established. Children:
Minocycline Hydrochlori...

Minocycline Hydrochloride

THE USUAL DOSAGE AND FREQUENCY OF ADMINISTRATION OF MINOCYCLINE DIFFERS FROM THAT OF THE OTHER TETRACYCLINES. EXCEEDING THE RECOMMENDED DOSAGE MAY RESULT IN AN INCREASED INCIDENCE OF SIDE EFFECTS.

Minocycline hydrochloride capsules may be taken with or without food. (See .) CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Ingestion of adequate amounts of fluids along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration. The capsules should be swallowed whole.

For Pediatric Patients Above 8 Years of Age

Usual pediatric dose: 4 mg/kg initially followed by 2 mg/kg every 12 hours, not to exceed the usual adult dose.

Adults

The usual dosage of minocycline hydrochloride is 200 mg initially followed by 100 mg every 12 hours. Alternatively, if more frequent doses are preferred, two or four 50 mg capsules may be given initially followed by one 50 mg capsule 4 times daily.

Uncomplicated gonococcal infections other than urethritis and anorectal infections in men: 200 mg initially, followed by 100 mg every 12 hours for a minimum of 4 days, with post-therapy cultures within 2 to 3 days.

In the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal urethritis in men, 100 mg every 12 hours for 5 days is recommended.

For the treatment of syphilis, the usual dosage of minocycline hydrochloride should be administered over a period of 10 to 15 days. Close follow-up, including laboratory tests, is recommended.

In the treatment of meningococcal carrier state, the recommended dosage is 100 mg every 12 hours for 5 days.

infections: Although optimal doses have not been established, 100 mg every 12 hours for 6 to 8 weeks have been used successfully in a limited number of cases. Mycobacterium marinum

Uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infection in adults caused by or 100 mg orally, every 12 hours for at least 7 days. Chlamydia trachomatisUreaplasma urealyticum:

Ingestion of adequate amounts of fluids along with capsule and tablet forms of drugs in the tetracycline-class is recommended to reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration.

The pharmacokinetics of minocycline in patients with renal impairment (CL CR <80 mL/min) have not been fully characterized. Current data are insufficient to determine if a dosage adjustment is warranted. The total daily dosage should not exceed 200 mg in 24 hours. However, due to the anti-anabolic effect of tetracyclines, BUN and creatinine should be monitored. (See .) WARNINGS
Thiothixene

Thiothixene

Dosage of thiothixene capsules should be individually adjusted depending on the chronicity and severity of the symptoms of schizophrenia. In general, small doses should be used initially and gradually increased to the optimal effective level, based on patient response.

Some patients have been successfully maintained on once a day thiothixene capsule therapy.

The use of thiothixene capsules in children under 12 years of age is not recommended because safe conditions for its use have not been established.

In milder conditions, an initial dose of 2 mg three times daily is recommended. If indicated, a subsequent increase to 15 mg/day total daily dose is often effective.

In more severe conditions, an initial dose of 5 mg twice daily is recommended.

The usual optimal dose is 20 mg to 30 mg daily. If indicated, an increase to 60 mg/day total daily dose is often effective. Exceeding a total daily dose of 60 mg rarely increases the beneficial response.
Quinidine Sulfate

Quinidine Sulfate

Treatment of P. falciparum malaria

Quinidine sulfate tablets are used in one of the approved regimens for the treatment of life-threatening malaria. The central component of the regimen is Quinidine Gluconate Injection, and the regimen is described in the package insert of Quinidine Gluconate Injection. P. falciparum

Conversion of atrial fibrillation/flutter to sinus rhythm

Especially in patients with known structural heart disease or other risk factors for toxicity, initiation or dose-adjustment of treatment with quinidine sulfate should generally be performed in a setting where facilities and personnel for monitoring and resuscitation are continuously available. Patients with symptomatic atrial fibrillation/flutter should be treated with quinidine sulfate only after ventricular rate control ( with digitalis or ß-blockers) has failed to provide satisfactory control of symptoms. e.g.,

Adequate trials have not identified an optimal regimen of quinidine sulfate for conversion of atrial fibrillation/flutter to sinus rhythm. In one reported regimen, the patient first receives two tablets (400 mg; 332 mg of quinidine base) of quinidine sulfate every six hours. If this regimen has not resulted in conversion after 4 or 5 doses, then the dose is cautiously increased. If, at any point during administration, the QRS complex widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration; the QT interval widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration and is then longer than 500 ms; P waves disappear; or the patient develops significant tachycardia, symptomatic bradycardia, or hypotension, then quinidine sulfate is discontinued, and other means of conversion ( direct-current cardioversion) are considered. Ce.g.,

Reduction of frequency of release into atrial fibrillation/flutter

In a patient with a history of frequent symptomatic episodes of atrial fibrillation/flutter, the goal of therapy with quinidine sulfate should be an increase in the average time between episodes. In most patients, the tachyarrhythmia during therapy with quinidine sulfate, and a single recurrence should not be interpreted as therapeutic failure. will recur

Especially in patients with known structural heart disease or other risk factors for toxicity, initiation or dose-adjustment of treatment with quinidine sulfate should generally be performed in a setting where facilities and personnel for monitoring and resuscitation are continuously available. Monitoring should be continued for two or three days after initiation of the regimen on which the patient will be discharged.

Therapy with quinidine sulfate should be begun with 200 mg (equivalent to 166 mg of quinidine base) every six hours. If this regimen is well tolerated, if the serum quinidine level is still well within the laboratory’s therapeutic range, and if the average time between arrhythmic episodes has not been satisfactorily increased, then the dose may be cautiously raised. The total daily dosage should be reduced if the QRS complex widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration; the QT interval widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration and is then longer than 500 ms; P waves disappear; or the patient develops significant tachycardia, symptomatic bradycardia, or hypotension. C

Suppression of ventricular arrhythmias

Dosing regimens for the use of quinidine sulfate in suppressing life-threatening ventricular arrhythmias have not been adequately studied. Described regimens have generally been similar to the regimen described just above for the prophylaxis of symptomatic atrial fibrillation/flutter. Where possible, therapy should be guided by the results of programmed electrical stimulation and/or Holter monitoring with exercise.
Quinapril Hydrochloride...

Quinapril Hydrochloride

Hypertension

Monotherapy

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets in patients not on diuretics is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response measured at peak (2–6 hours after dosing) and trough (predosing). Generally, dosage adjustments should be made at intervals of at least 2 weeks. Most patients have required dosages of 20, 40, or 80 mg/day, given as a single dose or in two equally divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients an increase in dosage or twice daily administration may be warranted. In general, doses of 40–80 mg and divided doses give a somewhat greater effect at the end of the dosing interval.

Concomitant Diuretics

If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with quinapril hydrochloride monotherapy, a diuretic may be added. In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued 2 to 3 days prior to beginning therapy with quinapril hydrochloride tablets (see ). Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with quinapril hydrochloride tablets alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. WARNINGS

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg quinapril hydrochloride should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours and until blood pressure has stabilized.

The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response (see , , and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Renal Impairment

Kinetic data indicate that the apparent elimination half-life of quinaprilat increases as creatinine clearance decreases. Recommended starting doses, based on clinical and pharmacokinetic data from patients with renal impairment, are as follows:
Creatinine Clearance Maximum Recommended Initial Dose >60 mL/min 10 mg 30–60 mL/min 5 mg 10–30 mL/min 2.5 mg <10 mL/min Insufficient data for dosage recommendation
Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimal response.

Elderly (≥65 years)

The recommended initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets in elderly patients is 10 mg given once daily followed by titration (as described above) to the optimal response.

Heart Failure

Quinapril hydrochloride tablets are indicated as adjunctive therapy when added to conventional therapy including diuretics and/or digitalis. The recommended starting dose is 5 mg twice daily. This dose may improve symptoms of heart failure, but increases in exercise duration have generally required higher doses. Therefore, if the initial dosage of quinapril hydrochloride tablets is well tolerated, patients should then be titrated at weekly intervals until an effective dose, usually 20 to 40 mg daily given in two equally divided doses, is reached or undesirable hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia (see ) prohibit reaching this dose. WARNINGS

Following the initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least two hours for the presence of hypotension or orthostatis and, if present, until blood pressure stabilizes. The appearance of hypotension, orthostatis, or azotemia early in dose titration should not preclude further careful dose titration. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics.

DOSE ADJUSTMENTS IN PATIENTS WITH HEART FAILURE AND RENAL IMPAIRMENT OR HYPONATREMIA

Pharmacokinetic data indicate that quinapril elimination is dependent on level of renal function. In patients with heart failure and renal impairment, the recommended initial dose of quinapril hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance above 30 mL/min and 2.5 mg in patients with a creatinine clearance of 10 to 30 mL/min. There is insufficient data for dosage recommendation in patients with a creatinine clearance less than 10 mL/min (see , , and ). DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart FailureWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions

If the initial dose is well tolerated, quinapril hydrochloride tablets may be administered the following day as a twice daily regimen. In the absence of excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function, the dose may be increased at weekly intervals based on clinical and hemodynamic response.
Pramipexole Dihydrochlo...

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are taken orally, with or without food.

If a significant interruption in therapy with pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets have occurred, re-titration of therapy may be warranted.

2.2 Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level to avoid intolerable adverse effects and orthostatic hypotension. Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets should be titrated gradually in all patients. The dose should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of dyskinesia, hallucinations, somnolence, and dry mouth.

Dosing in Patients with Normal Renal Function

Initial Treatment

Doses should be increased gradually from a starting dose of 0.375 mg/day given in three divided doses and should not be increased more frequently than every 5 to 7 days. A suggested ascending dosage schedule that was used in clinical studies is shown in the following table:
Table 1 Ascending Dosage Schedule of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets for Parkinson’s Disease Week Dosage (mg) Total Daily Dose (mg) 1 0.125 TID 0.375 2 0.25 TID 0.75 3 0.5 TID 1.50 4 0.75 TID 2.25 5 1 TID 3.0 6 1.25 TID 3.75 7 1.5 TID 4.50
Maintenance Treatment

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets were effective and well tolerated over a dosage range of 1.5 to 4.5 mg/day administered in equally divided doses three times per day with or without concomitant levodopa (approximately 800 mg/day).

In a fixed-dose study in early Parkinson's disease patients, doses of 3 mg, 4.5 mg, and 6 mg per day of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were not shown to provide any significant benefit beyond that achieved at a daily dose of 1.5 mg/day. However, in the same fixed-dose study, the following adverse events were dose related: postural hypotension, nausea, constipation, somnolence, and amnesia. The frequency of these events was generally 2-fold greater than placebo for pramipexole doses greater than 3 mg/day. The incidence of somnolence reported with pramipexole at a dose of 1.5 mg/day was comparable to placebo.

When pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are used in combination with levodopa, a reduction of the levodopa dosage should be considered. In a controlled study in advanced Parkinson's disease, the dosage of levodopa was reduced by an average of 27% from baseline.

Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment
Table 2 Dosing of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets in Parkinson’s Disease Patients with Renal Impairment Renal Status Starting Dose (mg) Maximum Dose (mg) Normal to mild impairment (creatinine Cl > 50 mL/min) 0.125 TID 1.5 TID Moderate impairment (creatinine Cl = 30 to 50 mL/min) 0.125 BID 0.75 TID Severe impairment (creatinine Cl = 15 to <30 mL/min) 0.125 QD 1.5 QD Very severe impairment (creatinine Cl < 15 mL/min and hemodialysis patients) The use of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets not been adequately studied in this group of patients.
Discontinuation of Treatment

Pramipexole dihydrochloride Tablets should be tapered off at a rate of 0.75 mg per day until the daily dose has been reduced to 0.75 mg. Thereafter, the dose should be reduced by 0.375 mg per day. In some studies, however, abrupt discontinuation was uneventful.
Niaspan

Niaspan

NIASPAN should be taken at bedtime, after a low-fat snack, and doses should be individualized according to patient response. Therapy with NIASPAN must be initiated at 500 mg at bedtime in order to reduce the incidence and severity of side effects which may occur during early therapy. The recommended dose escalation is shown in below. Table 1
Table 1. Recommended Dosing Week(s) Daily dose NIASPAN Dosage INITIAL TITRATION 1 to 4 500 mg 1 NIASPAN 500 mg tablet at bedtime SCHEDULE 5 to 8 1000 mg 1 NIASPAN 1000 mg tablet or 2 NIASPAN 500 mg tablets at bedtime * 1500 mg 2 NIASPAN 750 mg tablets or 3 NIASPAN 500 mg tablets at bedtime * 2000 mg 2 NIASPAN 1000 mg tablets or 4 NIASPAN 500 mg tablets at bedtime * After Week 8, titrate to patient response and tolerance. If response to 1000 mg daily is inadequate, increase dose to 1500 mg daily; may subsequently increase dose to 2000 mg daily. Daily dose should not be increased more than 500 mg in a 4-week period, and doses above 2000 mg daily are not recommended. Women may respond at lower doses than men.
Maintenance Dose

The daily dosage of NIASPAN should not be increased by more than 500 mg in any 4-week period. The recommended maintenance dose is 1000 mg (two 500 mg tablets or one 1000 mg tablet) to 2000 mg (two 1000 mg tablets or four 500 mg tablets) once daily at bedtime. Doses greater than 2000 mg daily are not recommended. Women may respond at lower NIASPAN doses than men . [see Clinical Studies ] (14.2)

Single-dose bioavailability studies have demonstrated that two of the 500 mg and one of the 1000 mg tablet strengths are interchangeable but three of the 500 mg and two of the 750 mg tablet strengths are not interchangeable.

If lipid response to NIASPAN alone is insufficient or if higher doses of NIASPAN are not well tolerated, some patients may benefit from combination therapy with a bile acid binding resin or statin , below and . [see Drug Interactions (7.3)Concomitant TherapyClinical Studies , ] (14.314.4)

Flushing of the skin may be reduced in frequency or severity by pretreatment with aspirin (up to the recommended dose of 325 mg taken 30 minutes prior to NIASPAN dose). Tolerance to this flushing develops rapidly over the course of several weeks. Flushing, pruritus, and gastrointestinal distress are also greatly reduced by slowly increasing the dose of niacin and avoiding administration on an empty stomach. Concomitant alcoholic, hot drinks or spicy foods may increase the side effects of flushing and pruritus and should be avoided around the time of NIASPAN ingestion. [see Adverse Reactions ] (6.1)

Equivalent doses of NIASPAN should not be substituted for sustained-release (modified-release, timed-release) niacin preparations or immediate-release (crystalline) niacin . Patients previously receiving other niacin products should be started with the recommended NIASPAN titration schedule (see ), and the dose should subsequently be individualized based on patient response. [see Warnings and Precautions ] (5)Table 1

If NIASPAN therapy is discontinued for an extended period, reinstitution of therapy should include a titration phase (see ). Table 1

NIASPAN tablets should be taken whole and should not be broken, crushed or chewed before swallowing.

Concomitant Therapy

Concomitant Therapy with Lovastatin or Simvastatin

Patients already receiving a stable dose of lovastatin or simvastatin who require further TG-lowering or HDL-raising (e.g., to achieve NCEP non-HDL-C goals), may receive concomitant dosage titration with NIASPAN per NIASPAN recommended initial titration schedule . For patients already receiving a stable dose of NIASPAN who require further LDL-lowering (e.g., to achieve NCEP LDL-C goals), the usual recommended starting dose of lovastatin and simvastatin is 20 mg once a day. Dose adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more. Combination therapy with NIASPAN and lovastatin or NIASPAN and simvastatin should not exceed doses of 2000 mg NIASPAN and 40 mg lovastatin or simvastatin daily. [see Dosage and Administration ] (2)

Dosage in Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

Use of NIASPAN in patients with renal or hepatic impairment has not been studied. NIASPAN is contraindicated in patients with significant or unexplained hepatic dysfunction. NIASPAN should be used with caution in patients with renal impairment . [see Warnings and Precautions ] (5)
Atacand

Atacand

2.1 Adult Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. Blood pressure response is dose related over the range of 2 to 32 mg. The usual recommended starting dose of ATACAND is 16 mg once daily when it is used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume depleted. ATACAND can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 8 mg to 32 mg. Larger doses do not appear to have a greater effect, and there is relatively little experience with such doses. Most of the antihypertensive effect is present within 2 weeks, and maximal blood pressure reduction is generally obtained within 4 to 6 weeks of treatment with ATACAND.

Use in Hepatic Impairment: Initiate with 8 mg ATACAND in patients with moderate hepatic insufficiency. Dosing recommendations cannot be provided for patients with severe hepatic insufficiency [ ]. see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)

ATACAND may be administered with or without food.

If blood pressure is not controlled by ATACAND alone, a diuretic may be added. ATACAND may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension 1 to < 17 Years of age

ATACAND may be administered once daily or divided into two equal doses. Adjust the dosage according to blood pressure response. For patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, particularly those with impaired renal function), initiate ATACAND under close medical supervision and consider administration of a lower dose . [see ] WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.3)

Children 1 to < 6 years of age:

The dose range is 0.05 to 0.4 mg/kg per day. The recommended starting dose is 0.20 mg/kg (oral suspension).

Children 6 to < 17 years of age:

For those less than 50 kg, the dose range is 2 to 16 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 4 to 8 mg.

For those greater than 50 kg, the dose range is 4 to 32 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 8 to 16 mg.

Doses above 0.4 mg/kg (1 to < 6 year olds) or 32 mg (6 to < 17 year olds) have not been studied in pediatric patients [see ]. CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)

An antihypertensive effect is usually present within 2 weeks, with full effect generally obtained within 4 weeks of treatment with ATACAND.

Children < 1 year of age must not receive ATACAND for hypertension.

All pediatric patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 30 ml/min/1.73m should not receive ATACAND since ATACAND has not been studied in this population 2[see]. SPECIAL POPULATIONS (8)

For children who cannot swallow tablets, an oral suspension may be substituted as described below:

Preparation of Oral Suspension:

ATACAND oral suspension can be prepared in concentrations within the range of 0.1 to 2.0 mg/mL. Typically, a concentration of 1 mg/mL will be suitable for the prescribed dose. Any strength of ATACAND tablets can be used in the preparation of the suspension.

Follow the steps below for preparation of the suspension. The number of tablets and volume of vehicle specified below will yield 160 mL of a 1 mg/mL suspension.
• Prepare the vehicle by adding equal volumes of Ora-Plus (80 mL) and Ora-Sweet SF (80 mL) or, alternatively, use, Ora-Blend SF (160 mL). 1 ® 1 ® 1,2 ® • Add a small amount of vehicle to the required number of ATACAND tablets (five 32 mg tablets) and grind into a smooth paste using a mortar and pestle. • Add the paste to a preparation vessel of suitable size. • Rinse the mortar and pestle clean using the vehicle and add this to the vessel. Repeat, if necessary. • Prepare the final volume by adding the remaining vehicle. • Mix thoroughly. • Dispense into suitably sized amber PET bottles. • Label with an expiry date of 100 days and include the following instructions:
Store at room temperature (below 30°C/86°F). Use within 30 days after first opening. Do not use after the expiry date stated on the bottle.

Do not freeze.

Shake well before each use.
1 Ora-Plus®, Ora-Sweet SF®, and Ora-Blend SF® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. Supplied as a 50/50% pre-mix of Ora-Plus® and Ora-Sweet® 2
2.3 Adult Heart Failure

The recommended initial dose for treating heart failure is 4 mg once daily. The target dose is 32 mg once daily, which is achieved by doubling the dose at approximately 2-week intervals, as tolerated by the patient.
Aggrenox

Aggrenox

AGGRENOX is not interchangeable with the individual components of aspirin and dipyridamole tablets.

The recommended dose of AGGRENOX is one capsule given orally twice daily, one in the morning and one in the evening. Swallow capsules whole without chewing. AGGRENOX can be administered with or without food.

2.1 Alternative Regimen in Case of Intolerable Headaches

In the event of intolerable headaches during initial treatment, switch to one capsule at bedtime and low-dose aspirin in the morning. Because there are no outcome data with this regimen and headaches become less of a problem as treatment continues, patients should return to the usual regimen as soon as possible, usually within one week.
Pioglitazone

Pioglitazone

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone tablets should be taken once daily and can be taken without regard to meals.

The recommended starting dose for patients without congestive heart failure is 15 mg or 30 mg once daily.

The recommended starting dose for patients with congestive heart failure (NYHA Class I or II) is 15 mg once daily.

The dose can be titrated in increments of 15 mg up to a maximum of 45 mg once daily based on glycemic response as determined by HbA1c.

After initiation of pioglitazone tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure . [see and ] Boxed WarningWarnings and Precautions (5.2)

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone tablets is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions . [see and ] Warnings and Precautions (5.3)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Coadministration with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone tablets and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone tablets is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see and ]. Drug Interactions (7.1)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)
Cilostazol

Cilostazol

The recommended dosage of Cilostazol Tablets USP is 100 mg b.i.d. taken at least half an hour before or two hours after breakfast and dinner. A dose of 50 mg b.i.d. should be considered during coadministration of such inhibitors of CYP3A4 as ketoconazole, itraconazole, erythromycin and diltiazem, and during coadministration of such inhibitors of CYP2C19 as omeprazole.

Patients may respond as early as 2 to 4 weeks after the initiation of therapy, but treatment for up to 12 weeks may be needed before a beneficial effect is experienced.

Discontinuation of Therapy

The available data suggest that the dosage of Cilostazol Tablets USP can be reduced or discontinued without rebound (i.e., platelet hyperaggregability).
Trandolapril

Trandolapril

Hypertension

The recommended initial dosage of trandolapril tablets for patients not receiving a diuretic is 1 mg once daily in non-black patients and 2 mg in black patients. Dosage should be adjusted according to the blood pressure response. Generally, dosage adjustments should be made at intervals of at least 1 week. Most patients have required dosages of 2 to 4 mg once daily. There is little clinical experience with doses above 8 mg.

Patients inadequately treated with once-daily dosing at 4 mg may be treated with twice-daily dosing. If blood pressure is not adequately controlled with trandolapril tablets monotherapy, a diuretic may be added.

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally can occur following the initial dose of trandolapril tablets. To reduce the likelihood of hypotension, the diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued two to three days prior to beginning therapy with trandolapril tablets. (See .) Then, if blood pressure is not controlled with trandolapril tablets alone, diuretic therapy should be resumed. If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 0.5 mg trandolapril tablets should be used with careful medical supervision for several hours until blood pressure has stabilized. The dosage should subsequently be titrated (as described above) to the optimal response. (See and , .) WARNINGSWARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Concomitant administration of trandolapril tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium sparing diuretics can lead to increases of serum potassium. (See .) PRECAUTIONS

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment or Hepatic Cirrhosis

For patients with a creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min. or with hepatic cirrhosis, the recommended starting dose, based on clinical and pharmacokinetic data, is 0.5 mg daily. Patients should subsequently have their dosage titrated (as described above) to the optimal response.
Prandin

Prandin

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of type 2 diabetes with PRANDIN.

The patient's blood glucose should be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels are of value in monitoring the patient's longer term response to therapy.

Short-term administration of PRANDIN may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well controlled on diet.

PRANDIN doses are usually taken within 15 minutes of the meal but time may vary from immediately preceding the meal to as long as 30 minutes before the meal.

Starting Dose

For patients not previously treated or whose HbA is < 8%, the starting dose should be 0.5 mg with each meal. For patients previously treated with blood glucose-lowering drugs and whose HbA is ≥ 8%, the initial dose is 1 or 2 mg with each meal preprandially (see previous paragraph). 1c1c

Dose Adjustment

Dosing adjustments should be determined by blood glucose response, usually fasting blood glucose. Postprandial glucose levels testing may be clinically helpful in patients whose pre-meal blood glucose levels are satisfactory but whose overall glycemic control (HbA ) is inadequate. The preprandial dose should be doubled up to 4 mg with each meal until satisfactory blood glucose response is achieved. At least one week should elapse to assess response after each dose adjustment. 1c

The recommended dose range is 0.5 mg to 4 mg taken with meals. PRANDIN may be dosed preprandially 2, 3, or 4 times a day in response to changes in the patient’s meal pattern. The maximum recommended daily dose is 16 mg.

Patient Management

Long-term efficacy should be monitored by measurement of HbA levels approximately every 3 months. Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy including hypoglycemia. When hypoglycemia occurs in patients taking a combination of PRANDIN and a thiazolidinedione or PRANDIN and metformin, the dose of PRANDIN should be reduced. 1c

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

When PRANDIN is used to replace therapy with other oral hypoglycemic agents, PRANDIN may be started on the day after the final dose is given. Patients should then be observed carefully for hypoglycemia due to potential overlapping of drug effects. When transferred from longer half-life sulfonylurea agents (e.g., chlorpropamide) to repaglinide, close monitoring may be indicated for up to one week or longer.

Combination Therapy

If PRANDIN monotherapy does not result in adequate glycemic control, metformin or a thiazolidinedione may be added. If metformin or thiazolidinedione monotherapy does not provide adequate control, PRANDIN may be added. The starting dose and dose adjustments for PRANDIN combination therapy is the same as for PRANDIN monotherapy. The dose of each drug should be carefully adjusted to determine the minimal dose required to achieve the desired pharmacologic effect. Failure to do so could result in an increase in the incidence of hypoglycemic episodes. Appropriate monitoring of FPG and HbA measurements should be used to ensure that the patient is not subjected to excessive drug exposure or increased probability of secondary drug failure. 1c
Metolazone

Metolazone

Effective dosage of metolazone tablets should be individualized according to indication and patient response. A single daily dose is recommended. Therapy with metolazone tablets should be titrated to gain an initial therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose possible to maintain the desired therapeutic response.

Usual Single Daily Dosage Schedules

Suitable initial dosages will usually fall in the ranges given.

Edema of cardiac failure:
Metolazone tablets 5 to 20 mg once daily.
Edema of renal disease:
Metolazone tablets 5 to 20 mg once daily.
Mild to moderate essential hypertension:
Metolazone tablets 2.5 to 5 mg once daily. New patients- If considered desirable to switch patients currently on Zaroxolyn tablets and other formulations of metolazone that share its slow and incomplete bioavailability to Mykrox , the dose should be determined by titration starting at one tablet (0.5 mg) once daily and increasing to two tablets (1 mg) once daily if needed. ® ®
Treatment of Edematous States

The time interval required for the initial dosage to produce an effect may vary. Diuresis and saluresis usually begin within one hour and persist for 24 hours or longer. When a desired therapeutic effect has been obtained, it may be advisable to reduce the dose if possible. The daily dose depends on the severity of the patient's condition, sodium intake, and responsiveness. A decision to change the daily dose should be based on the results of thorough clinical and laboratory evaluations. If antihypertensive drugs or diuretics are given concurrently with metolazone tablets, more careful dosage adjustment may be necessary. For patients who tend to experience paroxysmal nocturnal dyspnea, it may be advisable to employ a larger dose to ensure prolongation of diuresis and saluresis for a full 24-hour period.

Treatment of Hypertension

The time interval required for the initial dosage regimen to show effect may vary from three or four days to three to six weeks in the treatment of elevated blood pressure. Doses should be adjusted at appropriate intervals to achieve maximum therapeutic effect.
Lisinopril

Lisinopril

Hypertension

Initial Therapy

In patients with uncomplicated essential hypertension not on diuretic therapy, the recommended initial dose is 10 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 20 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single daily dose. The antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval regardless of the administered dose, but most commonly with a dose of 10 mg daily. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure just prior to dosing to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained for 24 hours. If it is not, an increase in dose should be considered. Doses up to 80 mg have been used but do not appear to give greater effect. If blood pressure is not controlled with lisinopril tablets alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide, 12.5 mg has been shown to provide an additive effect. After the addition of a diuretic, it may be possible to reduce the dose of lisinopril tablets.

Diuretic Treated Patients

In hypertensive patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension may occur occasionally following the initial dose of lisinopril tablets. The diuretic should be discontinued, if possible, for two to three days before beginning therapy with lisinopril tablets to reduce the likelihood of hypotension (see ). The dosage of lisinopril tablets should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. If the patient's blood pressure is not controlled with lisinopril tablets alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed as described above. WARNINGS

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued, an initial dose of 5 mg should be used under medical supervision for at least two hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour (see and , ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Concomitant administration of lisinopril tablets with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium (see ). PRECAUTIONS

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

The usual dose of lisinopril tablets (10 mg) is recommended for patients with creatinine clearance >30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≥10 mL/min ≤30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥3 mg/dL), the first dose is 5 mg once daily. For patients with creatinine clearance <10 mL/min (usually on hemodialysis) the recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg. The dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum of 40 mg daily.
* See WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure . † Dosage or dosing interval should be adjusted depending on the blood pressure response.
Renal Status

Creatinine

Clearance

mL/min

Initial

Dose

mg/day

Normal Renal Function

to Mild Impairment

>30

10

Moderate to Severe

Impairment

≥10 ≤30

5

Dialysis Patients *

<10

2.5 †

Heart Failure

Lisinopril tablets are indicated as adjunctive therapy with diuretics and (usually) digitalis. The recommended starting dose is 5 mg once a day. When initiating treatment with lisinopril in patients with heart failure, the initial dose should be administered under medical observation, especially in those patients with low blood pressure (systolic blood pressure below 100 mmHg). The mean peak blood pressure lowering occurs six to eight hours after dosing. Observation should continue until blood pressure is stable. The concomitant diuretic dose should be reduced, if possible, to help minimize hypovolemia which may contribute to hypotension (see and , ). The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of lisinopril tablets does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension. WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

The usual effective dosage range is 5 mg to 40 mg per day administered as a single daily dose. The dose of lisinopril tablets can be increased by increments of no greater than 10 mg, at intervals of no less than 2 weeks to the highest tolerated dose, up to a maximum of 40 mg daily. Dose adjustment should be based on the clinical response of individual patients.

Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Heart Failure and Renal Impairment or Hyponatremia

In patients with heart failure who have hyponatremia (serum sodium <130 mEq/L) or moderate to severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min or serum creatinine >3 mg/dL), therapy with lisinopril tablets should be initiated at a dose of 2.5 mg once a day under close medical supervision (see and , ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Acute Myocardial Infarction

In hemodynamically stable patients within 24 hours of the onset of symptoms of acute myocardial infarction, the first dose of lisinopril tablets is 5 mg given orally, followed by 5 mg after 24 hours, 10 mg after 48 hours and then 10 mg of lisinopril tablets once daily. Dosing should continue for six weeks. Patients should receive, as appropriate, the standard recommended treatments such as thrombolytics, aspirin, and beta-blockers.

Patients with a low systolic blood pressure (≤120 mmHg) when treatment is started or during the first 3 days after the infarct should be given a lower 2.5 mg oral dose of lisinopril tablets (see ). If hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure ≤100 mmHg) a daily maintenance dose of 5 mg may be given with temporary reductions to 2.5 mg if needed. If prolonged hypotension occurs (systolic blood pressure <90 mmHg for more than 1 hour) lisinopril tablets should be withdrawn. For patients who develop symptoms of heart failure, see , . WARNINGSDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATIONHeart Failure

Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Myocardial Infarction with Renal Impairment

In acute myocardial infarction, treatment with lisinopril tablets should be initiated with caution in patients with evidence of renal dysfunction, defined as serum creatinine concentration exceeding 2 mg/dL. No evaluation of dosing adjustments in myocardial infarction patients with severe renal impairment has been performed.

Use in Elderly

In general, the clinical response was similar in younger and older patients given similar doses of lisinopril tablets. Pharmacokinetic studies, however indicate that maximum blood levels and area under the plasma concentration time curve (AUC) are doubled in older patients, so that dosage adjustments should be made with particular caution.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients ≥ 6 Years of Age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.07 mg/kg once daily (up to 5 mg total). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 0.61 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients (see and ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics and MetabolismPharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects

Lisinopril tablets are not recommended in pediatric patients < 6 years or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m (see , and and PRECAUTIONS). 2CLINICALPHARMACOLOGYPharmacokinetics and MetabolismPharmacodynamics and Clinical EffectsPRECAUTIONS

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 1.0 mg/mL suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 20 mg tablets of lisinopril and shake for at least one minute. Add 30 mL of Bicitra diluent and 160 mL of Ora-Sweet SF™ to the concentrate in the PET bottle and gently shake for several seconds to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be stored at or below 25°C (77°F) and can be stored for up to four weeks. Shake the suspension before each use. ®34

Registered trademark of Alza Corporation 3

Trademark of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. 4
Selegiline Hydrochlorid...

Selegiline Hydrochloride

Selegiline hydrochloride capsules are intended for administration to Parkinsonian patients receiving levodopa/carbidopa therapy who demonstrate a deteriorating response to this treatment. The recommended regimen for the administration of selegiline is 10 mg per day administered as divided doses of 5 mg each taken at breakfast and lunch. There is no evidence that additional benefit will be obtained from the administration of higher doses. Moreover, higher doses should ordinarily be avoided because of the increased risk of side effects.

After two to three days of selegiline treatment, an attempt may be made to reduce the dose of levodopa/carbidopa. A reduction of 10 to 30% was achieved with the typical participant in the domestic placebo controlled trials who was assigned to selegiline treatment. Further reductions of levodopa/carbidopa may be possible during continued selegiline therapy.
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 30 minutes in patients taking naproxen sodium and within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. Because Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets dissolve in the small intestine rather than in the stomach, the absorption of the drug is delayed compared to the other naproxen formulations (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min) (see , ). WARNINGSRenal Effects

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis
Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets 375 mg twice daily or 500 mg twice daily
To maintain the integrity of the enteric coating, the Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablet should not be broken, crushed, or chewed during ingestion.

During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Juvenile Arthritis

The recommended total daily dose of naproxen is approximately 10 mg/kg given in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen Delayed-Release Tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.
Prazosin Hydrochloride

Prazosin Hydrochloride

The dose of prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP should be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg two or three times a day (see ). WARNINGS

Maintenance Dose

Dosage may be slowly increased to a total daily dose of 20 mg given in divided doses. The therapeutic dosages most commonly employed have ranged from 6 mg to 15 mg daily given in divided doses. Doses higher than 20 mg usually do not increase efficacy, however a few patients may benefit from further increases up to a daily dose of 40 mg given in divided doses. After initial titration some patients can be maintained adequately on a twice daily dosage regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

When adding a diuretic or other antihypertensive agent, the dose of prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP should be reduced to 1 mg or 2 mg three times a day and retitration then carried out.

Concomitant administration of prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP with a PDE-5 inhibitor can result in additive blood pressure lowering effects and symptomatic hypotension; therefore, PDE-5 inhibitor therapy should be initiated at the lowest dose in patients taking prazosin hydrochloride capsules USP.
Banophen

Banophen

take every 4 to 6 hours, or as directed by a doctor

do not take more than 6 doses in 24 hours
adults and children 12 years of and over 1 to 2 tablets children 6 to under 12 years 1 tablet children under 6 years do not use
Disopyramide Phosphate

Disopyramide Phosphate

The dosage of Disopyramide Phosphate must be individualized for each patient on the basis of response and tolerance. The usual adult dosage of Disopyramide Phosphate is 400 to 800 mg per day given in divided doses. The recommended dosage for most adults is 600 mg/day given in divided doses (150 mg every 6 hours). For patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds (50 kg), the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (100 mg every 6 hours). In the event of increased anticholinergic side effects, plasma levels of disopyramide should be monitored and the dose of the drug adjusted accordingly. A reduction of the dose by one third, from the recommended 600 mg/day to 400 mg/day, would be reasonable, without changing the dosing interval.

Subsequent dosage adjustments should be made gradually, with close monitoring for the possible development of hypotension and/or congestive heart failure (see ). For patients with cardiomyopathy or possible cardiac decompensation, a loading dose, as discussed below, should not be given, and initial dosage should be limited to 100 mg every 6 to 8 hours.WARNINGS

For patients with moderate renal insufficiency (creatinine clearance greater than 40 mL/min) or hepatic insufficiency, the recommended dosage is 400 mg/day given in divided doses (100 mg every 6 hours).

For patients with severe renal insufficiency (C 40 mL/min or less), the recommended dosage regimen is 100 mg at intervals shown in the table below, with or without an initial loading dose of 150 mg. cr
DISOPYRAMIDE PHOSPHATE DOSAGE INTERVAL FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY Creatinine clearance (mL/min) 40 to 30 30 to 15 less than 15 Approximate maintenance – dosing interval q 8 hr q 12 hr q 24 hr
For patients in whom rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 300 mg of Disopyramide Phosphate (200 mg for patients whose body weight is less than 110 pounds) is recommended, followed by the appropriate maintenance dosage. Therapeutic effects are usually attained 30 minutes to 3 hours after administration of a 300 mg loading dose. If there is no response or evidence of toxicity within 6 hours of the loading dose, 200 mg of Disopyramide Phosphate every 6 hours may be prescribed instead of the usual 150 mg. If there is no response to this dosage within 48 hours, either Disopyramide Phosphate should then be discontinued or the physician should consider hospitalizing the patient for careful monitoring while subsequent Disopyramide Phosphate doses of 250 mg or 300 mg every 6 hours are given. A limited number of patients with severe refractory ventricular tachycardia have tolerated daily doses of Disopyramide Phosphate up to 1600 mg per day (400 mg every 6 hours), resulting in disopyramide plasma levels up to 9 mcg/mL. If such treatment is warranted, it is essential that patients be hospitalized for close evaluation and continuous monitoring.

Transferring to Disopyramide Phosphate

The following dosage schedule based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data is suggested for transferring patients with normal renal function from either quinidine sulfate or procainamide therapy (Type 1 antiarrhythmic agents) to Disopyramide Phosphate therapy:

Disopyramide Phosphate should be started using the regular maintenance schedule 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate or 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide. without a loading dose

In patients in whom withdrawal of quinidine sulfate or procainamide is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, the physician should consider hospitalization of the patient.

Pediatric Dosage

Controlled clinical studies have not been conducted in pediatric patients; however, the following suggested dosage table is based on published clinical experience.

Total daily dosage should be divided and equal doses administered orally every 6 hours or at intervals according to individual patient needs. Disopyramide plasma levels and therapeutic response must be monitored closely. Patients should be hospitalized during the initial treatment period, and dose titration should start at the lower end of the ranges provided below.
SUGGESTED TOTAL DAILY DOSAGE * * Dosage is expressed in milligrams of disopyramide base. Since disopyramide phosphate 100 mg capsules contain 100 mg of disopyramide base, the pharmacist can readily prepare a 1 mg/mL to 10 mg/mL liquid suspension by adding the entire contents of disopyramide capsules to cherry syrup. (Prepare cherry syrup as follows: cherry juice, 475 mL; sucrose 800 g; alcohol 20 mL; purified water, a sufficient quantity to make 1000 mL.) The resulting suspension, when refrigerated, is stable for one month and should be thoroughly shaken before the measurement of each dose. The suspension should be dispensed in an amber glass bottle with a child-resistant closure. Age (years) Disopyramide (mg/kg body weight/day) Under 1 10 to 30 1 to 4 10 to 20 4 to 12 10 to 15 12 to 18 6 to 15
Atacand

Atacand

2.1 Adult Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. Blood pressure response is dose related over the range of 2 to 32 mg. The usual recommended starting dose of ATACAND is 16 mg once daily when it is used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume depleted. ATACAND can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 8 mg to 32 mg. Larger doses do not appear to have a greater effect, and there is relatively little experience with such doses. Most of the antihypertensive effect is present within 2 weeks, and maximal blood pressure reduction is generally obtained within 4 to 6 weeks of treatment with ATACAND.

Use in Hepatic Impairment: Initiate with 8 mg ATACAND in patients with moderate hepatic insufficiency. Dosing recommendations cannot be provided for patients with severe hepatic insufficiency [ ]. see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)

ATACAND may be administered with or without food.

If blood pressure is not controlled by ATACAND alone, a diuretic may be added. ATACAND may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension 1 to < 17 Years of age

ATACAND may be administered once daily or divided into two equal doses. Adjust the dosage according to blood pressure response. For patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, particularly those with impaired renal function), initiate ATACAND under close medical supervision and consider administration of a lower dose . [see ] WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.3)

Children 1 to < 6 years of age:

The dose range is 0.05 to 0.4 mg/kg per day. The recommended starting dose is 0.20 mg/kg (oral suspension).

Children 6 to < 17 years of age:

For those less than 50 kg, the dose range is 2 to 16 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 4 to 8 mg.

For those greater than 50 kg, the dose range is 4 to 32 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 8 to 16 mg.

Doses above 0.4 mg/kg (1 to < 6 year olds) or 32 mg (6 to < 17 year olds) have not been studied in pediatric patients [see ]. CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)

An antihypertensive effect is usually present within 2 weeks, with full effect generally obtained within 4 weeks of treatment with ATACAND.

Children < 1 year of age must not receive ATACAND for hypertension.

All pediatric patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 30 ml/min/1.73m should not receive ATACAND since ATACAND has not been studied in this population 2[see]. SPECIAL POPULATIONS (8)

For children who cannot swallow tablets, an oral suspension may be substituted as described below:

Preparation of Oral Suspension:

ATACAND oral suspension can be prepared in concentrations within the range of 0.1 to 2.0 mg/mL. Typically, a concentration of 1 mg/mL will be suitable for the prescribed dose. Any strength of ATACAND tablets can be used in the preparation of the suspension.

Follow the steps below for preparation of the suspension. The number of tablets and volume of vehicle specified below will yield 160 mL of a 1 mg/mL suspension.
• Prepare the vehicle by adding equal volumes of Ora-Plus (80 mL) and Ora-Sweet SF (80 mL) or, alternatively, use, Ora-Blend SF (160 mL). 1 ® 1 ® 1,2 ® • Add a small amount of vehicle to the required number of ATACAND tablets (five 32 mg tablets) and grind into a smooth paste using a mortar and pestle. • Add the paste to a preparation vessel of suitable size. • Rinse the mortar and pestle clean using the vehicle and add this to the vessel. Repeat, if necessary. • Prepare the final volume by adding the remaining vehicle. • Mix thoroughly. • Dispense into suitably sized amber PET bottles. • Label with an expiry date of 100 days and include the following instructions:
Store at room temperature (below 30°C/86°F). Use within 30 days after first opening. Do not use after the expiry date stated on the bottle.

Do not freeze.

Shake well before each use.
1 Ora-Plus®, Ora-Sweet SF®, and Ora-Blend SF® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. Supplied as a 50/50% pre-mix of Ora-Plus® and Ora-Sweet® 2
2.3 Adult Heart Failure

The recommended initial dose for treating heart failure is 4 mg once daily. The target dose is 32 mg once daily, which is achieved by doubling the dose at approximately 2-week intervals, as tolerated by the patient.
Ketoconazole

Ketoconazole

There should be laboratory as well as clinical documentation of infection prior to starting ketoconazole therapy. The usual duration of therapy for systemic infection is 6 months. Treatment should be continued until active fungal infection has subsided.

Adults

The recommended starting dose of ketoconazole tablets is a single daily administration of 200 mg (one tablet). If clinical responsiveness is insufficient within the expected time, the dose of ketoconazole tablets may be increased to 400 mg (two tablets) once daily.

Children

In small numbers of children over 2 years of age, a single daily dose of 3.3 to 6.6 mg/kg has been used. Ketoconazole tablets have not been studied in children under 2 years of age.
Felodipine

Felodipine

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg once a day. Depending on the patient's response, the dosage can be decreased to 2.5 mg or increased to 10 mg once a day. These adjustments should occur generally at intervals of not less than 2 weeks. The recommended dosage range is 2.5–10 mg once daily. In clinical trials, doses above 10 mg daily showed an increased blood pressure response but a large increase in the rate of peripheral edema and other vasodilatory adverse events (see ). Modification of the recommended dosage is usually not required in patients with renal impairment. ADVERSE REACTIONS

Felodipine extended-release tablets should regularly be taken either without food or with a light meal (see ). Felodipine extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole and not crushed or chewed. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics and Metabolism

— Patients over 65 years of age are likely to develop higher plasma concentrations of felodipine (see ). In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (2.5 mg daily). Elderly patients should have their blood pressure closely monitored during any dosage adjustment. Geriatric UseCLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

— Patients with impaired liver function may have elevated plasma concentrations of felodipine and may respond to lower doses of felodipine extended-release tablets; therefore, patients should have their blood pressure monitored closely during dosage adjustment of felodipine extended-release tablets (see ). Patients with Impaired Liver FunctionCLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY
Torsemide

Torsemide

Torsemide tablets may be given at any time in relation to a meal, as convenient. Special dosage adjustment in the elderly is not necessary. The usual initial dose is 10 mg or 20 mg of once-daily oral torsemide. If the diuretic response is inadequate, the dose should be titrated upward by approximately doubling until the desired diuretic response is obtained. Single doses higher than 200 mg have not been adequately studied. The usual initial dose of torsemide is 20 mg of once-daily oral torsemide. If the diuretic response is inadequate, the dose should be titrated upward by approximately doubling until the desired diuretic response is obtained. Single doses higher than 200 mg have not been adequately studied. The usual initial dose is 5 mg or 10 mg of once-daily oral torsemide, administered together with an aldosterone antagonist or a potassium-sparing diuretic. If the diuretic response is inadequate, the dose should be titrated upward by approximately doubling until the desired diuretic response is obtained. Single doses higher than 40 mg have not been adequately studied. Chronic use of any diuretic in hepatic disease has not been studied in adequate and well-controlled trials. The usual initial dose is 5 mg once daily. If the 5 mg dose does not provide adequate reduction in blood pressure within 4 to 6 weeks, the dose may be increased to 10 mg once daily. If the response to 10 mg is insufficient, an additional antihypertensive agent should be added to the treatment regimen.
General Congestive Heart Failure Chronic Renal Failure Hepatic Cirrhosis Hypertension
Theophylline

Theophylline

Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets 400 or 600 mg Tablets can be taken once a day in the morning or evening. It is recommended that Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets be taken with meals. Patients should be advised that if they choose to take Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets with food it should be taken consistently with food and if they take it in a fasted condition it should routinely be taken fasted. It is important that the product whenever dosed be dosed consistently with or without food.

Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets are not to be chewed or crushed because it may lead to a rapid release of theophylline with the potential for toxicity. The scored tablet may be split. Infrequently, patients receiving Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release 400 or 600 mg Tablets may pass an intact matrix tablet in the stool or via colostomy. These matrix tablets usually contain little or no residual theophylline.

Stabilized patients, 12 years of age or older, who are taking an immediate-release or controlled-release theophylline product may be transferred to once-daily administration of 400 mg or 600 mg Theophylline (Anhydrous) Extended-Release Tablets on a mg-for-mg basis.

It must be recognized that the peak and trough serum theophylline levels produced by the once-daily dosing may vary from those produced by the previous product and/or regimen.

General Considerations

The steady-state peak serum theophylline concentration is a function of the dose, the dosing interval, and the rate of theophylline absorption and clearance in the individual patient. Because of marked individual differences in the rate of theophylline clearance, the dose required to achieve a peak serum theophylline concentration in the 10-20 mcg/mL range varies fourfold among otherwise similar patients in the absence of factors known to alter theophylline clearance (e.g., 400-1600 mg/day in adults <60 years old and 10-36 mg/kg/day in children 1-9 years old). For a given population there is no single theophylline dose that will provide both safe and effective serum concentrations for all patients. Administration of the median theophylline dose required to achieve a therapeutic serum theophylline concentration in a given population may result in either sub-therapeutic or potentially toxic serum theophylline concentrations in individual patients. For example, at a dose of 900 mg/d in adults <60 years or 22 mg/kg/d in children 1-9 years, the steady-state peak serum theophylline concentration will be <10 mcg/mL in about 30% of patients, 10-20 mcg/mL in about 50% and 20-30 mcg/mL in about 20% of patients. The dose of theophylline must be individualized on the basis of peak serum theophylline concentration measurements in order to achieve a dose that will provide maximum potential benefit with minimal risk of adverse effects.

Transient caffeine-like adverse effects and excessive serum concentrations in slow metabolizers can be avoided in most patients by starting with a sufficiently low dose and slowly increasing the dose, in small increments (See ). Dose increases should only be made if the previous dosage is well tolerated and at intervals of no less than 3 days to allow serum theophylline concentrations to reach the new steady-state. Dosage adjustment should be guided by serum theophylline concentration measurement (see and , ). Healthcare providers should instruct patients and caregivers to discontinue any dosage that causes adverse effects, to withhold the medication until these symptoms are gone and to then resume therapy at a lower, previously tolerated dosage (see ). if judged to be clinically indicated,Table VPRECAUTIONS, Laboratory TestsDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATIONTable VIWARNINGS

If the patient’s symptoms are well controlled, there are no apparent adverse effects, and no intervening factors that might alter dosage requirements (see and ), serum theophylline concentrations should be monitored at 6 month intervals for rapidly growing children and at yearly intervals for all others. In acutely ill patients, serum theophylline concentrations should be monitored at frequent intervals, e.g., every 24 hours. WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Theophylline distributes poorly into body fat, therefore, mg/kg dose should be calculated on the basis of ideal body weight.

Table V contains theophylline dosing titration schema recommended for patients in various age groups and clinical circumstances. Table VI contains recommendations for theophylline dosage adjustment based upon serum theophylline concentrations. Application of these general dosing recommendations to individual patients must take into account the unique clinical characteristics of each patient. In general, these recommendations should serve as the upper limit for dosage adjustments in order to decrease the risk of potentially serious adverse events associated with unexpected large increases in serum theophylline concentration.

Table V. Dosing initiation and titration (as anhydrous theophylline). *
A. Children (12-15 years) and adults (16-60 years) without risk factors for impaired clearance. Titration Step Children <45 kg Children >45 kg and adults If caffeine-like adverse effects occur, then consideration should be given to a lower dose and titrating the dose more slowly (see ). 1ADVERSE REACTIONS 1. Starting Dosage 12-14 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 300 mg/day admin. QD* 300-400 mg/day1 admin. QD* 2. After 3 days, if , increase dose to: tolerated 16 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 400 mg/day admin. QD* 400-600 mg/day admin. QD* 1 3. After 3 more days, , and increase dose to: if tolerated if needed 20 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 600 mg/day admin. QD* As with all theophylline products, doses greater than 600 mg should be titrated according to blood level (see Table VI) B. Patients With Risk Factors For Impaired Clearance, The Elderly (>60 Years), And Those In Whom It Is Not Feasible To Monitor Serum Theophylline Concentrations: In children 12-15 years of age, the theophylline dose should not exceed 16 mg/kg/day up to a maximum of 400 mg/day in the presence of risk factors for reduced theophylline clearance (see ) or if it is not feasible to monitor serum theophylline concentrations. WARNINGS In adolescents ≥16 years and adults, including the elderly, the theophylline dose should not exceed 400 mg/day in the presence of risk factors for reduced theophylline clearance (see ) or if it is not feasible to monitor serum theophylline concentrations. WARNINGS
*Patients with more rapid metabolism clinically identified by higher than average dose requirements, should receive a smaller dose more frequently (every 12 hours) to prevent breakthrough symptoms resulting from low trough concentrations before the next dose.
TABLE VI. Dosage adjustment guided by serum theophylline concentration. ¶Dose reduction and/or serum theophylline concentration measurement is indicated whenever adverse effects are present physiologic abnormalities that can reduce theophylline clearance occur (e.g. sustained fever), or a drug that interacts with theophylline is added or discontinued (see ). WARNINGS Peak Serum Concentration Dosage Adjustment <9.9 mcg/mL If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, increase dose about 25%. Recheck serum concentration after three days for further dosage adjustment. not 10-14.9 mcg/mL If symptoms are controlled and current dosage is tolerated, maintain dose and recheck serum concentration at 6-12 month intervals.¶ If symptoms are not controlled and current dosage is tolerated consider adding additional medication(s) to treatment regimen. 15-19.9 mcg/mL Consider 10% decrease in dose to provide greater margin of safety even if current dosage is tolerated. ¶ 20-24.9 mcg/mL Decrease dose by 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment. 25-30 mcg/mL Skip next dose and decrease subsequent doses at least 25% even if no adverse effects are present. Recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment. If symptomatic, consider whether overdose treatment is indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). >30 mcg/mL Treat overdose as indicated (see recommendations for chronic overdosage). If theophylline is subsequently resumed, decrease dose by at least 50% and recheck serum concentration after 3 days to guide further dosage adjustment.
Venlafaxine Hydrochlori...

Venlafaxine Hydrochloride

Venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release should be administered in a single dose with food either in the morning or in the evening at approximately the same time each day. Each capsule should be swallowed whole with fluid and not divided, crushed, chewed, or placed in water, or it may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a spoonful of applesauce. This drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets.

Initial Treatment

Major Depressive Disorder

For most patients, the recommended starting dose for venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release is 75 mg/day, administered in a single dose. In the clinical trials establishing the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release in moderately depressed outpatients, the initial dose of venlafaxine was 75 mg/day. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 37.5 mg/day for 4 to 7 days, to allow new patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 75 mg/day. While the relationship between dose and antidepressant response for venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release has not been adequately explored, patients not responding to the initial 75 mg/day dose may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg/day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg/day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 4 days, since steady state plasma levels of venlafaxine and its major metabolites are achieved in most patients by day 4. In the clinical trials establishing efficacy, upward titration was permitted at intervals of 2 weeks or more; the average doses were about 140 to 180 mg/day (see under ). Clinical TrialsCLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

It should be noted that, while the maximum recommended dose for moderately depressed outpatients is also 225 mg/day for venlafaxine hydrochloride immediate-release, more severely depressed inpatients in one study of the development program for that product responded to a mean dose of 350 mg/day (range of 150 to 375 mg/day). Whether or not higher doses of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release are needed for more severely depressed patients is unknown; however, the experience with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release doses higher than 225 mg/day is very limited. (See .) PRECAUTIONS-General-Use in Patients with Concomitant Illness

Generalized Anxiety Disorder

For most patients, the recommended starting dose for venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release is 75 mg/day, administered in a single dose. In clinical trials establishing the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release in outpatients with Generalized Anxiety Disorder (GAD), the initial dose of venlafaxine was 75 mg/day. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 37.5 mg/day for 4 to 7 days, to allow new patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 75 mg/day. Although a dose-response relationship for effectiveness in GAD was not clearly established in fixed-dose studies, certain patients not responding to the initial 75 mg/day dose may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg/day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg/day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 4 days. (See the section of .) Use in Patients with Concomitant IllnessPRECAUTIONS

Social Anxiety Disorder (Social Phobia)

The recommended dose is 75 mg/day, administered in a single dose. There was no evidence that higher doses confer any additional benefit. (See the section of .) Use in Patients with Concomitant IllnessPRECAUTIONS

Panic Disorder

It is recommended that initial single doses of 37.5 mg/day of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release be used for 7 days. In clinical trials establishing the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release in outpatients with panic disorder, initial doses of 37.5 mg/day for 7 days were followed by doses of 75 mg/day and subsequent weekly dose increases of 75 mg/day to a maximum dose of 225 mg/day. Although a dose-response relationship for effectiveness in patients with panic disorder was not clearly established in fixed‑dose studies, certain patients not responding to 75 mg/day may benefit from dose increases to a maximum of approximately 225 mg/day. Dose increases should be in increments of up to 75 mg/day, as needed, and should be made at intervals of not less than 7 days. (See the section of .) Use in Patients with Concomitant IllnessPRECAUTIONS

Switching Patients from Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Immediate-Release Tablets

Depressed patients who are currently being treated at a therapeutic dose with venlafaxine hydrochloride immediate-release may be switched to venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release at the nearest equivalent dose (mg/day), eg, 37.5 mg venlafaxine two‑times-a-day to 75 mg venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release once daily. However, individual dosage adjustments may be necessary.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release. Conversely, at least 7 days should be allowed after stopping venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

Use of Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Extended-Release With Other MAOls, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 7 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see ). WARNINGS

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see ). WARNINGS

Special Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women During the Third Trimester

Neonates exposed to venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release, other SNRIs, or SSRIs, late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding (see ). When treating pregnant women with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release during the third trimester, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and benefits of treatment. PRECAUTIONS

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance and increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with hepatic cirrhosis and mild and moderate hepatic impairment compared with normal subjects (see ), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50% in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Since there was much individual variability in clearance between subjects with cirrhosis, it may be necessary to reduce the dose even more than 50%, and individualization of dosing may be desirable in some patients. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Patients with Renal Impairment

Given the decrease in clearance for venlafaxine and the increase in elimination half-life for both venlafaxine and ODV that is observed in patients with renal impairment (GFR = 10 to 70 mL/min) compared with normal subjects (see ), it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 25% to 50%. In patients undergoing hemodialysis, it is recommended that the total daily dose be reduced by 50%. Because there was much individual variability in clearance between patients with renal impairment, individualization of dosage may be desirable in some patients. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Elderly Patients

No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients solely on the basis of age. As with any drug for the treatment of major depressive disorder, Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Social Anxiety Disorder, or panic disorder, however, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose.

Maintenance Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long patients with major depressive disorder, Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Social Anxiety Disorder, or panic disorder, should be treated with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depressive disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy beyond response to the acute episode. In one study, in which patients responding during 8 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release (75, 150, or 225 mg/day, qAM) during 26 weeks of maintenance treatment as they had received during the acute stabilization phase, longer-term efficacy was demonstrated. A second longer-term study has demonstrated the efficacy of venlafaxine hydrochloride immediate-release in maintaining a response in patients with recurrent major depressive disorder who had responded and continued to be improved during an initial 26 weeks of treatment and were then randomly assigned to placebo or venlafaxine hydrochloride immediate-release for periods of up to 52 weeks on the same dose (100 to 200 mg/day, on a b.i.d. schedule) (see under ). Based on these limited data, it is not known whether or not the dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride immediate or extended-release needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose needed to achieve an initial response. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment. Clinical TrialsCLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

In patients with Generalized Anxiety Disorder, venlafaxine hydrochloride extended‑release has been shown to be effective in 6‑month clinical trials. The need for continuing medication in patients with GAD who improve with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release treatment should be periodically reassessed.

In patients with Social Anxiety Disorder, venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release has been shown to be effective in a 6‑month clinical trial. The need for continuing medication in patients with Social Anxiety Disorder who improve with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release treatment should be periodically reassessed.

In a study of panic disorder in which patients responding during 12 weeks of acute treatment with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release were assigned randomly to placebo or to the same dose of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release (75, 150, or 225 mg/day), patients continuing venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release experienced a significantly longer time to relapse than patients randomized to placebo. The need for continuing medication in patients with panic disorder who improve with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release treatment should be periodically reassessed.

Discontinuing Venlafaxine Hydrochloride Extended-Release

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of venlafaxine hydrochloride extended‑release, other SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported (see ). Patients should be monitored for these symptoms when discontinuing treatment. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible. If intolerable symptoms occur following a decrease in the dose or upon discontinuation of treatment, then resuming the previously prescribed dose may be considered. Subsequently, the physician may continue decreasing the dose but at a more gradual rate. In clinical trials with venlafaxine hydrochloride extended-release, tapering was achieved by reducing the daily dose by 75 mg at 1 week intervals. Individualization of tapering may be necessary. PRECAUTIONS
Bisacodyl Enteric Coate...

Bisacodyl Enteric Coated

-take with a glass of water

adults and children 12 years and over- take 1 to 3 tablets in a single daily dose

children 6 to under 12 years of age - take 1 tablet in a single daily dose

children under 6 years of age - ask a doctor
Mexiletine Hydrochlorid...

Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The dosage of mexiletine hydrochloride must be individualized on the basis of response and tolerance, both of which are dose-related. Administration with food or antacid is recommended. Initiate mexiletine therapy with 200 mg every eight hours when rapid control of arrhythmia is not essential. A minimum of two to three days between dose adjustments is recommended. Dose may be adjusted in 50 or 100 mg increments up or down.

As with any antiarrhythmic drug, clinical and electrocardiographic evaluation (including Holter monitoring if necessary for evaluation) are needed to determine whether the desired antiarrhythmic effect has been obtained and to guide titration and dose adjustment.

Satisfactory control can be achieved in most patients by 200 to 300 mg given every eight hours with food or antacid. If satisfactory response has not been achieved at 300 mg q8h, and the patient tolerates mexiletine well, a dose of 400 mg q8h may be tried. As the severity of CNS side effects increases with total daily dose, the dose should not exceed 1200 mg/day.

In general, patients with renal failure will require the usual doses of mexiletine hydrochloride. Patients with severe liver disease, however, may require lower doses and must be monitored closely. Similarly, marked right-sided congestive heart failure can reduce hepatic metabolism and reduce the needed dose. Plasma level may also be affected by certain concomitant drugs (see , ). PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Loading Dose

When rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 400 mg of mexiletine hydrochloride may be administered, followed by a 200 mg dose in eight hours. Onset of therapeutic effect is usually observed within 30 minutes to two hours.

Q12H Dosage Schedule

Some patients responding to mexiletine may be transferred to a 12 hour dosage schedule to improve convenience and compliance. If adequate suppression is achieved on a mexiletine hydrochloride dose of 300 mg or less every eight hours, the same total daily dose may be given in divided doses every 12 hours while carefully monitoring the degree of suppression of ventricular ectopy. This dose may be adjusted up to a maximum of 450 mg every 12 hours to achieve the desired response.

Transferring to Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The following dosage schedule, based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data, is suggested for transferring patients from other Class I oral antiarrhythmic agents to mexiletine: mexiletine hydrochloride treatment may be initiated with a 200 mg dose, and titrated to response as described above, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate, 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of disopryramide or 8 to 12 hours after the last dose of tocainide.

In patients in whom withdrawal of the previous antiarrhythmic agent is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, hospitalization of the patient is recommended.

When transferring from lidocaine to mexiletine, the lidocaine infusion should be stopped when the first oral dose of mexiletine hydrochloride is administered. The infusion line should be left open until suppression of the arrhythmia appears to be satisfactorily maintained. Consideration should be given to the similarity of the adverse effects of lidocaine and mexiletine and the possibility that they may be additive.
Aspirin

Aspirin

drink a full glass of water with each dose adults and children 12 years and over: take 4 to 8 tablets every 4 hours not to exceed 48 tablets in 24 hours unless directed by a doctor children under 12 years: consult a doctor
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

: There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see ]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely. RashBoxed Warning

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

It is recommended that lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine, unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [ ]. see Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3

: Drugs other than those listed in the Clinical Pharmacology section [ ] have not been systematically evaluated in combination with lamotrigine. Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine and doses of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may require adjustment based on clinical response. Lamotrigine Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidationsee Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3

: A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be based on therapeutic response [ ]. Target Plasma Levels for Patients With Epilepsy or Bipolar Disordersee Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3

: Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [ ], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see or ). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral ContraceptivesStarting Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible) in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:see Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3Table 1Table 5

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible) in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:

For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [ ], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) will in most cases need to be increased, by as much as 2 fold over the recommended target maintenance dose, in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level [ ]. (1) Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3see Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3

In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [ ], the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2 fold in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see or ) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation (“pill-free” week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) consistently occur during the “pill-free” week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the “pill-free” week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [ ], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be necessary. (2) Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3Table 1Table 5see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3

For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [ ], the maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2 week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [ ]. For women taking lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation [ ], no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be necessary. (3) Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3see Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3

: The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2 fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed. Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy

: Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 patients with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [ ], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response. Patients With Hepatic Impairmentsee Use in Specific Populations ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 8.612.3

: Initial doses of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see to or ); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [ ]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be used with caution in these patients. Patients With Renal ImpairmentTables 13Table 5see Use in Specific Populations ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 8.712.3

: For patients receiving lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) in combination with other AEDs, a reevaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed. Discontinuation StrategyEpilepsy:

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [ ]. see Warnings and Precautions ( ) 5.9

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). In clinical trials in patients with Bipolar Disorder, 2 patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible). However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these bipolar patients. Discontinuation of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [ ]. Bipolar Disorder:see Warnings and Precautions ( ) 5.9

2.2 Epilepsy – Adjunctive Therapy

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients greater than 12 years of age and patients 2 to 12 years of age. Within each of these age-groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AED or other concomitant medications ( for patients greater than 12 years of age and for patients 2 to 12 years of age). A weight-based dosing guide for patients 2 to 12 years of age on concomitant valproate is provided in . Table 1Table 2Table 3

Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in . Patients Over 12 Years of Age:Table 1
Table 1. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Over 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [ ]. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 † These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [ ]. Other drugs that have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [ ]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [ ]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Dosage and Administration ( ) 2.1
For Patients TAKING Valproate *
For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate †* For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone and NOT TAKING Valproate †* Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every day other 25 mg every day 50 mg/day Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg every day 50 mg/day (in 2 divided doses) 100 mg/day Week 5 onwards to maintenance Increase by 25 to 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Increase by 50 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Increase by 100 mg/day every 1 to 2 weeks Usual Maintenance Dose
100 to 200 mg/day with valproate alone

100 to 400 mg/day with valproate and other drugs that induceglucuronidation

(in 1 or 2 divided doses)

225 to 375 mg/day

(in 2 divided doses)

300 to 500 mg/day

(in 2 divided doses)

Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in . Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age:Table 2

Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

[ ]. The smallest available strength of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is 2 mg, and only whole tablets should be administered. If the calculated dose cannot be achieved using whole tablets, the dose should be rounded down to the nearest whole tabletsee How Supplied/Storage and Handling ( ) and 16Medication Guide
Table 2. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [ ]. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 † These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [ ]. Other drugs that have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [ ]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [ ]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Dosage and Administration ( ) 2.1 For Patients TAKING Valproate * For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate †* For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone and NOT TAKING Valproate †* Weeks 1 and 2 in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see for weight based dosing guide) 0.15 mg/kg/dayTable 3 in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 0.3 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 0.6 mg/kg/day Weeks 3 and 4 in 1 or 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet (see for weight based dosing guide) 0.3 mg/kg/dayTable 3 in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 0.6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses, rounded down to the nearest whole tablet 1.2 mg/kg/day Week 5 onwards to maintenance The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.3 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose The dose should be increased every 1 to 2 weeks as follows: calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day, round this amount down to the nearest whole tablet, and add this amount to the previously administered daily dose Usual Maintenance Dose (maximum 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses) with valproate alone 1 to 5 mg/kg/day1 to 3 mg/kg/day (maximum 300 mg/day in 2 divided doses) 4.5 to 7.5 mg/kg/day (maximum 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses) 5 to 15 mg/kg/day Maintenance dose in patients less than 30 kg May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response May need to be increased by as much as 50%, based on clinical response
Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing.
Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age Taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) With Epilepsy If the patient’s weight is Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of lamotrigine tablets, 2 mg and 5 mg Greater than And less than Weeks 1 and 2 Weeks 3 and 4 6.7 kg 14 kg 2 mg every day other 2 mg every day 14.1 kg 27 kg 2 mg every day 4 mg every day 27.1 kg 34 kg 4 mg every day 8 mg every day 34.1 kg 40 kg 5 mg every day 10 mg every day
The usual maintenance doses identified in and are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive studies in which the efficacy of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone , maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving , maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in through has not been established in controlled trials. Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for Epilepsy:Tables 12without valproatevalproate aloneTables 14

2.3 Epilepsy – Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to effect the conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) under conditions that ensure adequate seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible).

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in 2 divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should not be exceeded [see ]. Boxed Warning

After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) according to the guidelines in , the concomitant AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4 week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible):Table 1

The conversion regimen involves 4 steps outlined in . Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible):Table 4
Table 4. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine in Patients ≥ 16 Years of Age With Epilepsy Lamotrigine Valproate Step 1 Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according to guidelines in (if not already on 200 mg/day). Table 1 Maintain previous stable dose. Step 2 Maintain at 200 mg/day. Decrease to 500 mg/day by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week and then maintain the dose of 500 mg/day for 1 week. Step 3 Increase to 300 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for 1 week. Step 4 Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achieve maintenance dose of 500 mg/day. Discontinue.
No specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone, or valproate. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Antiepileptic Drugs Other Than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible):

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine, and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [ ]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in . If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should be doubled over a 2 week period in equal weekly increments (see ). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or other drugs such as rifampin that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2 week period in equal weekly decrements (see ). The dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated. see Clinical Studies ( ) 14.2Table 5Table 6Table 6

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) [ ]. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) should not be exceeded [see ]. Boxed Warning
Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine for Patients With Bipolar Disorder * Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [ ]. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 † These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [ ]. Other drugs that have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [ ]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [ ]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Dosage and Administration ( ) 2.1 For Patients TAKING Valproate * For Patients NOT TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate †* For Patients TAKING Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone and NOT TAKING Valproate †* Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every day other 25 mg daily 50 mg daily Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg daily 50 mg daily 100 mg daily, in divided doses Week 5 50 mg daily 100 mg daily 200 mg daily, in divided doses Week 6 100 mg daily 200 mg daily 300 mg daily, in divided doses Week 7 100 mg daily 200 mg daily up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine for Patients With Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications * These drugs induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance [ ]. Other drugs that have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives [ ]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [ ]. Patients on rifampin, or other drugs that induce lamotrigine glucuronidation and increase clearance, should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen as that used with anticonvulsants that have this effect. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3 see Dosage and Administration ( ) 2.1 † Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [ ]. see Drug Interactions ( ), Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 712.3
Discontinuation of Psychotropic Drugs (excluding Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate ) *†
After Discontinuation of Valproate † After Discontinuation of Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone * Current dose of Lamotrigine (mg/day) 100
Current dose of Lamotrigine (mg/day)

400
Week 1 Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 150 400 Week 2 Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 200 300 Week 3 onward Maintain current dose of lamotrigine 200 200
The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8 to 16 week open-label phase with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) was established in 2 randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [ ]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment. see Clinical Studies ( ) 14.2

2.5 Administration of Lamotrigine Tablets (Chewable, Dispersible)

Lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible) may be swallowed whole, chewed, or dispersed in water or diluted fruit juice. If the tablets are chewed, consume a small amount of water or diluted fruit juice to aid in swallowing.

To disperse lamotrigine tablets (chewable, dispersible), add the tablets to a small amount of liquid (1 teaspoon, or enough to cover the medication). Approximately 1 minute later, when the tablets are completely dispersed, swirl the solution and consume the entire quantity immediately. No attempt should be made to administer partial quantities of the dispersed tablets.
Pindolol

Pindolol

The dosage of pindolol tablets should be individualized. The recommended initial dose of pindolol tablets is 5 mg b.i.d. alone or in combination with other antihypertensive agents. An antihypertensive response usually occurs within the first week of treatment. Maximal response, however, may take as long as or occasionally longer than 2 weeks. If a satisfactory reduction in blood pressure does not occur within 3 to 4 weeks, the dose may be adjusted in increments of 10 mg/day at these intervals up to a maximum of 60 mg/day.
Sulindac

Sulindac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of sulindac and other treatment options before deciding to use sulindac. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with sulindac, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Sulindac should be administered orally twice a day with food. The maximum dosage is 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day are not recommended.

In osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended starting dosage is 150 mg twice a day. The dosage may be lowered or raised depending on the response.

A prompt response (within one week) can be expected in about one-half of patients with osteoarthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, and rheumatoid arthritis. Others may require longer to respond.

In acute painful shoulder (acute subacromial bursitis/supraspinatus tendinitis) and acute gouty arthritis, the recommended dosage is 200 mg twice a day. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the dosage may be reduced according to the response. In acute painful shoulder, therapy for 7-14 days is adequate. In acute gouty arthritis, therapy for 7 days is adequate. usuallyusually
Candesartan Cilexetil

Candesartan Cilexetil

2.1 Adult Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. Blood pressure response is dose related over the range of 2 to 32 mg. The usual recommended starting dose of candesartan cilexetil tablets is 16 mg once daily when it is used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume depleted. Candesartan cilexetil tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 8 mg to 32 mg. Larger doses do not appear to have a greater effect, and there is relatively little experience with such doses. Most of the antihypertensive effect is present within 2 weeks, and maximal blood pressure reduction is generally obtained within 4 to 6 weeks of treatment with candesartan cilexetil tablets.

Use in Hepatic Impairment: Initiate with 8 mg candesartan cilexetil tablets in patients with moderate hepatic insufficiency. Dosing recommendations cannot be provided for patients with severe hepatic insufficiency [see ]. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ( ) 12.3

Candesartan cilexetil tablets may be administered with or without food.

If blood pressure is not controlled by candesartan cilexetil tablets alone, a diuretic may be added. Candesartan cilexetil tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension 1 to < 17 Years of age

Candesartan cilexetil tablets may be administered once daily or divided into two equal doses. Adjust the dosage according to blood pressure response. For patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, particularly those with impaired renal function), initiate candesartan cilexetil tablets under close medical supervision and consider administration of a lower dose [see ]. WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ( ) 5.3

Children 1 to < 6 years of age:

The dose range is 0.05 to 0.4 mg/kg per day. The recommended starting dose is 0.20 mg/kg (oral suspension).

Children 6 to < 17 years of age:

For those less than 50 kg, the dose range is 2 to 16 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 4 to 8 mg.

For those greater than 50 kg, the dose range is 4 to 32 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 8 to 16 mg.

Doses above 0.4 mg/kg (1 to < 6 year olds) or 32 mg (6 to < 17 year olds) have not been studied in pediatric patients [see CLINICAL STUDIES ( )] 14.1.

An antihypertensive effect is usually present within 2 weeks, with full effect generally obtained within 4 weeks of treatment with candesartan cilexetil tablets.

Children < 1 year of age must not receive candesartan cilexetil tablets for hypertension.

All pediatric patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 30 ml/min/1.73m should not receive candesartan cilexetil tablets since candesartan cilexetil tablets have not been studied in this population [see ]. 2SPECIAL POPULATIONS (8)

For children who cannot swallow tablets, an oral suspension may be substituted as described below:

Preparation of Oral Suspension:

Candesartan cilexetil oral suspension can be prepared in concentrations within the range of 0.1 to 2 mg/mL. Typically, a concentration of 1 mg/mL will be suitable for the prescribed dose. Any strength of candesartan cilexetil tablets can be used in the preparation of the suspension.

Follow the steps below for preparation of the suspension. The number of tablets and volume of vehicle specified below will yield 160 mL of a 1 mg/mL suspension.
• Prepare the vehicle by adding equal volumes of Ora-Plus (80 mL) and Ora-Sweet SF (80 mL) or, alternatively, use, Ora-Blend SF (160 mL). * ® * ® *† ® • Add a small amount of vehicle to the required number of candesartan cilexetil tablets (five 32 mg tablets) and grind into a smooth paste using a mortar and pestle. • Add the paste to a preparation vessel of suitable size. • Rinse the mortar and pestle clean using the vehicle and add this to the vessel. Repeat, if necessary. • Prepare the final volume by adding the remaining vehicle. • Mix thoroughly. • Dispense into suitably sized amber PET bottles. • Label with an expiry date of 100 days and include the following instructions:
Store at 20º to 25ºC (68º to 77ºF). [See USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Use within 30 days after first opening. Do not use after the expiry date stated on the bottle.

Do not freeze.

Shake well before each use.

2.3 Adult Heart Failure

The recommended initial dose for treating heart failure is 4 mg once daily. The target dose is 32 mg once daily, which is achieved by doubling the dose at approximately 2-week intervals, as tolerated by the patient.
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of Naproxen Tablets, USP and other treatment options before deciding to use Naproxen Tablets, USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with Naproxen Tablets, USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen tablets, naproxen suspension, naproxen delayed-release tablets, and naproxen sodium tablets all circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen.

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) (see ). WARNINGS: Renal Effects

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis
Naproxen Tablets, USP 250 mg twice daily or 375 mg twice daily or 500 mg twice daily
During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Acute Gout

The recommended starting dose is 750 mg of Naproxen Tablets, USP followed by 250 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided.
Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin Chloride

Oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole with the aid of liquids, and must not be chewed, divided, or crushed.

Oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets may be administered with or without food.

2.1 Adults

The recommended starting dose of oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets is 5 or 10 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5-mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 30 mg/day). In general, dosage adjustment may proceed at approximately weekly intervals.

2.2 Pediatric Patients Aged 6 Years of Age and Older

The recommended starting dose of oxybutynin chloride extended-release tablets is 5 mg once daily at approximately the same time each day. Dosage may be adjusted in 5-mg increments to achieve a balance of efficacy and tolerability (up to a maximum of 20 mg/day).
Clopidogrel Bisulfate

Clopidogrel Bisulfate

2.1 Acute Coronary Syndrome

Clopidogrel tablets can be administered with or without food [see ] Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)
For patients with non-ST-elevation ACS (UA/NSTEMI), initiate clopidogrel tablets with a single 300 mg oral loading dose and then continue at 75 mg once daily. Initiate aspirin (75-325 mg once daily) and continue in combination with clopidogrel tablets [see ]. Clinical Studies (14.1) For patients with STEMI, the recommended dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, administered in combination with aspirin (75-325 mg once daily), with or without thrombolytics. Clopidogrel tablets may be initiated with or without a loading dose [see ]. Clinical Studies (14.1)
2.2 Recent MI, Recent Stroke, or Established Peripheral Arterial Disease

The recommended daily dose of clopidogrel tablets is 75 mg once daily orally, with or without food [see ]. ) Clinical Pharmacology (12.3

2.3 CYP2C19 Poor Metabolizers

CYP2C19 poor metabolizer status is associated with diminished antiplatelet response to clopidogrel. Although a higher dose regimen in poor metabolizers increases antiplatelet response [see ], an appropriate dose regimen for this patient population has not been established. ) Clinical Pharmacology (12.5

2.4 Use with Proton Pump Inhibitors (PPI)

Avoid using omeprazole or esomeprazole with clopidogrel tablets. Omeprazole and esomeprazole significantly reduce the antiplatelet activity of clopidogrel tablets. When concomitant administration of a PPI is required, consider using another acid-reducing agent with minimal or no CYP2C19 inhibitory effect on the formation of clopidogrel active metabolite [see , and ]. Warnings and Precautions ( ) 5.1Drug Interactions ( ) 7.1Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)
Midodrine Hydrochloride...

Midodrine Hydrochloride

The recommended dose of midodrine hydrochloride tablets is 10 mg, 3 times daily. Dosing should take place during the daytime hours when the patient needs to be upright, pursuing the activities of daily living. A suggested dosing schedule of approximately 4-hour intervals is as follows: shortly before or upon arising in the morning, midday, and late afternoon (not later than 6 PM). Doses may be given in 3-hour intervals, if required, to control symptoms, but not more frequently. Single doses as high as 20 mg have been given to patients, but severe and persistent systolic supine hypertension occurs at a high rate (about 45%) at this dose. In order to reduce the potential for supine hypertension during sleep, midodrine HCl tablets should not be given after the evening meal or less than 4 hours before bedtime. Total daily doses greater than 30 mg have been tolerated by some patients, but their safety and usefulness have not been studied systematically or established. Because of the risk of supine hypertension, midodrine HCl tablets should be continued only in patients who appear to attain symptomatic improvement during initial treatment.

The supine and standing blood pressure should be monitored regularly, and the administration of midodrine HCl tablets should be stopped if supine blood pressure increases excessively.

Because desglymidodrine is excreted renally, dosing in patients with abnormal renal function should be cautious; although this has not been systematically studied, it is recommended that treatment of these patients be initiated using 2.5 mg doses.

Dosing in children has not been adequately studied.

Blood levels of midodrine and desglymidodrine were similar when comparing levels in patients 65 or older vs. younger than 65 and when comparing males vs. females, suggesting dose modifications for these groups are not necessary.
Imipramine Hydrochlorid...

Imipramine Hydrochloride

Depression:

Lower dosages are recommended for elderly patients and adolescents. Lower dosages are also recommended for outpatients as compared to hospitalized patients who will be under close supervision. Dosage should be initiated at low level and increased gradually, noting carefully the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance. Following remission, maintenance medication may be required for a longer period of time, at the lowest dose that will maintain remission.

- Initially, 100 mg/day in divided doses gradually increased to 200 mg/day as required. If no response after two weeks, increase to 250 to 300 mg/day. Usual Adult Dose: Hospitalized patients

Initially, 75 mg/day increased to 150 mg/day. Dosages over 200 mg/day are not recommended. Maintenance, 50 to 150 mg/day. Outpatients:

Initially, 30 to 40 mg/day; it is generally not necessary to exceed 100 mg/day Adolescent and geriatric patients:

Initially, an oral dose of 25 mg/day should be tried in children aged 6 and older. Medication should be given one hour before bedtime. If a satisfactory response does not occur within one week, increase the dose to 50 mg nightly in children under 12 years; children over 12 may receive up to 75 mg nightly. A daily dose greater than 75 mg does not enhance efficacy and tends to increase side effects. Evidence suggests that in early night bedwetters, the drug is more effective given earlier and in divided amounts, i.e., 25 mg in midafternoon, repeated at bedtime. Consideration should be given to instituting a drug-free period following an adequate therapeutic trial with a favorable response. Dosage should be tapered off gradually rather than abruptly discontinued; this may reduce the tendency to relapse. Children who relapse when the drug is discontinued do not always respond to a subsequent course of treatment. Childhood Enuresis:

A dose of 2.5 mg/kg/day should not be exceeded. ECG changes of unknown significance have been reported in pediatric patients with doses twice this amount.

The safety and effectiveness of imipramine hydrochloride as temporary adjunctive therapy for nocturnal enuresis in children less than 6 years of age has not been established.
Prandin

Prandin

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of type 2 diabetes with PRANDIN.

The patient's blood glucose should be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels are of value in monitoring the patient's longer term response to therapy.

Short-term administration of PRANDIN may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well controlled on diet.

PRANDIN doses are usually taken within 15 minutes of the meal but time may vary from immediately preceding the meal to as long as 30 minutes before the meal.

Starting Dose

For patients not previously treated or whose HbA is < 8%, the starting dose should be 0.5 mg with each meal. For patients previously treated with blood glucose-lowering drugs and whose HbA is ≥ 8%, the initial dose is 1 or 2 mg with each meal preprandially (see previous paragraph). 1c1c

Dose Adjustment

Dosing adjustments should be determined by blood glucose response, usually fasting blood glucose. Postprandial glucose levels testing may be clinically helpful in patients whose pre-meal blood glucose levels are satisfactory but whose overall glycemic control (HbA ) is inadequate. The preprandial dose should be doubled up to 4 mg with each meal until satisfactory blood glucose response is achieved. At least one week should elapse to assess response after each dose adjustment. 1c

The recommended dose range is 0.5 mg to 4 mg taken with meals. PRANDIN may be dosed preprandially 2, 3, or 4 times a day in response to changes in the patient’s meal pattern. The maximum recommended daily dose is 16 mg.

Patient Management

Long-term efficacy should be monitored by measurement of HbA levels approximately every 3 months. Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy including hypoglycemia. When hypoglycemia occurs in patients taking a combination of PRANDIN and a thiazolidinedione or PRANDIN and metformin, the dose of PRANDIN should be reduced. 1c

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

When PRANDIN is used to replace therapy with other oral hypoglycemic agents, PRANDIN may be started on the day after the final dose is given. Patients should then be observed carefully for hypoglycemia due to potential overlapping of drug effects. When transferred from longer half-life sulfonylurea agents (e.g., chlorpropamide) to repaglinide, close monitoring may be indicated for up to one week or longer.

Combination Therapy

If PRANDIN monotherapy does not result in adequate glycemic control, metformin or a thiazolidinedione may be added. If metformin or thiazolidinedione monotherapy does not provide adequate control, PRANDIN may be added. The starting dose and dose adjustments for PRANDIN combination therapy is the same as for PRANDIN monotherapy. The dose of each drug should be carefully adjusted to determine the minimal dose required to achieve the desired pharmacologic effect. Failure to do so could result in an increase in the incidence of hypoglycemic episodes. Appropriate monitoring of FPG and HbA measurements should be used to ensure that the patient is not subjected to excessive drug exposure or increased probability of secondary drug failure. 1c
Hydrochlorothiazide

Hydrochlorothiazide

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response. Use the smallest dosage necessary to achieve the required response.

Adults

For Edema

The usual adult dosage is 25 mg to 100 mg daily as a single or divided dose. Many patients with edema respond to intermittent therapy, i.e., administration on alternate days or on 3 to 5 days each week. With an intermittent schedule, excessive response and the resulting undesirable electrolyte imbalance are less likely to occur.

For Control of Hypertension

The usual initial dose in adults is 25 mg daily given as a single dose. The dose may be increased to 50 mg daily, given as a single or two divided doses. Doses above 50 mg are often associated with marked reductions in serum potassium (see also ). PRECAUTIONS

Patients usually do not require doses in excess of 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide daily when used concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents.

Infants and Children

For Diuresis and for Control of Hypertension

The usual pediatric dosage is 0.5 mg to 1 mg per pound (1 to 2 mg/kg) per day in single or two divided doses, not to exceed 37.5 mg per day in infants up to 2 years of age or 100 mg per day in children 2 to 12 years of age. In infants less than 6 months of age, doses up to 1.5 mg per pound (3 mg/kg) per day in two divided doses may be required (see ). PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use
Ursodiol

Ursodiol

Gallstone Dissolution

The recommended dose for ursodiol treatment of radiolucent gallbladder stones is 8-10 mg/kg/day given in 2 or 3 divided doses.

Ultrasound images of the gallbladder should be obtained at 6-month intervals for the first year of ursodiol therapy to monitor gallstone response. If gallstones appear to have dissolved, ursodiol therapy should be continued and dissolution confirmed on a repeat ultrasound examination within 1-3 months. Most patients who eventually achieve complete stone dissolution will show partial or complete dissolution at the first on-treatment reevaluation. If partial stone dissolution is not seen by 12 months of ursodiol therapy, the likelihood of success is greatly reduced.

Gallstone Prevention

The recommended dosage of ursodiol for gallstone prevention in patients undergoing rapid weight loss is 600 mg/day (300 mg b.i.d.).
Pioglitazone

Pioglitazone

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone tablets should be taken once daily and can be taken without regard to meals.

The recommended starting dose for patients without congestive heart failure is 15 mg or 30 mg once daily.

The recommended starting dose for patients with congestive heart failure (NYHA Class I or II) is 15 mg once daily.

The dose can be titrated in increments of 15 mg up to a maximum of 45 mg once daily based on glycemic response as determined by HbA1c.

After initiation of pioglitazone tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure . [see and ] Boxed WarningWarnings and Precautions (5.2)

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone tablets is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions . [see and ] Warnings and Precautions (5.3)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Coadministration with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone tablets and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone tablets is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see and ]. Drug Interactions (7.1)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)
Cimetidine

Cimetidine

Duodenal Ulcer

Active Duodenal Ulcer

Clinical studies have indicated that suppression of nocturnal acid is the most important factor in duodenal ulcer healing (see , ). This is supported by recent clinical trials (see , ). Therefore, there is no apparent rationale, except for familiarity with use, for treating with anything other than a once-daily at bedtime oral dosage regimen. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYAcid SecretionClinical TrialsActive duodenal ulcer

In a U.S. oral dose-ranging study of 400 mg at bedtime, 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime, a continuous dose response relationship for ulcer healing was demonstrated.

However, 800 mg at bedtime is the dose of choice for most patients, as it provides a high healing rate (the difference between 800 mg at bedtime and 1600 mg at bedtime being small), maximal pain relief, a decreased potential for drug interactions (see , ) and maximal patient convenience. Patients unhealed at four weeks, or those with persistent symptoms, have been shown to benefit from two to four weeks of continued therapy. PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

It has been shown that patients who both have an endoscopically demonstrated ulcer larger than 1 cm and are also heavy smokers (i.e., smoke one pack of cigarettes or more per day) are more difficult to heal. There is some evidence which suggests that more rapid healing can be achieved in this subpopulation with cimetidine 1600 mg at bedtime. While early pain relief with either 800 mg at bedtime or 1600 mg at bedtime is equivalent in all patients, 1600 mg at bedtime provides an appropriate alternative when it is important to ensure healing within four weeks for this subpopulation. Alternatively, approximately 94% of all patients will also heal in eight weeks with cimetidine 800 mg at bedtime.

Other cimetidine oral regimens in the U.S. which have been shown to be effective are: 300 mg four times daily, with meals and at bedtime, the original regimen with which U.S. physicians have the most experience, and 400 mg twice daily, in the morning and at bedtime (see , ). Clinical TrialsActive duodenal ulcer

Concomitant antacids should be given as needed for relief of pain. However, simultaneous administration of oral cimetidine and antacids is not recommended, since antacids have been reported to interfere with the absorption of cimetidine.

While healing with cimetidine often occurs during the first week or two, treatment should be continued for 4 to 6 weeks unless healing has been demonstrated by endoscopic examination.

Maintenance Therapy for Duodenal Ulcer

In those patients requiring maintenance therapy, the recommended adult oral dose is 400 mg at bedtime.

Active Benign Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dosage for short-term treatment of active benign gastric ulcer is 800 mg at bedtime, or 300 mg four times a day with meals and at bedtime. Controlled clinical studies were limited to six weeks of treatment (see ). 800 mg at bedtime is the preferred regimen for most patients based upon convenience and reduced potential for drug interactions. Symptomatic response to cimetidine dose not preclude the presence of a gastric malignancy. It is important to follow gastric ulcer patients to assure rapid progress to complete healing. Clinical Trials

Erosive Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dosage for the treatment of erosive esophagitis that has been diagnosed by endoscopy is 1600 mg daily in divided doses (800 mg twice daily or 400 mg four times daily) for 12 weeks. The use of cimetidine beyond 12 weeks has not been established.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome)

Recommended adult oral dosage: 300 mg four times a day with meals at bedtime. In some patients it may be necessary to administer higher doses more frequently. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs, but should not usually exceed 2400 mg per day and should continue as long as clinically needed.

Dosage Adjustments for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Patients with severely impaired renal function have been treated with cimetidine. However, such dosage has been very limited. On the basis of this experience the recommended dosage is 300 mg every 12 hours orally. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 8 hours or even further with caution. In severe renal failure, accumulation may occur and the lower frequency of dosing comparable with an adequate patient response should be used. When liver impairment is also present, further reductions in dosage may be necessary. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating cimetidine. Ideally, the dosage schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.
Gabitril

Gabitril

General:

The blood level of tiagabine obtained after a given dose depends on whether the patient also is receiving a drug that induces the metabolism of tiagabine. The presence of an inducer means that the attained blood level will be substantially reduced. Dosing should take the presence of concomitant medications into account.

GABITRIL (tiagabine HCl) is recommended as adjunctive therapy for the treatment of partial seizures in patients 12 years and older.

The following dosing recommendations apply to all patients taking GABITRIL:
GABITRIL is given orally and should be taken with food. Do not use a loading dose of GABITRIL. Dose titration: Rapid escalation and/or large dose increments of GABITRIL should not be used. Missed dose(s): If the patient forgets to take the prescribed dose of GABITRIL at the scheduled time, the patient should not attempt to make up for the missed dose by increasing the next dose. If a patient has missed multiple doses, patient should refer back to his or her physician for possible re-titration as clinically indicated. Dosage adjustment of GABITRIL should be considered whenever a change in patient’s enzyme-inducing status occurs as a result of the addition, discontinuation, or dose change of the enzyme-inducing agent.
Induced Adults and Adolescents 12 Years or Older:

The following dosing recommendations apply to patients who are already taking enzyme-inducing antiepilepsy drugs (AEDs) (e.g., carbamazepine, phenytoin, primidone, and phenobarbital). Such patients are considered induced patients when administering GABITRIL.

In adolescents 12 to 18 years old, GABITRIL should be initiated at 4 mg once daily. Modification of concomitant antiepilepsy drugs is not necessary, unless clinically indicated. The total daily dose of GABITRIL may be increased by 4 mg at the beginning of Week 2. Thereafter, the total daily dose may be increased by 4 to 8 mg at weekly intervals until clinical response is achieved or up to 32 mg/day. The total daily dose should be given in divided doses two to four times daily. Doses above 32 mg/day have been tolerated in a small number of adolescent patients for a relatively short duration.

In adults, GABITRIL should be initiated at 4 mg once daily. Modification of concomitant antiepilepsy drugs is not necessary, unless clinically indicated. The total daily dose of GABITRIL may be increased by 4 to 8 mg at weekly intervals until clinical response is achieved or, up to 56 mg/day. The total daily dose should be given in divided doses two to four times daily. Doses above 56 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in adequate and well-controlled clinical trials.

Experience is limited in patients taking total daily doses above 32 mg/day using twice daily dosing. A typical dosing titration regimen for patients taking enzyme-inducing AEDs (induced patients) is provided in Table 7.
Table 7: Typical Dosing Titration Regimen for Patients Already Taking Enzyme-Inducing AEDs Initiation and Titration Schedule Total Daily Dose Week 1 Initiate at 4 mg once daily 4 mg/day Week 2 Increase total daily dose by 4 mg 8 mg/day (in two divided doses) Week 3 Increase total daily dose by 4 mg 12 mg/day (in three divided doses) Week 4 Increase total daily dose by 4 mg 16 mg/day (in two to four divided doses) Week 5 Increase total daily dose by 4 to 8 mg 20 to 24 mg/day (in two to four divided doses) Week 6 Increase total daily dose by 4 to 8 mg 24 to 32 mg/day (in two to four divided doses) 32 to 56 mg/day in two to four divided doses Usual Adult Maintenance Dose in Induced Patients:
Non-Induced Adults and Adolescents 12 Years or Older:

The following dosing recommendations apply to patients who are taking only non-enzyme-inducing AEDs. Such patients are considered non-induced patients:

Following a given dose of GABITRIL, the estimated plasma concentration in the non-induced patients is more than twice that in patients receiving enzyme-inducing agents. Use in non-induced patients requires lower doses of GABITRIL. These patients may also require a slower titration of GABITRIL compared to that of induced patients (see and ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, PharmacokineticsPRECAUTIONS, General, Use in Non-Induced Patients
Zaroxolyn

Zaroxolyn

Effective dosage of ZAROXOLYN should be individualized according to indication and patient response. A single daily dose is recommended. Therapy with ZAROXOLYN should be titrated to gain an initial therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose possible to maintain the desired therapeutic response.

Usual Single Daily Dosage Schedules

Suitable initial dosages will usually fall in the ranges given.

Edema of cardiac failure:   ZAROXOLYN 5 to 20 mg once daily.

Edema of renal disease:   ZAROXOLYN 5 to 20 mg once daily.

Mild to moderate essential hypertension:   ZAROXOLYN 2½ to 5 mg once daily.

New patients – MYKROX Tablets (metolazone tablets, USP) (see MYKROX package circular). If considered desirable to switch patients currently on ZAROXOLYN to MYKROX, the dose should be determined by titration starting at one tablet (1/2 mg) once daily and increasing to two tablets (1 mg) once daily if needed.

Treatment Of Edematous States

The time interval required for the initial dosage to produce an effect may vary. Diuresis and saluresis usually begin within one hour and persist for 24 hours or longer. When a desired therapeutic effect has been obtained, it may be advisable to reduce the dose if possible. The daily dose depends on the severity of the patient's condition, sodium intake, and responsiveness. A decision to change the daily dose should be based on the results of thorough clinical and laboratory evaluations. If antihypertensive drugs or diuretics are given concurrently with ZAROXOLYN, more careful dosage adjustment may be necessary. For patients who tend to experience paroxysmal nocturnal dyspnea, it may be advisable to employ a larger dose to ensure prolongation of diuresis and saluresis for a full 24-hour period.

Treatment Of Hypertension

The time interval required for the initial dosage regimen to show effect may vary from three or four days to three to six weeks in the treatment of elevated blood pressure. Doses should be adjusted at appropriate intervals to achieve maximum therapeutic effect.
Anagrelide Hydrochlorid...

Anagrelide Hydrochloride

Treatment with Anagrelide Hydrochloride Capsules should be initiated under close medical supervision. The recommended starting dosage of Anagrelide Hydrochloride Capsules for adult patients is 0.5 mg qid or 1 mg bid (2 capsules of 0.5 mg twice a day), which should be maintained for at least one week. Starting doses in pediatric patients have ranged from 0.5 mg per day to 0.5 mg qid. As there are limited data on the appropriate starting dose for pediatric patients, an initial dose of 0.5 mg per day is recommended. In both adult and pediatric patients, dosage should then be adjusted to the lowest effective dosage required to reduce and maintain platelet count below 600,000/µL, and ideally to the normal range. The dosage should be increased by not more than 0.5 mg/day in any one week. Maintenance dosing is not expected to be different between adult and pediatric patients. Dosage should not exceed 10 mg/day or 2.5 mg in a single dose (see ). PRECAUTIONS

There are no special requirements for dosing the geriatric population.

It is recommended that patients with moderate hepatic impairment start anagrelide therapy at a dose of 0.5 mg/day and be maintained for a minimum of one week with careful monitoring of cardiovascular effects. The dosage increment must not exceed more than 0.5 mg/day in any one week. The potential risks and benefits of anagrelide therapy in a patient with mild or moderate impairment of hepatic function should be assessed before treatment is commenced. Use of anagrelide in patients with severe hepatic impairment has not been studied. Use of anagrelide in patients with severe hepatic impairment is contraindicated (see ). CONTRAINDICATIONS

To monitor the effect of anagrelide and prevent the occurrence of thrombocytopenia, platelet counts should be performed every two days during the first week of treatment and at least weekly thereafter until the maintenance dosage is reached.

Typically, platelet count begins to respond within 7 to 14 days at the proper dosage. The time to complete response, defined as platelet count ≤ 600,000/µL, ranged from 4 to 12 weeks. Most patients will experience an adequate response at a dose of 1.5 to 3 mg/day. Patients with known or suspected heart disease, renal insufficiency, or hepatic dysfunction should be monitored closely.
Cilostazol

Cilostazol

The recommended dosage of Cilostazol Tablets USP is 100 mg b.i.d. taken at least half an hour before or two hours after breakfast and dinner. A dose of 50 mg b.i.d. should be considered during coadministration of such inhibitors of CYP3A4 as ketoconazole, itraconazole, erythromycin and diltiazem, and during coadministration of such inhibitors of CYP2C19 as omeprazole.

Patients may respond as early as 2 to 4 weeks after the initiation of therapy, but treatment for up to 12 weeks may be needed before a beneficial effect is experienced.

Discontinuation of Therapy

The available data suggest that the dosage of Cilostazol Tablets USP can be reduced or discontinued without rebound (i.e., platelet hyperaggregability).
Hydrocortisone

Hydrocortisone

The initial dosage of hydrocortisone tablets may vary from 20 mg to 240 mg of hydrocortisone per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated. In situations of less severity lower doses will generally suffice while in selected patients higher initial doses may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until a satisfactory response is noted. If after a reasonable period of time there is a lack of satisfactory clinical response, hydrocortisone should be discontinued and the patient transferred to other appropriate therapy. IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. It should be kept in mind that constant monitoring is needed in regard to drug dosage. Included in the situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient's individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment; in this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of hydrocortisone for a period of time consistent with the patient's condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually, rather than abruptly.

Multiple Sclerosis

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (20 mg of hydrocortisone is equivalent to 5 mg of prednisolone).

Multiple Sclerosis

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (20 mg of hydrocortisone is equivalent to 5 mg of prednisolone).
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of naproxen, naproxen sodium and other treatment options before deciding to use naproxen and naproxen sodium tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with naproxen or naproxen sodium the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (ie, tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen and naproxen sodium circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 30 minutes in patients taking naproxen sodium and within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen.

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see and ). WARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) (see ). WARNINGS: Renal Effects
Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis Naproxen or 500 mg
250 mg

or 375 mg
twice daily
twice daily

twice daily
Naproxen sodium 550 mg (naproxen 500 mg with 50 mg sodium)
275 mg (naproxen 250 mg with 25 mg sodium)
twice daily
twice daily

During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/ analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Juvenile Arthritis

The recommended total daily dose of naproxen is approximately 10 mg/kg given in 2 divided doses (ie, 5 mg/kg given twice a day).

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis

The recommended starting dose is 550 mg of naproxen sodium as naproxen sodium tablet followed by 550 mg every 12 hours or 275 mg every 6 to 8 hours as required. The initial total daily dose should not exceed 1375 mg of naproxen sodium. Thereafter, the total daily dose should not exceed 1100 mg of naproxen sodium. Because the sodium salt of naproxen is more rapidly absorbed, naproxen sodium tablets are recommended for the management of acute painful conditions when prompt onset of pain relief is desired. Naproxen may also be used for initial treatment of acute pain (see ). , CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYINDICATIONS AND USAGE

Acute Gout

The recommended starting dose is 750 mg of naproxen followed by 250 mg every 8 hours until the attack has subsided. Naproxen sodium may also be used at a starting dose of 825 mg followed by 275 mg every 8 hours.
Flavoxate Hydrochloride...

Flavoxate Hydrochloride

Adults and children over 12 years of age:

One or two 100 mg tablets 3 or 4 times a day. With improvement of symptoms, the dose may be reduced. This drug cannot be recommended for infants and children under 12 years of age because safety and efficacy have not been demonstrated in this age group.
Ropinirole

Ropinirole

General Dosing Considerations for Parkinson's Disease and RLS

Ropinirole can be taken with or without food. Patients may be advised that taking ropinirole with food may reduce the occurrence of nausea. However, this has not been established in controlled clinical trials.

If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.

Geriatric Use

Pharmacokinetic studies demonstrated a reduced clearance of ropinirole in the elderly (see ). Dose adjustment is not necessary since the dose is individually titrated to clinical response. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole were not altered in patients with moderate renal impairment (see ). Therefore, no dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment. The use of ropinirole in patients with severe renal impairment has not been studied. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Hepatic Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole have not been studied in patients with hepatic impairment. Since patients with hepatic impairment may have higher plasma levels and lower clearance, ropinirole should be titrated with caution in these patients.

Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level and gradually titrated to therapeutic response. The dosage should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of nausea, dizziness, somnolence, and dyskinesia.

The recommended starting dose for Parkinson’s Disease is 0.25 mg three times daily. Based on individual patient response, dosage should then be titrated with weekly increments as described in Table 5. After week 4, if necessary, daily dosage may be increased by 1.5 mg/day on a weekly basis up to a dose of 9 mg/day, and then by up to 3 mg/day weekly to a total dose of 24 mg/day. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been tested in clinical trials.
Table 5: Ascending-Dose Schedule of Ropinirole for Parkinson's Disease
Week

Dosage

Total Daily Dose

1

0.25 mg three times daily

0.75 mg

2

0.5 mg three times daily

1.5 mg

3

0.75 mg three times daily

2.25 mg

4

1 mg three times daily

3 mg

When ropinirole is administered as adjunct therapy to L-dopa, the concurrent dose of L-dopa may be decreased gradually as tolerated. L-dopa dosage reduction was allowed during the advanced Parkinson’s disease (with L-dopa) study if dyskinesias or other dopaminergic effects occurred. Overall, reduction of L-dopa dose was sustained in 87% of patients treated with ropinirole and in 57% of patients on placebo. On average the L-dopa dose was reduced by 31% in patients treated with ropinirole.

Ropinirole for Parkinson’s disease patients should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period. The frequency of administration should be reduced from three times daily to twice daily for 4 days. For the remaining 3 days, the frequency should be reduced to once daily prior to complete withdrawal of ropinirole.

Dosing for Restless Legs Syndrome

In all clinical trials, the dose for ropinirole was initiated at 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. Patients were titrated based on clinical response and tolerability.

The recommended adult starting dosage for RLS is 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. After 2 days, the dosage can be increased to 0.5 mg once daily and to 1 mg once daily at the end of the first week of dosing, then as shown in Table 6 as needed to achieve efficacy. For RLS, the safety and effectiveness of doses greater than 4 mg once daily have not been established.
Table 6: Dose Titration Schedule for RLS
Day/Week

Dosage to Be Taken Once Daily, 1 to 3 Hours Before Bedtime

Days 1 and 2

0.25 mg

Days 3-7

0.5 mg

Week 2

1 mg

Week 3

1.5 mg

Week 4

2 mg

Week 5

2.5 mg

Week 6

3 mg

Week 7

4 mg

In clinical trials of patients being treated for RLS with doses up to 4 mg once daily, ropinirole was discontinued without a taper.
Methazolamide

Methazolamide

The effective therapeutic dose administered varies from 50 mg to 100 mg two or three times daily. The drug may be used concomitantly with miotic and osmotic agents.
Dipentum

Dipentum

The usual dosage in adults for maintenance of remission is 1.0 g/day in two divided doses.
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

General

Propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules provide propranolol hydrochloride in a sustained-release capsule for administration once daily. If patients are switched from propranolol hydrochloride tablets to propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules, care should be

taken to assure that the desired therapeutic effect is maintained. Propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules should not be considered a simple mg-for-mg substitute for propranolol hydrochloride tablets. Propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules have different kinetics and produces lower blood levels. Retitration may be necessary, especially to maintain effectiveness at the end of the 24-hour dosing interval.

Hypertension

The usual initial dosage is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. The dosage may be increased to 120 mg once daily or higher until adequate blood pressure control is achieved. The usual maintenance dosage is 120 to 160 mg once daily. In some instances a dosage of 640 mg may be required. The time needed for full hypertensive response to a given dosage is variable and may range from a few days to several weeks.

Angina Pectoris

Starting with 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily, dosage should be gradually increased at three- to seven-day intervals until optimal response is obtained. Although individual patients may respond at any dosage level, the average optimal dosage appears to be 160 mg once daily. In angina pectoris, the value and safety of dosage exceeding 320 mg per day have not been established.

If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce dosage gradually over a period of a few weeks (see “ ”). WARNINGS

Migraine

The initial oral dose is 80 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily. The usual effective dose range is 160 to 240 mg once daily. The dosage may be increased gradually to achieve optimal migraine prophylaxis. If a satisfactory response is not obtained within four to six weeks after reaching the maximal dose, propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsule therapy should be discontinued. It may be advisable to withdraw the drug gradually over a period of several weeks depending on the patient's age, comorbidity, and dose of propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

Hypertrophic Subaortic Stenosis

The usual dosage is 80 to 160 mg propranolol hydrochloride extended-release capsules once daily.
Quinidine Gluconate

Quinidine Gluconate

The dose of quinidine delivered by quinidine gluconate extended-release tablets may be titrated by breaking a tablet in half. If tablets are crushed or chewed, their extended-release properties will be lost.

The dosage of quinidine varies considerably depending upon the general condition and the cardiovascular state of the patient.

Conversion of atrial fibrillation/flutter to sinus rhythm

Especially in patients with known structural heart disease or other risk factors for toxicity, initiation or dose-adjustment of treatment with quinidine gluconate should generally be performed in a setting where facilities and personnel for monitoring and resuscitation are continuously available. Patients with symptomatic atrial fibrillation/flutter should be treated with quinidine gluconate only after ventricular rate control (e.g., with digitalis or β-blockers) has failed to provide satisfactory control of symptoms.

Adequate trials have not identified an optimal regimen of quinidine gluconate for conversion of atrial fibrillation/flutter to sinus rhythm. In one reported regimen, the patient first receives two tablets (648 mg; 403 mg of quinidine base) of quinidine gluconate every eight hours. If this regimen has not resulted in conversion after 3 or 4 doses, then the dose is cautiously increased. If, at any point during administration, the QRS complex widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration; the QT interval widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration and is then longer than 500 ms; P waves disappear; or the patient develops significant tachycardia, symptomatic bradycardia, or hypotension, then quinidine gluconate is discontinued, and other means of conversion (e.g., direct-current cardioversion) are considered. c

In another regimen sometimes used, the patient receives one tablet (324 mg; 202 mg of quinidine base) every eight hours for two days; then two tablets every twelve hours for two days; and finally two tablets every eight hours for up to four days. The four-day stretch may come at one of the lower doses if, in the judgment of the physician, the lower dose is the highest one that will be tolerated. The criteria for discontinuation of treatment with quinidine gluconate are the same as in the other regimen.

Reduction in the frequency of relapse into atrial fibrillation/flutter

In a patient with a history of frequent symptomatic episodes of atrial fibrillation/flutter, the goal of therapy with quinidine gluconate should be an increase in the average time between episodes. In most patients, the tachyarrhythmia during therapy with quinidine gluconate, and a single recurrence should not be interpreted as therapeutic failure. will recur

Especially in patients with known structural heart disease or other risk factors for toxicity, initiation or dose-adjustment of treatment with quinidine gluconate should generally be performed in a setting where facilities and personnel for monitoring and resuscitation are continuously available. Monitoring should be continued for two or three days after initiation of the regimen on which the patient will be discharged.

Therapy with quinidine gluconate should be begun with one tablet (324 mg; 202 mg of quinidine base) every eight or twelve hours. If this regimen is well tolerated, if the serum quinidine level is still well within the laboratory's therapeutic range, and if the average time between arrhythmic episodes has not been satisfactorily increased, then the dose may be cautiously raised. The total daily dosage should be reduced if the QRS complex widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration; the QT interval widens to 130% of its pre-treatment duration and is then longer than 500 ms; P waves disappear; or the patient develops significant tachycardia, symptomatic bradycardia, or hypotension. c

Suppression of life-threatening ventricular arrhythmias

Dosing regimens for the use of quinidine gluconate in suppressing life-threatening ventricular arrhythmias have not been adequately studied. Described regimens have generally been similar to the regimen described just above for the prophylaxis of symptomatic atrial fibrillation/flutter. Where possible, therapy should be guided by the results of programmed electrical stimulation and/or Holter monitoring with exercise.
Ropinirole

Ropinirole

General Dosing Considerations for Parkinson's Disease and RLS

Ropinirole can be taken with or without food. Patients may be advised that taking ropinirole with food may reduce the occurrence of nausea. However, this has not been established in controlled clinical trials.

If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.

Geriatric Use

Pharmacokinetic studies demonstrated a reduced clearance of ropinirole in the elderly (see ). Dose adjustment is not necessary since the dose is individually titrated to clinical response. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole were not altered in patients with moderate renal impairment (see ). Therefore, no dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment. The use of ropinirole in patients with severe renal impairment has not been studied. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Hepatic Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole have not been studied in patients with hepatic impairment. Since patients with hepatic impairment may have higher plasma levels and lower clearance, ropinirole should be titrated with caution in these patients.

Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level and gradually titrated to therapeutic response. The dosage should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of nausea, dizziness, somnolence, and dyskinesia.

The recommended starting dose for Parkinson’s Disease is 0.25 mg three times daily. Based on individual patient response, dosage should then be titrated with weekly increments as described in Table 5. After week 4, if necessary, daily dosage may be increased by 1.5 mg/day on a weekly basis up to a dose of 9 mg/day, and then by up to 3 mg/day weekly to a total dose of 24 mg/day. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been tested in clinical trials.
Table 5: Ascending-Dose Schedule of Ropinirole for Parkinson's Disease
Week

Dosage

Total Daily Dose

1

0.25 mg three times daily

0.75 mg

2

0.5 mg three times daily

1.5 mg

3

0.75 mg three times daily

2.25 mg

4

1 mg three times daily

3 mg

When ropinirole is administered as adjunct therapy to L-dopa, the concurrent dose of L-dopa may be decreased gradually as tolerated. L-dopa dosage reduction was allowed during the advanced Parkinson’s disease (with L-dopa) study if dyskinesias or other dopaminergic effects occurred. Overall, reduction of L-dopa dose was sustained in 87% of patients treated with ropinirole and in 57% of patients on placebo. On average the L-dopa dose was reduced by 31% in patients treated with ropinirole.

Ropinirole for Parkinson’s disease patients should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period. The frequency of administration should be reduced from three times daily to twice daily for 4 days. For the remaining 3 days, the frequency should be reduced to once daily prior to complete withdrawal of ropinirole.

Dosing for Restless Legs Syndrome

In all clinical trials, the dose for ropinirole was initiated at 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. Patients were titrated based on clinical response and tolerability.

The recommended adult starting dosage for RLS is 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. After 2 days, the dosage can be increased to 0.5 mg once daily and to 1 mg once daily at the end of the first week of dosing, then as shown in Table 6 as needed to achieve efficacy. For RLS, the safety and effectiveness of doses greater than 4 mg once daily have not been established.
Table 6: Dose Titration Schedule for RLS
Day/Week

Dosage to Be Taken Once Daily, 1 to 3 Hours Before Bedtime

Days 1 and 2

0.25 mg

Days 3-7

0.5 mg

Week 2

1 mg

Week 3

1.5 mg

Week 4

2 mg

Week 5

2.5 mg

Week 6

3 mg

Week 7

4 mg

In clinical trials of patients being treated for RLS with doses up to 4 mg once daily, ropinirole was discontinued without a taper.
Ropinirole

Ropinirole

General Dosing Considerations for Parkinson's Disease and RLS

Ropinirole can be taken with or without food. Patients may be advised that taking ropinirole with food may reduce the occurrence of nausea. However, this has not been established in controlled clinical trials.

If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.

Geriatric Use

Pharmacokinetic studies demonstrated a reduced clearance of ropinirole in the elderly (see ). Dose adjustment is not necessary since the dose is individually titrated to clinical response. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole were not altered in patients with moderate renal impairment (see ). Therefore, no dosage adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment. The use of ropinirole in patients with severe renal impairment has not been studied. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Hepatic Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of ropinirole have not been studied in patients with hepatic impairment. Since patients with hepatic impairment may have higher plasma levels and lower clearance, ropinirole should be titrated with caution in these patients.

Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level and gradually titrated to therapeutic response. The dosage should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of nausea, dizziness, somnolence, and dyskinesia.

The recommended starting dose for Parkinson’s Disease is 0.25 mg three times daily. Based on individual patient response, dosage should then be titrated with weekly increments as described in Table 5. After week 4, if necessary, daily dosage may be increased by 1.5 mg/day on a weekly basis up to a dose of 9 mg/day, and then by up to 3 mg/day weekly to a total dose of 24 mg/day. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been tested in clinical trials.
Table 5: Ascending-Dose Schedule of Ropinirole for Parkinson's Disease
Week

Dosage

Total Daily Dose

1

0.25 mg three times daily

0.75 mg

2

0.5 mg three times daily

1.5 mg

3

0.75 mg three times daily

2.25 mg

4

1 mg three times daily

3 mg

When ropinirole is administered as adjunct therapy to L-dopa, the concurrent dose of L-dopa may be decreased gradually as tolerated. L-dopa dosage reduction was allowed during the advanced Parkinson’s disease (with L-dopa) study if dyskinesias or other dopaminergic effects occurred. Overall, reduction of L-dopa dose was sustained in 87% of patients treated with ropinirole and in 57% of patients on placebo. On average the L-dopa dose was reduced by 31% in patients treated with ropinirole.

Ropinirole for Parkinson’s disease patients should be discontinued gradually over a 7-day period. The frequency of administration should be reduced from three times daily to twice daily for 4 days. For the remaining 3 days, the frequency should be reduced to once daily prior to complete withdrawal of ropinirole.

Dosing for Restless Legs Syndrome

In all clinical trials, the dose for ropinirole was initiated at 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. Patients were titrated based on clinical response and tolerability.

The recommended adult starting dosage for RLS is 0.25 mg once daily, 1 to 3 hours before bedtime. After 2 days, the dosage can be increased to 0.5 mg once daily and to 1 mg once daily at the end of the first week of dosing, then as shown in Table 6 as needed to achieve efficacy. For RLS, the safety and effectiveness of doses greater than 4 mg once daily have not been established.
Table 6: Dose Titration Schedule for RLS
Day/Week

Dosage to Be Taken Once Daily, 1 to 3 Hours Before Bedtime

Days 1 and 2

0.25 mg

Days 3-7

0.5 mg

Week 2

1 mg

Week 3

1.5 mg

Week 4

2 mg

Week 5

2.5 mg

Week 6

3 mg

Week 7

4 mg

In clinical trials of patients being treated for RLS with doses up to 4 mg once daily, ropinirole was discontinued without a taper.
Clomipramine Hydrochlor...

Clomipramine Hydrochloride

The treatment regimens described below are based on those used in controlled clinical trials of clomipramine in 520 adults, and 91 children and adolescents with OCD. During initial titration, clomipramine should be given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects. The goal of this initial titration phase is to minimize side effects by permitting tolerance to side effects to develop or allowing the patient time to adapt if tolerance does not develop.

Because both CMI and its active metabolite, DMI, have long elimination half-lives, the prescriber should take into consideration the fact that steady-state plasma levels may not be achieved until 2 to 3 weeks after dosage change ( ). Therefore, after initial titration, it may be appropriate to wait 2 to 3 weeks between further dosage adjustments. seeCLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Initial Treatment/Dose Adjustment (Adults)

Treatment with clomipramine should be initiated at a dosage of 25 mg daily and gradually increased, as tolerated, to approximately 100 mg during the first 2 weeks. During initial titration, clomipramine should be given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects. Thereafter, the dosage may be increased gradually over the next several weeks, up to a maximum of 250 mg daily. After titration, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime to minimize daytime sedation.

Initial Treatment/Dose Adjustment (Children and Adolescents)

As with adults, the starting dose is 25 mg daily and should be gradually increased (also given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects) during the first 2 weeks, as tolerated, up to a daily maximum of 3 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is smaller. Thereafter, the dosage may be increased gradually over the next several weeks up to a daily maximum of 3 mg/kg or 200 mg, whichever is smaller ( ). As with adults, after titration, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime to minimize daytime sedation. seePRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment (Adults, Children, and Adolescents)

While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue clomipramine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of clomipramine after 10 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to 1 year without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment. During maintenance, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with clomipramine. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping clomipramine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders ( ). seeCONTRAINDICATIONS

Use of Clomipramine With Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start clomipramine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered ( ). seeCONTRAINDICATIONS

In some cases, a patient already receiving clomipramine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, clomipramine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for two weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with clomipramine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue ( ). seeWARNINGS

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with clomipramine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use ( ). seeWARNINGS
Loxapine

Loxapine

Loxapine Capsules USP are administered, usually in divided doses, two to four times a day. Daily dosage (in terms of base equivalents) should be adjusted to the individual patient’s needs as assessed by the severity of symptoms and previous history of response to antipsychotic drugs.

Oral Administration

Initial dosage of 10 mg twice daily is recommended, although in severely disturbed patients initial dosage up to a total of 50 mg daily may be desirable. Dosage should then be increased fairly rapidly over the first seven to ten days until there is effective control of symptoms of schizophrenia. The usual therapeutic and maintenance range is 60 mg to 100 mg daily. However, as with other drugs used to treat schizophrenia, some patients respond to lower dosage and others require higher dosage for optimal benefit. Daily dosage higher than 250 mg is not recommended.

Maintenance Therapy

For maintenance therapy, dosage should be reduced to the lowest level compatible with symptom control; many patients have been maintained satisfactorily at dosages in the range of 20 to 60 mg daily.
Disulfiram

Disulfiram

Disulfiram should never be administered until the patient has abstained from alcohol for at least 12 hours.

Initial Dosage Schedule:

In the first phase of treatment, a of 500 mg daily is given in a single dose for one to two weeks. Although usually taken in the morning, disulfiram may be taken on retiring by patients who experience a sedative effect. Alternatively, to minimize, or eliminate, the sedative effect, dosage may be adjusted downward. maximum

Maintenance Regimen:

The average maintenance dose is 250 mg daily (range, 125 to 500 mg), it should not exceed 500 mg daily.

Occasionally patients, while seemingly on adequate maintenance doses of disulfiram, report that they are able to drink alcoholic beverages with impunity and without any symptomatology. All appearances to the contrary, such patients must be presumed to be disposing of their tablets in some manner without actually taking them. Until such patients have been observed reliably taking their daily disulfiram tablets (preferably crushed and well mixed with liquid), it cannot be concluded that disulfiram is ineffective. Note:

Duration of Therapy:

The daily, uninterrupted administration of disulfiram must be continued until the patient is fully recovered socially and a basis for permanent self-control is established. Depending on the individual patient, maintenance therapy may be required for months or even years.

Trial with Alcohol:

During early experience with disulfiram, it was thought advisable for each patient to have at least one supervised alcohol-drug reaction. More recently, the test reaction has been largely abandoned. Furthermore, such a test reaction should never be administered to a patient over 50 years of age. A clear, detailed and convincing description of the reaction is felt to be sufficient in most cases.

However, where a test reaction is deemed necessary, the suggested procedure is as follows:

After the first one to two weeks’ therapy with 500 mg daily, a drink of 15 mL (1/2 oz) of 100 proof whiskey, or equivalent, is taken slowly. This test dose of alcoholic beverage may be repeated once only, so that the total dose does not exceed 30 mL (1 oz) of whiskey. Once a reaction develops, no more alcohol should be consumed. Such tests should be carried out only when the patient is hospitalized, or comparable supervision and facilities, including oxygen, are available.

Management of Disulfiram-Alcohol Reaction:

In severe reactions, whether caused by an excessive test dose or by the patient’s unsupervised ingestion of alcohol, supportive measures to restore blood pressure and treat shock should be instituted. Other recommendations include: oxygen, carbogen (95% oxygen and 5% carbon dioxide), vitamin C intravenously in massive doses (1 g) and ephedrine sulfate. Antihistamines have also been used intravenously. Potassium levels should be monitored, particularly in patients on digitalis, since hypokalemia has been reported.
Niaspan

Niaspan

NIASPAN should be taken at bedtime, after a low-fat snack, and doses should be individualized according to patient response. Therapy with NIASPAN must be initiated at 500 mg at bedtime in order to reduce the incidence and severity of side effects which may occur during early therapy. The recommended dose escalation is shown in below. Table 1
Table 1. Recommended Dosing Week(s) Daily dose NIASPAN Dosage INITIAL TITRATION 1 to 4 500 mg 1 NIASPAN 500 mg tablet at bedtime SCHEDULE 5 to 8 1000 mg 1 NIASPAN 1000 mg tablet or 2 NIASPAN 500 mg tablets at bedtime * 1500 mg 2 NIASPAN 750 mg tablets or 3 NIASPAN 500 mg tablets at bedtime * 2000 mg 2 NIASPAN 1000 mg tablets or 4 NIASPAN 500 mg tablets at bedtime * After Week 8, titrate to patient response and tolerance. If response to 1000 mg daily is inadequate, increase dose to 1500 mg daily; may subsequently increase dose to 2000 mg daily. Daily dose should not be increased more than 500 mg in a 4-week period, and doses above 2000 mg daily are not recommended. Women may respond at lower doses than men.
Maintenance Dose

The daily dosage of NIASPAN should not be increased by more than 500 mg in any 4-week period. The recommended maintenance dose is 1000 mg (two 500 mg tablets or one 1000 mg tablet) to 2000 mg (two 1000 mg tablets or four 500 mg tablets) once daily at bedtime. Doses greater than 2000 mg daily are not recommended. Women may respond at lower NIASPAN doses than men . [see Clinical Studies ] (14.2)

Single-dose bioavailability studies have demonstrated that two of the 500 mg and one of the 1000 mg tablet strengths are interchangeable but three of the 500 mg and two of the 750 mg tablet strengths are not interchangeable.

If lipid response to NIASPAN alone is insufficient or if higher doses of NIASPAN are not well tolerated, some patients may benefit from combination therapy with a bile acid binding resin or statin , below and . [see Drug Interactions (7.3)Concomitant TherapyClinical Studies , ] (14.314.4)

Flushing of the skin may be reduced in frequency or severity by pretreatment with aspirin (up to the recommended dose of 325 mg taken 30 minutes prior to NIASPAN dose). Tolerance to this flushing develops rapidly over the course of several weeks. Flushing, pruritus, and gastrointestinal distress are also greatly reduced by slowly increasing the dose of niacin and avoiding administration on an empty stomach. Concomitant alcoholic, hot drinks or spicy foods may increase the side effects of flushing and pruritus and should be avoided around the time of NIASPAN ingestion. [see Adverse Reactions ] (6.1)

Equivalent doses of NIASPAN should not be substituted for sustained-release (modified-release, timed-release) niacin preparations or immediate-release (crystalline) niacin . Patients previously receiving other niacin products should be started with the recommended NIASPAN titration schedule (see ), and the dose should subsequently be individualized based on patient response. [see Warnings and Precautions ] (5)Table 1

If NIASPAN therapy is discontinued for an extended period, reinstitution of therapy should include a titration phase (see ). Table 1

NIASPAN tablets should be taken whole and should not be broken, crushed or chewed before swallowing.

Concomitant Therapy

Concomitant Therapy with Lovastatin or Simvastatin

Patients already receiving a stable dose of lovastatin or simvastatin who require further TG-lowering or HDL-raising (e.g., to achieve NCEP non-HDL-C goals), may receive concomitant dosage titration with NIASPAN per NIASPAN recommended initial titration schedule . For patients already receiving a stable dose of NIASPAN who require further LDL-lowering (e.g., to achieve NCEP LDL-C goals), the usual recommended starting dose of lovastatin and simvastatin is 20 mg once a day. Dose adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more. Combination therapy with NIASPAN and lovastatin or NIASPAN and simvastatin should not exceed doses of 2000 mg NIASPAN and 40 mg lovastatin or simvastatin daily. [see Dosage and Administration ] (2)

Dosage in Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

Use of NIASPAN in patients with renal or hepatic impairment has not been studied. NIASPAN is contraindicated in patients with significant or unexplained hepatic dysfunction. NIASPAN should be used with caution in patients with renal impairment . [see Warnings and Precautions ] (5)
Ergoloid Mesylates

Ergoloid Mesylates

1 mg three times a day.

Alleviation of symptoms is usually gradual and results may not be observed for 3–4 weeks.
Irbesartan

Irbesartan

Irbesartan tablets USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents and with or without food.

Hypertension

The recommended initial dose of irbesartan tablets USP is 150 mg once daily. Patients requiring further reduction in blood pressure should be titrated to 300 mg once daily.

A low dose of a diuretic may be added, if blood pressure is not controlled by irbesartan tablets USP alone. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see , ). Patients not adequately treated by the maximum dose of 300 mg once daily are unlikely to derive additional benefit from a higher dose or twice-daily dosing. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYClinical Studies

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients, or in patients with hepatic impairment or mild to severe renal impairment.

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The recommended target maintenance dose is 300 mg once daily. There are no data on the clinical effects of lower doses of irbesartan tablets USP on diabetic nephropathy (see , ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYClinical Studies

Volume- and Salt-Depleted Patients

A lower initial dose of irbesartan tablets USP (75 mg) is recommended in patients with depletion of intravascular volume or salt (e.g., patients treated vigorously with diuretics or on hemodialysis) (see , ). WARNINGSHypotension in Volume- or Salt-Depleted Patients
Aciphex

Aciphex

2.1 Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one ACIPHEX 20 mg Delayed-Release tablet to be taken once daily for four to eight weeks [ ]. For those patients who have not healed after 8 weeks of treatment, an additional 8-week course of ACIPHEX may be considered. see Indications and Usage ( ) 1.1

2.2 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive or Ulcerative GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one ACIPHEX 20 mg Delayed-Release tablet to be taken once daily [ ]. see Indications and Usage ( ) 1.2

2.3 Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one ACIPHEX 20 mg Delayed-Release tablet to be taken once daily for 4 weeks [ ]. If symptoms do not resolve completely after 4 weeks, an additional course of treatment may be considered. The recommended adolescent dosing is one ACIPHEX 20 mg Delayed-Release tablet to be taken once daily for 8 weeks. see Indications and Usage ( ) 1.3

2.4 Healing of Duodenal Ulcers in Adults

The recommended adult oral dose is one ACIPHEX 20 mg Delayed-Release tablet to be taken once daily after the morning meal for a period up to four weeks [ ]. Most patients with duodenal ulcer heal within four weeks. A few patients may require additional therapy to achieve healing. see Indications and Usage ( ) 1.5

2.5 Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence in Adults Helicobacter pylori
TABLE 1 THREE DRUG REGIMEN a All three medications should be taken twice daily with the morning and evening meals. It is important that patients comply with the full 7-day regimen [ ]. asee Clinical Studies ( ) 14.5 ACIPHEX Delayed-Release Tablet 20 mg Twice Daily for 7 Days Amoxicillin 1000 mg Twice Daily for 7 Days Clarithromycin 500 mg Twice Daily for 7 Days
2.6 Treatment of Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions, Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome in Adults

The dosage of ACIPHEX in patients with pathologic hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Some patients may require divided doses. Doses up to 100 mg QD and 60 mg BID have been administered. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with ACIPHEX for up to one year.

2.7 Short-term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD in Adolescent Patients 12 Years of Age and Older

The recommended oral dose for adolescents 12 years of age and older is one 20 mg Delayed-Release Tablet once daily for up to 8 weeks [ and ]. see Use in Specific Populations ( ) 8.4Clinical Studies ( ) 14.7

2.8 Treatment of GERD in Pediatric Patients 1 to 11 Years of Age

The recommended dosage of ACIPHEX Sprinkle for pediatric patients 1 to 11 years of age by body weight is:
Less than 15 kg: 5 mg once daily for up to 12 weeks with the option to increase to 10 mg if inadequate response [ ]. see Clinical Studies ( ) 14.7 15 kg or more: 10 mg once daily for up to 12 weeks [ ]. see Clinical Studies ( ) 14.7
2.9 Elderly, Renal and Hepatic Impaired Patients

No dosage adjustment is necessary in elderly patients, in patients with renal disease or in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. Administration of rabeprazole to patients with mild to moderate liver impairment resulted in increased exposure and decreased elimination. Due to the lack of clinical data on rabeprazole in patients with severe hepatic impairment, caution should be exercised in those patients.

2.10 Administration Recommendations
TABLE 2 Administration Recommendations Formulation Population Instructions Delayed-Release Tablet Adults and adolescents 12 years of age and older Swallow tablets whole. Do not chew, crush or split tablets. Tablets can be taken with or without food. Delayed-Release Capsule Pediatric patients 1 to 11 years of age The dose should be taken 30 minutes before a meal. The granules should not be chewed or crushed. Open capsule and sprinkle entire contents on a small amount of soft food (e.g. applesauce, fruit or vegetable based baby food, or yogurt) or empty contents into a small amount of liquid (e.g. infant formula, apple juice, or pediatric electrolyte solution). The whole dose should be taken within 15 minutes of preparation. Food or liquid should be at or below room temperature. Do not store mixture for future use.
Meloxicam

Meloxicam

2.1 General Instructions

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of meloxicam tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use meloxicam tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ( )]. 5.4

After observing the response to initial therapy with meloxicam tablets, adjust the dose to suit an individual patient's needs.

In adults, the maximum recommended daily oral dose of meloxicam tablets are 15 mg regardless of formulation. In patients with hemodialysis, a maximum daily dosage of 7.5 mg is recommended [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ( ), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS ( ) AND CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ( )]. 5.68.712.3

Meloxicam may be taken without regard to timing of meals.

2.2 Osteoarthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of osteoarthritis the recommended starting and maintenance oral dose of meloxicam tablets is 7.5 mg once daily. Some patients may receive additional benefit by increasing the dose to 15 mg once daily.

2.3 Rheumatoid Arthritis

For the relief of the signs and symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended starting and maintenance oral dose of meloxicam tablets is 7.5 mg once daily. Some patients may receive additional benefit by increasing the dose to 15 mg once daily.

2.4 Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis (JRA) Pauciarticular and Polyarticular Course

To improve dosing accuracy in smaller weight children, the use of the meloxicam oral suspension is recommended.
Montelukast Sodium

Montelukast Sodium

2.1 Asthma

Montelukast sodium should be taken once daily in the evening. The following doses are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients less than 12 months of age with asthma have not been established.

There have been no clinical trials in patients with asthma to evaluate the relative efficacy of morning versus evening dosing. The pharmacokinetics of montelukast are similar whether dosed in the morning or evening. Efficacy has been demonstrated for asthma when montelukast was administered in the evening without regard to time of food ingestion.

2.2 Exercise-Induced Bronchoconstriction (EIB) in Patients 15 Years of Age and Older

For prevention of EIB, a single 10 mg dose of montelukast should be taken at least 2 hours before exercise. An additional dose of montelukast should not be taken within 24 hours of a previous dose. Patients already taking montelukast sodium daily for another indication (including chronic asthma) should not take an additional dose to prevent EIB. All patients should have available for rescue a short-acting β-agonist. Safety and effectiveness in patients younger than 15 years of age have not been established. Daily administration of montelukast sodium for the chronic treatment of asthma has not been established to prevent acute episodes of EIB.

Pediatric use information for patients ages 6 to 14 years of age for acute prevention of exercise-induced bronchoconstriction (EIB) is approved for Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp’s montelukast tablet products. However, due to Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

2.3 Allergic Rhinitis

For allergic rhinitis, montelukast sodium should be taken once daily. Efficacy was demonstrated for seasonal allergic rhinitis when montelukast was administered in the morning or the evening without regard to time of food ingestion. The time of administration may be individualized to suit patient needs.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of seasonal allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 2 years of age with seasonal allergic rhinitis have not been established.

The following doses for the treatment of symptoms of perennial allergic rhinitis are recommended:

For adults and adolescents 15 years of age and older: one 10 mg tablet.

For pediatric patients 6 to 14 years of age: one 5 mg chewable tablet.

For pediatric patients 2 to 5 years of age: one 4 mg chewable tablet.

Safety and effectiveness in pediatric patients younger than 6 months of age with perennial allergic rhinitis have not been established.

2.4 Asthma and Allergic Rhinitis

Patients with both asthma and allergic rhinitis should take only one montelukast sodium dose daily in the evening.
Ranexa

Ranexa

2.1 Dosing Information

Initiate RANEXA dosing at 500 mg twice daily and increase to 1000 mg twice daily, as needed, based on clinical symptoms. Take RANEXA with or without meals. Swallow RANEXA tablets whole; do not crush, break, or chew.

The maximum recommended daily dose of RANEXA is 1000 mg twice daily.

If a dose of RANEXA is missed, take the prescribed dose at the next scheduled time; do not double the next dose.

2.2 Dose Modification

Dose adjustments may be needed when RANEXA is taken in combination with certain other drugs . Limit the maximum dose of RANEXA to 500 mg twice daily in patients on moderate CYP3A inhibitors such as diltiazem, verapamil, and erythromycin. Use of RANEXA with strong CYP3A inhibitors is contraindicated Use of P-gp inhibitors, such as cyclosporine, may increase exposure to RANEXA. Titrate RANEXA based on clinical response [see ] Drug Interactions (7.1)[see , ]. Contraindications (4)Drug Interactions (7.1)[see ]. Drug Interactions (7.1)
Coreg Cr

Coreg Cr

COREG CR is an extended-release capsule intended for once‑daily administration. Patients controlled with immediate‑release carvedilol tablets alone or in combination with other medications may be switched to COREG CR extended‑release capsules based on the total daily doses shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Conversion
Daily Dose of Immediate-Release Carvedilol Tablets

Daily Dose of COREG CR Capsules a

6.25 mg (3.125 mg twice daily)

10 mg once daily

12.5 mg (6.25 mg twice daily)

20 mg once daily

25 mg (12.5 mg twice daily)

40 mg once daily

50 mg (25 mg twice daily)

80 mg once daily

When switching from carvedilol 12.5 mg or 25 mg twice daily, a starting dose of COREG CR 20 mg or 40 mg once daily, respectively, may be warranted for elderly patients or those at increased risk of hypotension, dizziness, or syncope. Subsequent titration to higher doses should, as appropriate, be made after an interval of at least 2 weeks. a

COREG CR should be taken once daily in the morning with food. COREG CR should be swallowed as a whole capsule. COREG CR and/or its contents should not be crushed, chewed, or taken in divided doses.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should not be warm because it could affect the modified-release properties of this formulation. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use. Absorption of the beads sprinkled on other foods has not been tested. Alternative Administration:

2.1 Heart Failure

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND CLOSELY MONITORED BY A PHYSICIAN DURING UP‑TITRATION. Prior to initiation of COREG CR, it is recommended that fluid retention be minimized. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 10 mg once daily for 2 weeks. Patients who tolerate a dose of 10 mg once daily may have their dose increased to 20, 40, and 80 mg over successive intervals of at least 2 weeks. Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated.

Patients should be advised that initiation of treatment and (to a lesser extent) dosage increases may be associated with transient symptoms of dizziness or lightheadedness (and rarely syncope) within the first hour after dosing. Thus, during these periods, they should avoid situations such as driving or hazardous tasks, where symptoms could result in injury. Vasodilatory symptoms often do not require treatment, but it may be useful to separate the time of dosing of COREG CR from that of the ACE inhibitor or to reduce temporarily the dose of the ACE inhibitor. The dose of COREG CR should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure or vasodilation have been stabilized.

Fluid retention (with or without transient worsening heart failure symptoms) should be treated by an increase in the dose of diuretics.

The dose of COREG CR should be reduced if patients experience bradycardia (heart rate <55 beats/minute).

Episodes of dizziness or fluid retention during initiation of COREG CR can generally be managed without discontinuation of treatment and do not preclude subsequent successful titration of, or a favorable response to, COREG CR.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP‑TITRATION. Treatment with COREG CR may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that COREG CR be started at 20 mg once daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 40 mg once daily, then again to the target dose of 80 mg once daily. A lower starting dose may be used (10 mg once daily) and/or the rate of up‑titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β‑blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 20 mg once daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 40 mg once daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure 1 hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 80 mg once daily if tolerated and needed. Although not specifically studied, it is anticipated the full antihypertensive effect of COREG CR would be seen within 7 to 14 days as had been demonstrated with immediate‑release carvedilol. Total daily dose should not exceed 80 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

COREG CR should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment . [see Contraindications (4)]

2.5 Geriatric Use

When switching elderly patients (65 years of age or older) who are taking the higher doses of immediate-release carvedilol tablets (25 mg twice daily) to COREG CR, a lower starting dose (40 mg) of COREG CR is recommended to minimize the potential for dizziness, syncope, or hypotension . Patients who have switched and who tolerate COREG CR should, as appropriate, have their dose increased after an interval of at least 2 weeks . [see Dosage and Administration (2)][see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]
Pentasa

Pentasa

The recommended dosage for the induction of remission and the symptomatic treatment of mildly to moderately active ulcerative colitis is 1g (4 PENTASA 250 mg capsules or 2 PENTASA 500 mg capsules) 4 times a day for a total daily dosage of 4g. Treatment duration in controlled trials was up to 8 weeks.
Abilify

Abilify

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.2)

Maintenance Treatment

The recommended dose for maintenance treatment, whether as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy, is the same dose needed to stabilize patients during acute treatment, both for adult and pediatric patients. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES ]. (14.2)

2.3 Adjunctive Treatment of Major Depressive Disorder

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder

Pediatric Patients

Dose Selection: The efficacy of aripiprazole has been established in the treatment of pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age with irritability associated with autistic disorder at doses of 5 mg/day to 15 mg/day. The dosage of ABILIFY should be individualized according to tolerability and response.

Dosing should be initiated at 2 mg/day. The dose should be increased to 5 mg/day, with subsequent increases to 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day if needed. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.4)

. Maintenance Treatment: In a clinical trial with ABILIFY conducted in children and adolescents (6 to 17 years of age), the efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of irritability associated with autistic disorder was not established [see Use in Specific Populations ]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment (8.4)

2.5 Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia or Bipolar Mania (Intramuscular Injection)

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment

Dosage adjustments in adults are not routinely indicated on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment status . [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS - ] (8.48.10)
When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-half of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) When concomitant administration of potential CYP2D6 inhibitors such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine with aripiprazole occurs, aripiprazole dose should be reduced at least to one-half of its normal dose. When the CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . When adjunctive ABILIFY is administered to patients with major depressive disorder, ABILIFY should be administered without dosage adjustment as specified in . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with potential CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin) and CYP2D6 (such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine) is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 and/or CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be increased Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ]. (7.1) Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (eg, a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong, moderate, or weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6: The aripiprazole dose in PM patients should initially be reduced to one-half (50%) of the usual dose and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. The dose of aripiprazole for PM patients who are administered a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose . Dosing recommendation in patients who are classified as CYP2D6 poor metabolizers (PM): [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3) When a potential CYP3A4 inducer such as carbamazepine is added to aripiprazole therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be doubled. Additional dose increases should be based on clinical evaluation. When the CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to 10 mg to 15 mg . Dosage adjustment for patients taking potential CYP3A4 inducers: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1)
2.7 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution . [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3)

2.8 Dosing of Orally Disintegrating Tablets

The dosing for ABILIFY Orally Disintegrating Tablets is the same as for the oral tablets . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION , , , and ] (2.12.22.32.4)

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.2)

Maintenance Treatment

The recommended dose for maintenance treatment, whether as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy, is the same dose needed to stabilize patients during acute treatment, both for adult and pediatric patients. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES ]. (14.2)

2.3 Adjunctive Treatment of Major Depressive Disorder

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder

Pediatric Patients

Dose Selection: The efficacy of aripiprazole has been established in the treatment of pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age with irritability associated with autistic disorder at doses of 5 mg/day to 15 mg/day. The dosage of ABILIFY should be individualized according to tolerability and response.

Dosing should be initiated at 2 mg/day. The dose should be increased to 5 mg/day, with subsequent increases to 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day if needed. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.4)

. Maintenance Treatment: In a clinical trial with ABILIFY conducted in children and adolescents (6 to 17 years of age), the efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of irritability associated with autistic disorder was not established [see Use in Specific Populations ]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment (8.4)

2.5 Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia or Bipolar Mania (Intramuscular Injection)

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment

Dosage adjustments in adults are not routinely indicated on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment status . [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS - ] (8.48.10)
When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-half of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) When concomitant administration of potential CYP2D6 inhibitors such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine with aripiprazole occurs, aripiprazole dose should be reduced at least to one-half of its normal dose. When the CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . When adjunctive ABILIFY is administered to patients with major depressive disorder, ABILIFY should be administered without dosage adjustment as specified in . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with potential CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin) and CYP2D6 (such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine) is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 and/or CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be increased Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ]. (7.1) Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (eg, a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong, moderate, or weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6: The aripiprazole dose in PM patients should initially be reduced to one-half (50%) of the usual dose and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. The dose of aripiprazole for PM patients who are administered a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose . Dosing recommendation in patients who are classified as CYP2D6 poor metabolizers (PM): [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3) When a potential CYP3A4 inducer such as carbamazepine is added to aripiprazole therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be doubled. Additional dose increases should be based on clinical evaluation. When the CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to 10 mg to 15 mg . Dosage adjustment for patients taking potential CYP3A4 inducers: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1)
2.7 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution . [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3)

2.8 Dosing of Orally Disintegrating Tablets

The dosing for ABILIFY Orally Disintegrating Tablets is the same as for the oral tablets . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION , , , and ] (2.12.22.32.4)
Colestipol Hydrochlorid...

Colestipol Hydrochloride

For adults, micronized colestipol hydrochloride tablets are recommended in doses of 2 to 16 grams/day given once or in divided doses. The starting dose should be 2 grams once or twice daily. Dosage increases of 2 grams, once or twice daily should occur at 1- or 2-month intervals. Appropriate use of lipid profiles as per NCEP guidelines including LDL-C and triglycerides, is advised so that optimal but not excessive doses are used to obtain the desired therapeutic effect on LDL-C level. If the desired therapeutic effect is not obtained at a dose of 2 to 16 grams/day with good compliance and acceptable side effects, combined therapy or alternate treatment should be considered.

Micronized colestipol hydrochloride tablets must be taken one at a time and be promptly swallowed whole, using plenty of water or other appropriate liquid. Do not cut, crush, or chew the tablets. Patients should take other drugs at least one hour before or four hours after micronized colestipol hydrochloride tablets to minimize possible interference with their absorption. (See .) DRUG INTERACTIONS

Before Administration of Micronized Colestipol Hydrochloride Tablets
Define the type of hyperlipoproteinemia, as described in NCEP guidelines. Institute a trial of diet and weight reduction. Establish baseline serum total and LDL-C and triglyceride levels.
During Administration of Micronized Colestipol Hydrochloride Tablets
The patient should be carefully monitored clinically, including serum cholesterol and triglyceride levels. Periodic determinations of serum cholesterol levels as outlined in the NCEP guidelines should be done to confirm a favorable initial and long-term response. Failure of total or LDL-C to fall within the desired range should lead one to first examine dietary and drug compliance. If these are deemed acceptable, combined therapy or alternate treatment should be considered. Significant rise in triglyceride level should be considered as indication for dose reduction, drug discontinuation, or combined or alternate therapy.
Campral

Campral

The recommended dose of Campral is two 333 mg tablets (each dose should total 666 mg) taken three times daily. A lower dose may be effective in some patients.

Although dosing may be done without regard to meals, dosing with meals was employed during clinical trials and is suggested in those patients who regularly eat three meals daily.

Treatment with Campral should be initiated as soon as possible after the period of alcohol withdrawal, when the patient has achieved abstinence, and should be maintained if the patient relapses. Campral should be used as part of a comprehensive psychosocial treatment program.

2.1 Dosage in Renal Impairment

For patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30-50 mL/min), a starting dose of one 333 mg tablet taken three times daily is recommended. Campral is contraindicated in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance of ≤30 mL/min) [ and ]. see Contraindications ( ), Warnings and Precautions ( ), Use in Specific Populations ( ), 4.25.18.6Clinical Pharmacology ( ) 12.3
Felbamate

Felbamate

Felbamate tablets have been studied as monotherapy and adjunctive therapy in adults and as adjunctive therapy in children with seizures associated with Lennox-Gastaut syndrome. As felbamate tablets are added to or substituted for existing AEDs, it is strongly recommended to reduce the dosage of those AEDs in the range of 20% to 33% to minimize side effects (see subsection). Drug Interactions

Felbamate should be used with caution in patients with renal dysfunction. In the renally impaired, starting and maintenance doses should be reduced by one-half (See / and ). Adjunctive therapy with medications which affect felbamate plasma concentrations, especially AEDs, may warrant further reductions in felbamate daily doses in patients with renal dysfunction. Dosage Adjustment in the Renally Impaired:CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPharmacokineticsPRECAUTIONS

Adults (14 years of age and over)

The majority of patients received 3600 mg/day in clinical trials evaluating its use as both monotherapy and adjunctive therapy.

(Initial therapy) Felbamate tablets have not been systematically evaluated as initial monotherapy. Initiate felbamate tablets at 1200 mg/day in divided doses three or four times daily. The prescriber is advised to titrate previously untreated patients under close clinical supervision, increasing the dosage in 600-mg increments every 2 weeks to 2400 mg/day based on clinical response and thereafter to 3600 mg/day if clinically indicated. Monotherapy:

Initiate felbamate tablets at 1200 mg/day in divided doses three or four times daily. Reduce the dosage of concomitant AEDs by one-third at initiation of felbamate tablets therapy. At week 2, increase the felbamate tablet dosage to 2400 mg/day while reducing the dosage of other AEDs up to an additional one-third of their original dosage. At week 3, increase the felbamate tablet dosage up to 3600 mg/day and continue to reduce the dosage of other AEDs as clinically indicated. Conversion to Monotherapy:

Felbamate tablets should be added at 1200 mg/day in divided doses three or four times daily while reducing present AEDs by 20% in order to control plasma concentrations of concurrent phenytoin, valproic acid, phenobarbital, and carbamazepine and its metabolites. Further reductions of the concomitant AEDs dosage may be necessary to minimize side effects due to drug interactions. Increase the dosage of felbamate by 1200 mg/day increments at weekly intervals to 3600 mg/day. Most side effects seen during felbamate tablet adjunctive therapy resolve as the dosage of concomitant AEDs is decreased. Adjunctive Therapy:
Table 6 Dosage Table (adults) Dosage reduction of concomitant AEDs REDUCE original dose by 20% to 33%* WEEK 1 REDUCE original dose by up to an additional 1/3* WEEK 2 REDUCE as clinically indicated WEEK 3 Felbamate TabletDosage 1200 mg/day Initial dose 2400 mg/day Therapeutic dosage range 3600 mg/day Therapeutic dosage range *See and sections. AdjunctiveConversion to Monotherapy
While the above felbamate tablet conversion guidelines may result in a felbamate tablet 3600 mg/day dose within 3 weeks, in some patients titration to a 3600 mg/day felbamate tablet dose has been achieved in as little as 3 days with appropriate adjustment of other AEDs.

Children with Lennox-Gastaut Syndrome (Ages 2 to 14 years)

Felbamate tablets should be added at 15 mg/kg/day in divided doses three or four times daily while reducing present AEDs by 20% in order to control plasma levels of concurrent phenytoin, valproic acid, phenobarbital, and carbamazepine and its metabolites. Further reductions of the concomitant AEDs dosage may be necessary to minimize side effects due to drug interactions. Increase the dosage of felbamate tablets by 15 mg/kg/day increments at weekly intervals to 45 mg/kg/day. Most side effects seen during felbamate tablet adjunctive therapy resolve as the dosage of concomitant AEDs is decreased. Adjunctive Therapy:
Diovan

Diovan

2.1     Adult Hypertension

The recommended starting dose of Diovan (valsartan) is 80 mg or 160 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-depleted. Patients requiring greater reductions may be started at the higher dose. Diovan may be used over a dose range of 80 mg to 320 mg daily, administered once a day.

The antihypertensive effect is substantially present within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. If additional antihypertensive effect is required over the starting dose range, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 320 mg or a diuretic may be added. Addition of a diuretic has a greater effect than dose increases beyond 80 mg.

No initial dosage adjustment is required for elderly patients, for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment, or for patients with mild or moderate liver insufficiency. Care should be exercised with dosing of Diovan in patients with hepatic or severe renal impairment.

Diovan may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Diovan may be administered with or without food.

2.2     Pediatric Hypertension 6 to 16 Years of Age

For children who can swallow tablets, the usual recommended starting dose is 1.3 mg/kg once daily (up to 40 mg total). The dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses higher than 2.7 mg/kg (up to 160 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients 6 to 16 years old.

For children who cannot swallow tablets, or children for whom the calculated dosage (mg/kg) does not correspond to the available tablet strengths of Diovan, the use of a suspension is recommended. Follow the suspension preparation instructions below (see ) to administer valsartan as a suspension. When the suspension is replaced by a tablet, the dose of valsartan may have to be increased. The exposure to valsartan with the suspension is 1.6 times greater than with the tablet. Preparation of Suspension

No data are available in pediatric patients either undergoing dialysis or with a glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m . 2[see Pediatric Use (8.4)]

Diovan is not recommended for patients <6 years old . [see Adverse Reactions (6.1), Clinical Studies (14.1)]

Preparation of Suspension (for160 mL of a 4mg/mL suspension)

Add 80 mL of Ora-Plus * oral suspending vehicle to an amber glass bottle containing 8 Diovan 80 mg tablets, and shake for a minimum of 2 minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of 1 additional minute. Add 80 mL of Ora-Sweet SF * oral sweetening vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension for at least 10 seconds to disperse the ingredients. The suspension is homogenous and can be stored for either up to 30 days at room temperature (below 30ºC/86ºF) or up to 75 days at refrigerated conditions (2-8ºC/35-46ºF) in the glass bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the bottle well (at least 10 seconds) prior to dispensing the suspension. ®®

*Ora-Sweet SF and Ora-Plus are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. ®®

2.3     Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose of Diovan is 40 mg twice daily. Uptitration to 80 mg and 160 mg twice daily should be done to the highest dose, as tolerated by the patient. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials is 320 mg in divided doses.

2.4     Post-Myocardial Infarction

Diovan may be initiated as early as 12 hours after a myocardial infarction. The recommended starting dose of Diovan is 20 mg twice daily. Patients may be uptitrated within 7 days to 40 mg twice daily, with subsequent titrations to a target maintenance dose of 160 mg twice daily, as tolerated by the patient. If symptomatic hypotension or renal dysfunction occurs, consideration should be given to a dosage reduction. Diovan may be given with other standard post-myocardial infarction treatment, including thrombolytics, aspirin, beta-blockers, and statins.
Abilify

Abilify

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.2)

Maintenance Treatment

The recommended dose for maintenance treatment, whether as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy, is the same dose needed to stabilize patients during acute treatment, both for adult and pediatric patients. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES ]. (14.2)

2.3 Adjunctive Treatment of Major Depressive Disorder

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder

Pediatric Patients

Dose Selection: The efficacy of aripiprazole has been established in the treatment of pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age with irritability associated with autistic disorder at doses of 5 mg/day to 15 mg/day. The dosage of ABILIFY should be individualized according to tolerability and response.

Dosing should be initiated at 2 mg/day. The dose should be increased to 5 mg/day, with subsequent increases to 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day if needed. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.4)

. Maintenance Treatment: In a clinical trial with ABILIFY conducted in children and adolescents (6 to 17 years of age), the efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of irritability associated with autistic disorder was not established [see Use in Specific Populations ]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment (8.4)

2.5 Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia or Bipolar Mania (Intramuscular Injection)

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment

Dosage adjustments in adults are not routinely indicated on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment status . [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS - ] (8.48.10)
When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-half of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) When concomitant administration of potential CYP2D6 inhibitors such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine with aripiprazole occurs, aripiprazole dose should be reduced at least to one-half of its normal dose. When the CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . When adjunctive ABILIFY is administered to patients with major depressive disorder, ABILIFY should be administered without dosage adjustment as specified in . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with potential CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin) and CYP2D6 (such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine) is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 and/or CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be increased Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ]. (7.1) Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (eg, a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong, moderate, or weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6: The aripiprazole dose in PM patients should initially be reduced to one-half (50%) of the usual dose and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. The dose of aripiprazole for PM patients who are administered a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose . Dosing recommendation in patients who are classified as CYP2D6 poor metabolizers (PM): [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3) When a potential CYP3A4 inducer such as carbamazepine is added to aripiprazole therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be doubled. Additional dose increases should be based on clinical evaluation. When the CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to 10 mg to 15 mg . Dosage adjustment for patients taking potential CYP3A4 inducers: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1)
2.7 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution . [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3)

2.8 Dosing of Orally Disintegrating Tablets

The dosing for ABILIFY Orally Disintegrating Tablets is the same as for the oral tablets . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION , , , and ] (2.12.22.32.4)

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.2)

Maintenance Treatment

The recommended dose for maintenance treatment, whether as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy, is the same dose needed to stabilize patients during acute treatment, both for adult and pediatric patients. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES ]. (14.2)

2.3 Adjunctive Treatment of Major Depressive Disorder

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder

Pediatric Patients

Dose Selection: The efficacy of aripiprazole has been established in the treatment of pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age with irritability associated with autistic disorder at doses of 5 mg/day to 15 mg/day. The dosage of ABILIFY should be individualized according to tolerability and response.

Dosing should be initiated at 2 mg/day. The dose should be increased to 5 mg/day, with subsequent increases to 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day if needed. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.4)

. Maintenance Treatment: In a clinical trial with ABILIFY conducted in children and adolescents (6 to 17 years of age), the efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of irritability associated with autistic disorder was not established [see Use in Specific Populations ]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment (8.4)

2.5 Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia or Bipolar Mania (Intramuscular Injection)

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment

Dosage adjustments in adults are not routinely indicated on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment status . [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS - ] (8.48.10)
When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-half of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) When concomitant administration of potential CYP2D6 inhibitors such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine with aripiprazole occurs, aripiprazole dose should be reduced at least to one-half of its normal dose. When the CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . When adjunctive ABILIFY is administered to patients with major depressive disorder, ABILIFY should be administered without dosage adjustment as specified in . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with potential CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin) and CYP2D6 (such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine) is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 and/or CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be increased Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ]. (7.1) Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (eg, a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong, moderate, or weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6: The aripiprazole dose in PM patients should initially be reduced to one-half (50%) of the usual dose and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. The dose of aripiprazole for PM patients who are administered a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose . Dosing recommendation in patients who are classified as CYP2D6 poor metabolizers (PM): [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3) When a potential CYP3A4 inducer such as carbamazepine is added to aripiprazole therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be doubled. Additional dose increases should be based on clinical evaluation. When the CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to 10 mg to 15 mg . Dosage adjustment for patients taking potential CYP3A4 inducers: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1)
2.7 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution . [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3)

2.8 Dosing of Orally Disintegrating Tablets

The dosing for ABILIFY Orally Disintegrating Tablets is the same as for the oral tablets . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION , , , and ] (2.12.22.32.4)
Crestor

Crestor

2.1 General Dosing Information

The dose range for CRESTOR is 5 to 40 mg orally once daily. The usual starting dose is 10‑20 mg.

CRESTOR can be administered as a single dose at any time of day, with or without food. The tablet should be swallowed whole.

When initiating CRESTOR therapy or switching from another HMG‑CoA reductase inhibitor therapy, the appropriate CRESTOR starting dose should first be utilized, and only then titrated according to the patient’s response and individualized goal of therapy.

After initiation or upon titration of CRESTOR, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and the dosage adjusted accordingly.

The 40 mg dose of CRESTOR should be used only for those patients who have not achieved their LDL‑C goal utilizing the 20 mg dose [see ]. Warnings and Precautions (5.1)

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 years of age)

The usual dose range of CRESTOR is 5‑20 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see and ]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more. Clinical Pharmacology (12)Indications and Usage (1.2)

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose of CRESTOR is 20 mg once daily. Response to therapy should be estimated from preapheresis LDL‑C levels.

2.4 Dosing in Asian Patients

In Asian patients, consider initiation of CRESTOR therapy with 5 mg once daily due to increased rosuvastatin plasma concentrations. The increased systemic exposure should be taken into consideration when treating Asian patients not adequately controlled at doses up to 20 mg/day. [see and ]. Use in Specific Populations (8.8)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

2.5 Use with Concomitant Therapy

Patients taking cyclosporine

The dose of CRESTOR should not exceed 5 mg once daily [see , , and ]. Warnings and Precautions (5.1)Drug Interactions (7.1)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

Patients taking gemfibrozil

Initiate CRESTOR therapy with 5 mg once daily. The dose of CRESTOR should not exceed 10 mg once daily [see and , and ]. Warnings and Precautions (5.1)Drug Interactions (7.2)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

Patients taking lopinavir and ritonavir or atazanavir and ritonavir

Initiate CRESTOR therapy with 5 mg once daily. The dose of CRESTOR should not exceed 10 mg once daily [see , and ]. Warnings and Precautions (5.1)Drug Interactions (7.3),Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

2.6 Dosing in Patients with Severe Renal Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CL <30 mL/min/1.73 m ) not on hemodialysis, dosing of CRESTOR should be started at 5 mg once daily and not exceed 10 mg once daily [see and ]. cr2Use in Specific Populations (8.6)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)
Metaxalone

Metaxalone

The recommended dose for adults and children over 12 years of age is one 800 mg tablet three to four times a day.
Eliphos

Eliphos

The recommended initial dose of ELIPHOS(R) for the adult dialysis patient is 2 tablets with each meal. The dosage may be increased gradually to bring the serum phosphate value below 6 mg/dl, as long as hypercalcemia does not develop. Most patients require 3–4 tablets with each meal. Dosage and Administration:
Bisoprolol Fumarate

Bisoprolol Fumarate

The dose of BISOPROLOL FUMARATE must be individualized to the needs of the patient. The usual starting dose is 5 mg once daily. In some patients, 2.5 mg may be an appropriate starting dose (see ). If the antihypertensive effect of 5 mg is inadequate, the dose may be increased to 10 mg and then, if necessary, to 20 mg once daily. Bronchospastic Disease in WARNINGS

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

In patients with hepatic impairment (hepatitis or cirrhosis) or renal dysfunction (creatinine clearance less than 40 mL/min), the initial daily dose should be 2.5 mg and caution should be used in dose-titration. Since limited data suggest that bisoprolol fumarate is not dialyzable, drug replacement is not necessary in patients undergoing dialysis.

Geriatric Patients

It is not necessary to adjust the dose in the elderly, unless there is also significant renal or hepatic dysfunction (see above and ). Geriatric Use in PRECAUTIONS

Pediatric Patients

There is no pediatric experience with BISOPROLOL FUMARATE.
Strattera

Strattera

2.1 Acute Treatment

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of approximately 0.5 mg/kg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 1.2 mg/kg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. No additional benefit has been demonstrated for doses higher than 1.2 mg/kg/day . Dosing of children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The total daily dose in children and adolescents should not exceed 1.4 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is less.

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of 40 mg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 80 mg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. After 2 to 4 additional weeks, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 100 mg in patients who have not achieved an optimal response. There are no data that support increased effectiveness at higher doses . Dosing of children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The maximum recommended total daily dose in children and adolescents over 70 kg and adults is 100 mg.

2.2 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. The benefit of maintaining pediatric patients (ages 6-15 years) with ADHD on STRATTERA after achieving a response in a dose range of 1.2 to 1.8 mg/kg/day was demonstrated in a controlled trial. Patients assigned to STRATTERA in the maintenance phase were generally continued on the same dose used to achieve a response in the open label phase. The physician who elects to use STRATTERA for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient . [see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

2.3 General Dosing Information

STRATTERA may be taken with or without food.

STRATTERA can be discontinued without being tapered.

STRATTERA capsules are not intended to be opened, they should be taken whole . [see Patient Counseling Information ( )] 17.6

The safety of single doses over 120 mg and total daily doses above 150 mg have not been systematically evaluated.

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

— For those ADHD patients who have hepatic insufficiency (HI), dosage adjustment is recommended as follows: For patients with moderate HI (Child-Pugh Class B), initial and target doses should be reduced to 50% of the normal dose (for patients without HI). For patients with severe HI (Child-Pugh Class C), initial dose and target doses should be reduced to 25% of normal . Dosing adjustment for hepatically impaired patients[see Use In Specific Populations ( )] 8.6

— In children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs, STRATTERA should be initiated at 0.5 mg/kg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 1.2 mg/kg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated. Dosing adjustment for use with a strong CYP2D6 inhibitor or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs

In children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, STRATTERA should be initiated at 40 mg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 80 mg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.
Benicar

Benicar

2.1 Adult Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. The usual recommended starting dose of Benicar is 20 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-contracted. For patients requiring further reduction in blood pressure after 2 weeks of therapy, the dose of Benicar may be increased to 40 mg. Doses above 40 mg do not appear to have greater effect. Twice-daily dosing offers no advantage over the same total dose given once daily.

No initial dosage adjustment is recommended for elderly patients, for patients with moderate to marked renal impairment (creatinine clearance <40 mL/min) or with moderate to marked hepatic dysfunction . For patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, particularly those with impaired renal function), initiate Benicar under close medical supervision and give consideration to use of a lower starting dose . [see Warnings and Precautions , Use in Specific Populations ( , , ) and Clinical Pharmacology ] (5.4)8.58.68.7(12.3)[see Warnings and Precautions ] (5.3)

Benicar may be administered with or without food.

If blood pressure is not controlled by Benicar alone, a diuretic may be added. Benicar may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension (6 to 16 years of age)

Dosage must be individualized. For children who can swallow tablets, the usual recommended starting dose of Benicar is 10 mg once daily for patients who weigh 20 to <35 kg (44 to 77 lb), or 20 mg once daily for patients who weigh ≥35 kg. For patients requiring further reduction in blood pressure after 2 weeks of therapy, the dose of Benicar may be increased to a maximum of 20 mg once daily for patients who weigh <35 kg or 40 mg once daily for patients who weigh ≥35 kg.

Children <1 year of age must not receive Benicar for hypertension.

For children who cannot swallow tablets, the same dose can be given using an extemporaneous suspension as described below . Follow the suspension preparation instructions below to administer Benicar as a suspension. [see Clinical Pharmacology ] (12.3)

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2 mg/mL suspension)

Add 50 mL of Purified Water to an amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing twenty Benicar 20 mg tablets and allow to stand for a minimum of 5 minutes. Shake the container for at least 1 minute and allow the suspension to stand for at least 1 minute. Repeat 1-minute shaking and 1-minute standing for four additional times. Add 100 mL of Ora-Sweet * and 50 mL of Ora-Plus * to the suspension and shake well for at least 1 minute. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2-8°C (36-46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension well before each use and return promptly to the refrigerator. * Ora-Sweet and Ora-Plus are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. ®® ®®
Coreg Cr

Coreg Cr

COREG CR is an extended-release capsule intended for once‑daily administration. Patients controlled with immediate‑release carvedilol tablets alone or in combination with other medications may be switched to COREG CR extended‑release capsules based on the total daily doses shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Conversion
Daily Dose of Immediate-Release Carvedilol Tablets

Daily Dose of COREG CR Capsules a

6.25 mg (3.125 mg twice daily)

10 mg once daily

12.5 mg (6.25 mg twice daily)

20 mg once daily

25 mg (12.5 mg twice daily)

40 mg once daily

50 mg (25 mg twice daily)

80 mg once daily

When switching from carvedilol 12.5 mg or 25 mg twice daily, a starting dose of COREG CR 20 mg or 40 mg once daily, respectively, may be warranted for elderly patients or those at increased risk of hypotension, dizziness, or syncope. Subsequent titration to higher doses should, as appropriate, be made after an interval of at least 2 weeks. a

COREG CR should be taken once daily in the morning with food. COREG CR should be swallowed as a whole capsule. COREG CR and/or its contents should not be crushed, chewed, or taken in divided doses.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should not be warm because it could affect the modified-release properties of this formulation. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use. Absorption of the beads sprinkled on other foods has not been tested. Alternative Administration:

2.1 Heart Failure

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND CLOSELY MONITORED BY A PHYSICIAN DURING UP‑TITRATION. Prior to initiation of COREG CR, it is recommended that fluid retention be minimized. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 10 mg once daily for 2 weeks. Patients who tolerate a dose of 10 mg once daily may have their dose increased to 20, 40, and 80 mg over successive intervals of at least 2 weeks. Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated.

Patients should be advised that initiation of treatment and (to a lesser extent) dosage increases may be associated with transient symptoms of dizziness or lightheadedness (and rarely syncope) within the first hour after dosing. Thus, during these periods, they should avoid situations such as driving or hazardous tasks, where symptoms could result in injury. Vasodilatory symptoms often do not require treatment, but it may be useful to separate the time of dosing of COREG CR from that of the ACE inhibitor or to reduce temporarily the dose of the ACE inhibitor. The dose of COREG CR should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure or vasodilation have been stabilized.

Fluid retention (with or without transient worsening heart failure symptoms) should be treated by an increase in the dose of diuretics.

The dose of COREG CR should be reduced if patients experience bradycardia (heart rate <55 beats/minute).

Episodes of dizziness or fluid retention during initiation of COREG CR can generally be managed without discontinuation of treatment and do not preclude subsequent successful titration of, or a favorable response to, COREG CR.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP‑TITRATION. Treatment with COREG CR may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that COREG CR be started at 20 mg once daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 40 mg once daily, then again to the target dose of 80 mg once daily. A lower starting dose may be used (10 mg once daily) and/or the rate of up‑titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β‑blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 20 mg once daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 40 mg once daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure 1 hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 80 mg once daily if tolerated and needed. Although not specifically studied, it is anticipated the full antihypertensive effect of COREG CR would be seen within 7 to 14 days as had been demonstrated with immediate‑release carvedilol. Total daily dose should not exceed 80 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

COREG CR should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment . [see Contraindications (4)]

2.5 Geriatric Use

When switching elderly patients (65 years of age or older) who are taking the higher doses of immediate-release carvedilol tablets (25 mg twice daily) to COREG CR, a lower starting dose (40 mg) of COREG CR is recommended to minimize the potential for dizziness, syncope, or hypotension . Patients who have switched and who tolerate COREG CR should, as appropriate, have their dose increased after an interval of at least 2 weeks . [see Dosage and Administration (2)][see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]
Coreg Cr

Coreg Cr

COREG CR is an extended-release capsule intended for once‑daily administration. Patients controlled with immediate‑release carvedilol tablets alone or in combination with other medications may be switched to COREG CR extended‑release capsules based on the total daily doses shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Conversion
Daily Dose of Immediate-Release Carvedilol Tablets

Daily Dose of COREG CR Capsules a

6.25 mg (3.125 mg twice daily)

10 mg once daily

12.5 mg (6.25 mg twice daily)

20 mg once daily

25 mg (12.5 mg twice daily)

40 mg once daily

50 mg (25 mg twice daily)

80 mg once daily

When switching from carvedilol 12.5 mg or 25 mg twice daily, a starting dose of COREG CR 20 mg or 40 mg once daily, respectively, may be warranted for elderly patients or those at increased risk of hypotension, dizziness, or syncope. Subsequent titration to higher doses should, as appropriate, be made after an interval of at least 2 weeks. a

COREG CR should be taken once daily in the morning with food. COREG CR should be swallowed as a whole capsule. COREG CR and/or its contents should not be crushed, chewed, or taken in divided doses.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should not be warm because it could affect the modified-release properties of this formulation. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use. Absorption of the beads sprinkled on other foods has not been tested. Alternative Administration:

2.1 Heart Failure

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND CLOSELY MONITORED BY A PHYSICIAN DURING UP‑TITRATION. Prior to initiation of COREG CR, it is recommended that fluid retention be minimized. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 10 mg once daily for 2 weeks. Patients who tolerate a dose of 10 mg once daily may have their dose increased to 20, 40, and 80 mg over successive intervals of at least 2 weeks. Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated.

Patients should be advised that initiation of treatment and (to a lesser extent) dosage increases may be associated with transient symptoms of dizziness or lightheadedness (and rarely syncope) within the first hour after dosing. Thus, during these periods, they should avoid situations such as driving or hazardous tasks, where symptoms could result in injury. Vasodilatory symptoms often do not require treatment, but it may be useful to separate the time of dosing of COREG CR from that of the ACE inhibitor or to reduce temporarily the dose of the ACE inhibitor. The dose of COREG CR should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure or vasodilation have been stabilized.

Fluid retention (with or without transient worsening heart failure symptoms) should be treated by an increase in the dose of diuretics.

The dose of COREG CR should be reduced if patients experience bradycardia (heart rate <55 beats/minute).

Episodes of dizziness or fluid retention during initiation of COREG CR can generally be managed without discontinuation of treatment and do not preclude subsequent successful titration of, or a favorable response to, COREG CR.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP‑TITRATION. Treatment with COREG CR may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that COREG CR be started at 20 mg once daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 40 mg once daily, then again to the target dose of 80 mg once daily. A lower starting dose may be used (10 mg once daily) and/or the rate of up‑titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β‑blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 20 mg once daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 40 mg once daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure 1 hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 80 mg once daily if tolerated and needed. Although not specifically studied, it is anticipated the full antihypertensive effect of COREG CR would be seen within 7 to 14 days as had been demonstrated with immediate‑release carvedilol. Total daily dose should not exceed 80 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

COREG CR should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment . [see Contraindications (4)]

2.5 Geriatric Use

When switching elderly patients (65 years of age or older) who are taking the higher doses of immediate-release carvedilol tablets (25 mg twice daily) to COREG CR, a lower starting dose (40 mg) of COREG CR is recommended to minimize the potential for dizziness, syncope, or hypotension . Patients who have switched and who tolerate COREG CR should, as appropriate, have their dose increased after an interval of at least 2 weeks . [see Dosage and Administration (2)][see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]
Pain Reliever Plus

Pain Reliever Plus

do not use more than directed drink a full glass of water with each dose adults and children 12 years and over take 2 tablets every 6 hours do not take more than 8 tablets in 24 hours children under 12 years: do not use unless directed by a doctor
Sensipar

Sensipar

Sensipar tablets should be taken whole and should not be divided. Sensipar should be taken with food or shortly after a meal.

Dosage must be individualized.

2.1 Secondary Hyperparathyroidism in Patients with Chronic Kidney Disease on Dialysis

The recommended starting oral dose of Sensipar is 30 mg once daily. Serum calcium and serum phosphorus should be measured within 1 week and intact parathyroid hormone (iPTH) should be measured 1 to 4 weeks after initiation or dose adjustment of Sensipar. Sensipar should be titrated no more frequently than every 2 to 4 weeks through sequential doses of 30, 60, 90, 120, and 180 mg once daily to target iPTH levels of 150 to 300 pg/mL. Serum iPTH levels should be assessed no earlier than 12 hours after dosing with Sensipar.

Sensipar can be used alone or in combination with vitamin D sterols and/or phosphate binders.

During dose titration, serum calcium levels should be monitored frequently and if levels decrease below the normal range, appropriate steps should be taken to increase serum calcium levels, such as by providing supplemental calcium, initiating or increasing the dose of calcium-based phosphate binder, initiating or increasing the dose of vitamin D sterols, or temporarily withholding treatment with Sensipar . [see Warnings and Precautions ( , )] 5.15.6

2.2 Parathyroid Carcinoma and Primary Hyperparathyroidism

The recommended starting oral dose of Sensipar is 30 mg twice daily.

The dose of Sensipar should be titrated every 2 to 4 weeks through sequential doses of 30 mg twice daily, 60 mg twice daily, and 90 mg twice daily, and 90 mg 3 or 4 times daily as necessary to normalize serum calcium levels [see Warnings and Precautions ( )]. 5.6
Strattera

Strattera

2.1 Acute Treatment

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of approximately 0.5 mg/kg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 1.2 mg/kg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. No additional benefit has been demonstrated for doses higher than 1.2 mg/kg/day . Dosing of children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The total daily dose in children and adolescents should not exceed 1.4 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is less.

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of 40 mg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 80 mg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. After 2 to 4 additional weeks, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 100 mg in patients who have not achieved an optimal response. There are no data that support increased effectiveness at higher doses . Dosing of children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The maximum recommended total daily dose in children and adolescents over 70 kg and adults is 100 mg.

2.2 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. The benefit of maintaining pediatric patients (ages 6-15 years) with ADHD on STRATTERA after achieving a response in a dose range of 1.2 to 1.8 mg/kg/day was demonstrated in a controlled trial. Patients assigned to STRATTERA in the maintenance phase were generally continued on the same dose used to achieve a response in the open label phase. The physician who elects to use STRATTERA for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient . [see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

2.3 General Dosing Information

STRATTERA may be taken with or without food.

STRATTERA can be discontinued without being tapered.

STRATTERA capsules are not intended to be opened, they should be taken whole . [see Patient Counseling Information ( )] 17.6

The safety of single doses over 120 mg and total daily doses above 150 mg have not been systematically evaluated.

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

— For those ADHD patients who have hepatic insufficiency (HI), dosage adjustment is recommended as follows: For patients with moderate HI (Child-Pugh Class B), initial and target doses should be reduced to 50% of the normal dose (for patients without HI). For patients with severe HI (Child-Pugh Class C), initial dose and target doses should be reduced to 25% of normal . Dosing adjustment for hepatically impaired patients[see Use In Specific Populations ( )] 8.6

— In children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs, STRATTERA should be initiated at 0.5 mg/kg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 1.2 mg/kg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated. Dosing adjustment for use with a strong CYP2D6 inhibitor or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs

In children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, STRATTERA should be initiated at 40 mg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 80 mg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.
Abilify

Abilify

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.2)

Maintenance Treatment

The recommended dose for maintenance treatment, whether as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy, is the same dose needed to stabilize patients during acute treatment, both for adult and pediatric patients. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES ]. (14.2)

2.3 Adjunctive Treatment of Major Depressive Disorder

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder

Pediatric Patients

Dose Selection: The efficacy of aripiprazole has been established in the treatment of pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age with irritability associated with autistic disorder at doses of 5 mg/day to 15 mg/day. The dosage of ABILIFY should be individualized according to tolerability and response.

Dosing should be initiated at 2 mg/day. The dose should be increased to 5 mg/day, with subsequent increases to 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day if needed. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.4)

. Maintenance Treatment: In a clinical trial with ABILIFY conducted in children and adolescents (6 to 17 years of age), the efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of irritability associated with autistic disorder was not established [see Use in Specific Populations ]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment (8.4)

2.5 Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia or Bipolar Mania (Intramuscular Injection)

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment

Dosage adjustments in adults are not routinely indicated on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment status . [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS - ] (8.48.10)
When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-half of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) When concomitant administration of potential CYP2D6 inhibitors such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine with aripiprazole occurs, aripiprazole dose should be reduced at least to one-half of its normal dose. When the CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . When adjunctive ABILIFY is administered to patients with major depressive disorder, ABILIFY should be administered without dosage adjustment as specified in . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with potential CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin) and CYP2D6 (such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine) is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 and/or CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be increased Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ]. (7.1) Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (eg, a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong, moderate, or weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6: The aripiprazole dose in PM patients should initially be reduced to one-half (50%) of the usual dose and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. The dose of aripiprazole for PM patients who are administered a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose . Dosing recommendation in patients who are classified as CYP2D6 poor metabolizers (PM): [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3) When a potential CYP3A4 inducer such as carbamazepine is added to aripiprazole therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be doubled. Additional dose increases should be based on clinical evaluation. When the CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to 10 mg to 15 mg . Dosage adjustment for patients taking potential CYP3A4 inducers: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1)
2.7 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution . [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3)

2.8 Dosing of Orally Disintegrating Tablets

The dosing for ABILIFY Orally Disintegrating Tablets is the same as for the oral tablets . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION , , , and ] (2.12.22.32.4)

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting and target dose for ABILIFY is 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day administered on a once-a-day schedule without regard to meals. ABILIFY has been systematically evaluated and shown to be effective in a dose range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day, when administered as the tablet formulation; however, doses higher than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day were not more effective than 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day. Dosage increases should generally not be made before 2 weeks, the time needed to achieve steady-state . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: Maintenance of efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a trial involving patients with schizophrenia who had been symptomatically stable on other antipsychotic medications for periods of 3 months or longer. These patients were discontinued from those medications and randomized to either ABILIFY 15 mg/day or placebo, and observed for relapse . Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment. [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Adolescents

Dose Selection: The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 10 mg/day. Aripiprazole was studied in adolescent patients 13 to 17 years of age with schizophrenia at daily doses of 10 mg and 30 mg. The starting daily dose of the tablet formulation in these patients was 2 mg, which was titrated to 5 mg after 2 days and to the target dose of 10 mg after 2 additional days. Subsequent dose increases should be administered in 5 mg increments. The 30 mg/day dose was not shown to be more efficacious than the 10 mg/day dose. ABILIFY can be administered without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.1)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of schizophrenia in the adolescent population has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the adolescent patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained on the drug, maintenance efficacy can be extrapolated from adult data along with comparisons of aripiprazole pharmacokinetic parameters in adult and pediatric patients. Thus, it is generally recommended that responding patients be continued beyond the acute response, but at the lowest dose needed to maintain remission. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Switching from Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from other antipsychotics to ABILIFY or concerning concomitant administration with other antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized.

2.2 Bipolar I Disorder

Acute Treatment of Manic and Mixed Episodes

Adults: The recommended starting dose in adults is 15 mg given once daily as monotherapy and 10 mg to 15 mg given once daily as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals. The recommended target dose of ABILIFY is 15 mg/day, as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy with lithium or valproate. The dose may be increased to 30 mg/day based on clinical response. The safety of doses above 30 mg/day has not been evaluated in clinical trials.

Pediatrics: The recommended starting dose in pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) as monotherapy is 2 mg/day, with titration to 5 mg/day after 2 days, and a target dose of 10 mg/day after 2 additional days. Recommended dosing as adjunctive therapy to lithium or valproate is the same. Subsequent dose increases, if needed, should be administered in 5 mg/day increments. ABILIFY can be given without regard to meals . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.2)

Maintenance Treatment

The recommended dose for maintenance treatment, whether as monotherapy or as adjunctive therapy, is the same dose needed to stabilize patients during acute treatment, both for adult and pediatric patients. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES ]. (14.2)

2.3 Adjunctive Treatment of Major Depressive Disorder

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended starting dose for ABILIFY as adjunctive treatment for patients already taking an antidepressant is 2 mg/day to 5 mg/day. The efficacy of ABILIFY as an adjunctive therapy for major depressive disorder was established within a dose range of 2 mg/day to 15 mg/day. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.3)

Maintenance Treatment: The efficacy of ABILIFY for the adjunctive maintenance treatment of major depressive disorder has not been evaluated. While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long the patient treated with ABILIFY should be maintained, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder

Pediatric Patients

Dose Selection: The efficacy of aripiprazole has been established in the treatment of pediatric patients 6 to 17 years of age with irritability associated with autistic disorder at doses of 5 mg/day to 15 mg/day. The dosage of ABILIFY should be individualized according to tolerability and response.

Dosing should be initiated at 2 mg/day. The dose should be increased to 5 mg/day, with subsequent increases to 10 mg/day or 15 mg/day if needed. Dose adjustments of up to 5 mg/day should occur gradually, at intervals of no less than 1 week . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.4)

. Maintenance Treatment: In a clinical trial with ABILIFY conducted in children and adolescents (6 to 17 years of age), the efficacy of ABILIFY for the maintenance treatment of irritability associated with autistic disorder was not established [see Use in Specific Populations ]. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment (8.4)

2.5 Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia or Bipolar Mania (Intramuscular Injection)

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Adults

Dose Selection: The recommended dose in these patients is 9.75 mg. The effectiveness of aripiprazole injection in controlling agitation in schizophrenia and bipolar mania was demonstrated over a dose range of 5.25 mg to 15 mg. No additional benefit was demonstrated for 15 mg compared to 9.75 mg. A lower dose of 5.25 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant. If agitation warranting a second dose persists following the initial dose, cumulative doses up to a total of 30 mg/day may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of aripiprazole injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. The safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg or injections given more frequently than every 2 hours have not been adequately evaluated in clinical trials . [see CLINICAL STUDIES ] (14.5)

If ongoing aripiprazole therapy is clinically indicated, oral aripiprazole in a range of 10 mg/day to 30 mg/day should replace aripiprazole injection as soon as possible . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION and ] (2.12.2)

Administration of ABILIFY Injection

To administer ABILIFY Injection, draw up the required volume of solution into the syringe as shown in Table 1. Discard any unused portion.
Table 1: ABILIFY Injection Dosing Recommendations Single-Dose Required Volume of Solution
5.25 mg

0.7 mL

9.75 mg

1.3 mL

15 mg

2 mL

ABILIFY Injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

2.6 Dosage Adjustment

Dosage adjustments in adults are not routinely indicated on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment status . [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS - ] (8.48.10)
When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-half of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) When concomitant administration of potential CYP2D6 inhibitors such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine with aripiprazole occurs, aripiprazole dose should be reduced at least to one-half of its normal dose. When the CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should then be increased . When adjunctive ABILIFY is administered to patients with major depressive disorder, ABILIFY should be administered without dosage adjustment as specified in . Dosage adjustment for patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with potential CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1) DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) When concomitant administration of aripiprazole with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (such as ketoconazole or clarithromycin) and CYP2D6 (such as quinidine, fluoxetine, or paroxetine) is indicated, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose. When the CYP3A4 and/or CYP2D6 inhibitor is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be increased Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 inhibitors: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ]. (7.1) Patients who may be receiving a combination of strong, moderate, and weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6 (eg, a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor and a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor or a moderate CYP3A4 inhibitor with a moderate CYP2D6 inhibitor), the dosing may be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose initially and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. Dosing recommendation in patients taking aripiprazole concomitantly with strong, moderate, or weak inhibitors of CYP3A4 and CYP2D6: The aripiprazole dose in PM patients should initially be reduced to one-half (50%) of the usual dose and then adjusted to achieve a favorable clinical response. The dose of aripiprazole for PM patients who are administered a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor should be reduced to one-quarter (25%) of the usual dose . Dosing recommendation in patients who are classified as CYP2D6 poor metabolizers (PM): [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3) When a potential CYP3A4 inducer such as carbamazepine is added to aripiprazole therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be doubled. Additional dose increases should be based on clinical evaluation. When the CYP3A4 inducer is withdrawn from the combination therapy, the aripiprazole dose should be reduced to 10 mg to 15 mg . Dosage adjustment for patients taking potential CYP3A4 inducers: [see DRUG INTERACTIONS ] (7.1)
2.7 Dosing of Oral Solution

The oral solution can be substituted for tablets on a mg-per-mg basis up to the 25 mg dose level. Patients receiving 30 mg tablets should receive 25 mg of the solution . [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY ] (12.3)

2.8 Dosing of Orally Disintegrating Tablets

The dosing for ABILIFY Orally Disintegrating Tablets is the same as for the oral tablets . [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION , , , and ] (2.12.22.32.4)
Strattera

Strattera

2.1 Acute Treatment

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of approximately 0.5 mg/kg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 1.2 mg/kg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. No additional benefit has been demonstrated for doses higher than 1.2 mg/kg/day . Dosing of children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The total daily dose in children and adolescents should not exceed 1.4 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is less.

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of 40 mg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 80 mg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. After 2 to 4 additional weeks, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 100 mg in patients who have not achieved an optimal response. There are no data that support increased effectiveness at higher doses . Dosing of children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The maximum recommended total daily dose in children and adolescents over 70 kg and adults is 100 mg.

2.2 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. The benefit of maintaining pediatric patients (ages 6-15 years) with ADHD on STRATTERA after achieving a response in a dose range of 1.2 to 1.8 mg/kg/day was demonstrated in a controlled trial. Patients assigned to STRATTERA in the maintenance phase were generally continued on the same dose used to achieve a response in the open label phase. The physician who elects to use STRATTERA for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient . [see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

2.3 General Dosing Information

STRATTERA may be taken with or without food.

STRATTERA can be discontinued without being tapered.

STRATTERA capsules are not intended to be opened, they should be taken whole . [see Patient Counseling Information ( )] 17.6

The safety of single doses over 120 mg and total daily doses above 150 mg have not been systematically evaluated.

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

— For those ADHD patients who have hepatic insufficiency (HI), dosage adjustment is recommended as follows: For patients with moderate HI (Child-Pugh Class B), initial and target doses should be reduced to 50% of the normal dose (for patients without HI). For patients with severe HI (Child-Pugh Class C), initial dose and target doses should be reduced to 25% of normal . Dosing adjustment for hepatically impaired patients[see Use In Specific Populations ( )] 8.6

— In children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs, STRATTERA should be initiated at 0.5 mg/kg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 1.2 mg/kg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated. Dosing adjustment for use with a strong CYP2D6 inhibitor or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs

In children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, STRATTERA should be initiated at 40 mg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 80 mg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.
Welchol

Welchol

2.1 Primary Hyperlipidemia

The recommended dose of WELCHOL Tablets in adults, whether used as monotherapy or in combination with a statin, is 6 tablets once daily or 3 tablets twice daily. WELCHOL Tablets should be taken with a meal and liquid.

The recommended dose of WELCHOL for Oral Suspension, in adults and children 10 to 17 years of age, is one 3.75 gram packet once daily or one 1.875 gram packet twice daily. To prepare, empty the entire contents of one packet into a glass or cup. Add ½ to 1 cup (4 to 8 ounces) of water, fruit juice, or diet soft drinks. Stir well and drink. WELCHOL for Oral Suspension should be taken with meals. To avoid esophageal distress, WELCHOL for Oral Suspension should not be taken in its dry form. Due to tablet size, it is recommended that any patient who has difficulty swallowing tablets use WELCHOL for Oral Suspension.

WELCHOL can be dosed at the same time as a statin or the two drugs can be dosed apart [See Clinical Studies ( )]. 14.1

After initiation of WELCHOL, lipid levels should be analyzed within 4 to 6 weeks.

2.2 Type 2 Diabetes Mellitus

The recommended dose of WELCHOL Tablets is 6 tablets once daily or 3 tablets twice daily. WELCHOL should be taken with a meal and liquid.

The recommended dose of WELCHOL for Oral Suspension is one 3.75 gram packet once daily or one 1.875 gram packet twice daily. To prepare, empty the entire contents of one packet into a glass or cup. Add ½ to 1 cup (4 to 8 ounces) of water, fruit juice, or diet soft drinks. Stir well and drink. WELCHOL for Oral Suspension should be taken with meals. To avoid esophageal distress, WELCHOL for Oral Suspension should not be taken in its dry form.
Cymbalta

Cymbalta

Cymbalta should be swallowed whole and should not be chewed or crushed, nor should the capsule be opened and its contents sprinkled on food or mixed with liquids. All of these might affect the enteric coating. Cymbalta can be given without regard to meals.

2.1 Initial Treatment

— Cymbalta should be administered at a total dose of 40 mg/day (given as 20 mg twice daily) to 60 mg/day (given either once daily or as 30 mg twice daily). For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg/day dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer any additional benefits. The safety of doses above 120 mg/day has not been adequately evaluated . Major Depressive Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

— For most patients, the recommended starting dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg administered once daily. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg once daily dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit. Nevertheless, if a decision is made to increase the dose beyond 60 mg once daily, dose increases should be in increments of 30 mg once daily. The safety of doses above 120 mg once daily has not been adequately evaluated . Generalized Anxiety Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

— The recommended dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg administered once daily. There is no evidence that doses higher than 60 mg confer additional significant benefit and the higher dose is clearly less well tolerated . For patients for whom tolerability is a concern, a lower starting dose may be considered. Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.3

Since diabetes is frequently complicated by renal disease, a lower starting dose and gradual increase in dose should be considered for patients with renal impairment . [see Dosage and Administration ( ), Use in Specific Populations ( ), and Clinical Pharmacology ( )] 2.38.1012.3

— The recommended dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg administered once daily. Treatment should begin at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. Some patients may respond to the starting dose. There is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions . Fibromyalgia[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.4

— The recommended dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg once daily. Dosing may be started at 30 mg for one week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. There is no evidence that higher doses confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions . Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.5

2.2 Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

— It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in MDD was demonstrated with Cymbalta as monotherapy. Cymbalta should be administered at a total dose of 60 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment . Major Depressive Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

— It is generally agreed that episodes of generalized anxiety disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in GAD was demonstrated with Cymbalta as monotherapy. Cymbalta should be administered in a dose range of 60-120 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment . Generalized Anxiety Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

— As the progression of diabetic peripheral neuropathy is highly variable and management of pain is empirical, the effectiveness of Cymbalta must be assessed individually. Efficacy beyond 12 weeks has not been systematically studied in placebo-controlled trials. Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain

— Fibromyalgia is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of Cymbalta in the management of fibromyalgia has been demonstrated in placebo-controlled studies up to 3 months. The efficacy of Cymbalta was not demonstrated in longer studies; however, continued treatment should be based on individual patient response. Fibromyalgia

— The efficacy of Cymbalta has not been established in placebo-controlled studies beyond 13 weeks. Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain

2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

— It is recommended that Cymbalta should ordinarily not be administered to patients with any hepatic insufficiency . Hepatic Insufficiency[see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Use in Specific Populations ( )] 5.148.9

— Cymbalta is not recommended for patients with end-stage renal disease or severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) . Severe Renal Impairment[see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Use in Specific Populations ( )] 5.148.10

— No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any drug, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage in elderly patients, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose . Elderly Patients[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.5

— There are no adequate and well-controlled studies in pregnant women; therefore, Cymbalta should be used during pregnancy only if the potential benefit justifies the potential risk to the fetus . Pregnant Women[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.1

Lilly maintains a pregnancy registry to monitor the pregnancy outcomes of women exposed to Cymbalta while pregnant. Healthcare providers are encouraged to register any patient who is exposed to Cymbalta during pregnancy by calling the Cymbalta Pregnancy Registry at 1-866-814-6975 or by visiting www.cymbaltapregnancyregistry.com

— Because the safety of duloxetine in infants is not known, nursing while on Cymbalta is not recommended . Nursing Mothers[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.3

2.4 Discontinuing Cymbalta

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of Cymbalta and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.7

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with Cymbalta. Conversely, at least 5 days should be allowed after stopping Cymbalta before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications ( )]. 4.1

2.6 Use of Cymbalta with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start Cymbalta in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications ( )]. 4.1

In some cases, a patient already receiving Cymbalta therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, Cymbalta should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 5 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with Cymbalta may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.4

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with Cymbalta is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.4
Budesonide

Budesonide

2.1 Mild to Moderate Active Crohn’s Disease

The recommended adult dosage for the treatment of mild to moderate active Crohn's disease involving the ileum and/or the ascending colon is 9 mg orally taken once daily in the morning for up to 8 weeks. Repeated 8 week courses of budesonide capsules (enteric coated) can be given for recurring episodes of active disease.

2.2 Maintenance of Clinical Remission of Mild to Moderate Crohn’s Disease

Following an 8 week course(s) of treatment for active disease and once the patient’s symptoms are controlled (CDAI less than 150), budesonide capsules (enteric coated) 6 mg orally is recommended once daily for maintenance of clinical remission up to 3 months. If symptom control is still maintained at 3 months an attempt to taper to complete cessation is recommended. Continued treatment with budesonide capsules (enteric coated) 6 mg for more than 3 months has not been shown to provide substantial clinical benefit.

Patients with mild to moderate active Crohn’s disease involving the ileum and/or ascending colon have been switched from oral prednisolone to budesonide capsules (enteric coated) with no reported episodes of adrenal insufficiency. Since prednisolone should not be stopped abruptly, tapering should begin concomitantly with initiating budesonide capsule (enteric coated) treatment.

2.3 CYP3A4 inhibitors

If concomitant administration with ketoconazole, or any other CYP3A4 inhibitor, is indicated, patients should be closely monitored for increased signs and/or symptoms of hypercorticism. Grapefruit juice, which is known to inhibit CYP3A4, should also be avoided when taking budesonide capsules (enteric coated). In these cases, reduction in the dose of budesonide capsules (enteric coated) should be considered [ ]. see and Drug Interactions (7)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)
Xifaxan

Xifaxan

2.1 Dosage for Travelers’ Diarrhea

The recommended dose of XIFAXAN is one 200 mg tablet taken orally three times a day for 3 days. XIFAXAN can be administered orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology ( )]. 12.3

2.2 Dosage for Hepatic Encephalopathy

The recommended dose of XIFAXAN is one 550 mg tablet taken orally two times a day, with or without food . [see Clinical Pharmacology ( )] 12.3

2.1 Dosage for Travelers’ Diarrhea

The recommended dose of XIFAXAN is one 200 mg tablet taken orally three times a day for 3 days. XIFAXAN can be administered orally, with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology ( )]. 12.3
Chantix

Chantix

2.1 Usual Dosage for Adults

Smoking cessation therapies are more likely to succeed for patients who are motivated to stop smoking and who are provided additional advice and support. Provide patients with appropriate educational materials and counseling to support the quit attempt.

The patient should set a date to stop smoking. Begin CHANTIX dosing one week before this date. Alternatively, the patient can begin CHANTIX dosing and then quit smoking between days 8 and 35 of treatment.

CHANTIX should be taken after eating and with a full glass of water.

The recommended dose of CHANTIX is 1 mg twice daily following a 1-week titration as follows:
Days 1 – 3: 0.5 mg once daily Days 4 – 7: 0.5 mg twice daily Day 8 – end of treatment: 1 mg twice daily
Patients should be treated with CHANTIX for 12 weeks. For patients who have successfully stopped smoking at the end of 12 weeks, an additional course of 12 weeks' treatment with CHANTIX is recommended to further increase the likelihood of long-term abstinence.

Patients who do not succeed in stopping smoking during 12 weeks of initial therapy, or who relapse after treatment, should be encouraged to make another attempt once factors contributing to the failed attempt have been identified and addressed.

Consider a temporary or permanent dose reduction in patients who cannot tolerate the adverse effects of CHANTIX.

2.2 Dosage in Special Populations

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. For patients with severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min), the recommended starting dose of CHANTIX is 0.5 mg once daily. The dose may then be titrated as needed to a maximum dose of 0.5 mg twice a day. For patients with end-stage renal disease undergoing hemodialysis, a maximum dose of 0.5 mg once daily may be administered if tolerated . Patients with Impaired Renal Function:[see and ] Use in Specific Populations (8.6)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function . Elderly and Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function:[see ] Use in Specific Populations (8.5)
Coreg Cr

Coreg Cr

COREG CR is an extended-release capsule intended for once‑daily administration. Patients controlled with immediate‑release carvedilol tablets alone or in combination with other medications may be switched to COREG CR extended‑release capsules based on the total daily doses shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Dosing Conversion
Daily Dose of Immediate-Release Carvedilol Tablets

Daily Dose of COREG CR Capsules a

6.25 mg (3.125 mg twice daily)

10 mg once daily

12.5 mg (6.25 mg twice daily)

20 mg once daily

25 mg (12.5 mg twice daily)

40 mg once daily

50 mg (25 mg twice daily)

80 mg once daily

When switching from carvedilol 12.5 mg or 25 mg twice daily, a starting dose of COREG CR 20 mg or 40 mg once daily, respectively, may be warranted for elderly patients or those at increased risk of hypotension, dizziness, or syncope. Subsequent titration to higher doses should, as appropriate, be made after an interval of at least 2 weeks. a

COREG CR should be taken once daily in the morning with food. COREG CR should be swallowed as a whole capsule. COREG CR and/or its contents should not be crushed, chewed, or taken in divided doses.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should not be warm because it could affect the modified-release properties of this formulation. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use. Absorption of the beads sprinkled on other foods has not been tested. Alternative Administration:

2.1 Heart Failure

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND CLOSELY MONITORED BY A PHYSICIAN DURING UP‑TITRATION. Prior to initiation of COREG CR, it is recommended that fluid retention be minimized. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 10 mg once daily for 2 weeks. Patients who tolerate a dose of 10 mg once daily may have their dose increased to 20, 40, and 80 mg over successive intervals of at least 2 weeks. Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated.

Patients should be advised that initiation of treatment and (to a lesser extent) dosage increases may be associated with transient symptoms of dizziness or lightheadedness (and rarely syncope) within the first hour after dosing. Thus, during these periods, they should avoid situations such as driving or hazardous tasks, where symptoms could result in injury. Vasodilatory symptoms often do not require treatment, but it may be useful to separate the time of dosing of COREG CR from that of the ACE inhibitor or to reduce temporarily the dose of the ACE inhibitor. The dose of COREG CR should not be increased until symptoms of worsening heart failure or vasodilation have been stabilized.

Fluid retention (with or without transient worsening heart failure symptoms) should be treated by an increase in the dose of diuretics.

The dose of COREG CR should be reduced if patients experience bradycardia (heart rate <55 beats/minute).

Episodes of dizziness or fluid retention during initiation of COREG CR can generally be managed without discontinuation of treatment and do not preclude subsequent successful titration of, or a favorable response to, COREG CR.

2.2 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP‑TITRATION. Treatment with COREG CR may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that COREG CR be started at 20 mg once daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 40 mg once daily, then again to the target dose of 80 mg once daily. A lower starting dose may be used (10 mg once daily) and/or the rate of up‑titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β‑blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.3 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of COREG CR is 20 mg once daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 40 mg once daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure 1 hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 80 mg once daily if tolerated and needed. Although not specifically studied, it is anticipated the full antihypertensive effect of COREG CR would be seen within 7 to 14 days as had been demonstrated with immediate‑release carvedilol. Total daily dose should not exceed 80 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.4 Hepatic Impairment

COREG CR should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment . [see Contraindications (4)]

2.5 Geriatric Use

When switching elderly patients (65 years of age or older) who are taking the higher doses of immediate-release carvedilol tablets (25 mg twice daily) to COREG CR, a lower starting dose (40 mg) of COREG CR is recommended to minimize the potential for dizziness, syncope, or hypotension . Patients who have switched and who tolerate COREG CR should, as appropriate, have their dose increased after an interval of at least 2 weeks . [see Dosage and Administration (2)][see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)]
Renvela

Renvela

Because of the rapid reaction with the hydrochloric acid in the stomach, the dosing of Renvela powder or tablet is anticipated to be similar to that of the sevelamer hydrochloride salt or tablet.

2.1 General Dosing Information

Renvela should be given three times a day with meals.

The recommended starting dose of Renvela is 0.8 to 1.6 g with meals based on serum phosphorus level. provides recommended starting doses of Renvela for patients not taking a phosphate binder. Patients Not Taking a Phosphate Binder.Table 1

Table 1. Starting Dose for Dialysis Patients Not Taking a Phosphate Binder Serum Phosphorus Renvela 800 mg Tablet ® Renvela Powder > 5.5 and < 7.5 mg/dL 1 tablet three times daily with meals 0.8 g three times daily with meals ≥ 7.5 mg/dL 2 tablets three times daily with meals 1.6 g three times daily with meals
For patients switching from sevelamer hydrochloride tablets to sevelamer carbonate tablets or powder, use the same dose in grams. Further titration may be necessary to achieve desired phosphorus levels. The highest daily dose of sevelamer carbonate studied was 14 grams in CKD patients on dialysis. Switching from Sevelamer Hydrochloride Tablets.

Use the same dose in grams. Further titration may be necessary to achieve desired phosphorus levels. Switching between Sevelamer Carbonate Tablets and Powder.

In a study in 84 CKD patients on hemodialysis, a similar reduction in serum phosphorus was seen with equivalent doses (approximately mg for mg) of sevelamer hydrochloride and calcium acetate. gives recommended starting doses of Renvela based on a patient’s current calcium acetate dose. Switching from Calcium Acetate.Table 2
Table 2. Starting Dose for Dialysis Patients Switching From Calcium Acetate to Renvela Calcium Acetate 667 mg (Tablets per meal) Renvela 800 mg Tablet (Tablets per meal) ® Renvela Powder 1 tablet 1 tablet 0.8 g 2 tablets 2 tablets 1.6 g 3 tablets 3 tablets 2.4 g
Titrate the Renvela dose by 0.8 g three times per day with meals at two-week intervals as necessary with the goal of controlling serum phosphorus within the target range. Dose Titration for All Patients Taking Renvela.

2.2 Sevelamer Carbonate Powder Preparation Instructions

The entire contents of each 0.8 or 2.4 g packet should be placed in a cup and mixed thoroughly with the amount of water described in . Table 3
Table 3. Sevelamer Carbonate Powder Preparation Instructions Renvela Powder Packet Strength Minimum amount of water for dose preparation (either ounces, mL or teaspoon/Tablespoon) ounces mL tsp/Tbsp 0.8 g 1 30 6 teaspoons/2 Tablespoons 2.4 g 2 60 4 Tablespoons
Multiple packets may be mixed together with the appropriate amount of water. Patients should be instructed to stir the mixture vigorously (it does not dissolve) and drink the entire preparation within 30 minutes and resuspend the preparation right before drinking.

Based on clinical studies, the average prescribed daily dose of sevelamer carbonate is approximately 7.2 g per day.
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving Fenofibrate tablets for oral use, and should continue this diet during treatment with Fenofibrate tablets for oral use. Fenofibrate tablets for oral use can be given without regard to meals.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers, are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after two months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 145 mg once daily.

2.2 Primary Hypercholesterolemia or Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use is 145 mg once daily.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 48 to 145 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 145 mg once daily.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with Fenofibrate tablets for oral use should be initiated at a dose of 48 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function, and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment . [see Use in Specific Populations and Clinical Pharmacology ] (8.6)(12.3)

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function . [see Use in Specific Populations ] (8.5)

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function . [see Use in Specific Populations ] (8.5)
Amitiza

Amitiza

Take Amitiza orally with food and water. Swallow capsules whole and do not break apart or chew. Physicians and patients should periodically assess the need for continued therapy.

2.1 Chronic Idiopathic Constipation and Opioid-induced Constipation

The recommended dose is 24 mcg twice daily orally with food and water.

Dosage in patients with hepatic impairment

For patients with moderately impaired hepatic function (Child-Pugh Class B), the recommended starting dose is 16 mcg twice daily. For patients with severely impaired hepatic function (Child-Pugh Class C), the recommended starting dose is 8 mcg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated and an adequate response has not been obtained after an appropriate interval, doses can then be escalated to full dosing with appropriate monitoring of patient response and . [see Use in Specific Populations ( ) 8.7Clinical Pharmacology ( )] 12.3

2.2 Irritable Bowel Syndrome with Constipation

The recommended dose is 8 mcg twice daily orally with food and water.

Dosage in patients with hepatic impairment

For patients with severely impaired hepatic function (Child-Pugh Class C), the recommended starting dose is 8 mcg once daily. If this dose is tolerated and an adequate response has not been obtained after an appropriate interval, doses can then be escalated to full dosing with appropriate monitoring of patient response. Dosage adjustment is not required for patients with moderately impaired hepatic function (Child-Pugh Class B) . [see Use in Specific Populations ( ) and Clinical Pharmacology ( )] 8.712.3
Chantix

Chantix

2.1 Usual Dosage for Adults

Smoking cessation therapies are more likely to succeed for patients who are motivated to stop smoking and who are provided additional advice and support. Provide patients with appropriate educational materials and counseling to support the quit attempt.

The patient should set a date to stop smoking. Begin CHANTIX dosing one week before this date. Alternatively, the patient can begin CHANTIX dosing and then quit smoking between days 8 and 35 of treatment.

CHANTIX should be taken after eating and with a full glass of water.

The recommended dose of CHANTIX is 1 mg twice daily following a 1-week titration as follows:
Days 1 – 3: 0.5 mg once daily Days 4 – 7: 0.5 mg twice daily Day 8 – end of treatment: 1 mg twice daily
Patients should be treated with CHANTIX for 12 weeks. For patients who have successfully stopped smoking at the end of 12 weeks, an additional course of 12 weeks' treatment with CHANTIX is recommended to further increase the likelihood of long-term abstinence.

Patients who do not succeed in stopping smoking during 12 weeks of initial therapy, or who relapse after treatment, should be encouraged to make another attempt once factors contributing to the failed attempt have been identified and addressed.

Consider a temporary or permanent dose reduction in patients who cannot tolerate the adverse effects of CHANTIX.

2.2 Dosage in Special Populations

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild to moderate renal impairment. For patients with severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min), the recommended starting dose of CHANTIX is 0.5 mg once daily. The dose may then be titrated as needed to a maximum dose of 0.5 mg twice a day. For patients with end-stage renal disease undergoing hemodialysis, a maximum dose of 0.5 mg once daily may be administered if tolerated . Patients with Impaired Renal Function:[see and ] Use in Specific Populations (8.6)Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function . Elderly and Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function:[see ] Use in Specific Populations (8.5)
Hyoscyamine Sulfate Ext...

Hyoscyamine Sulfate Extended-release

Dosage may be adjusted according to the conditions and severity of symptoms.

1 to 2 tablets every 12 hours. Do not crush or chew tablets. Do not exceed 4 tablets in 24 hours. Adults and pediatric patients 12 years of age and older:
Strattera

Strattera

2.1 Acute Treatment

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of approximately 0.5 mg/kg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 1.2 mg/kg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. No additional benefit has been demonstrated for doses higher than 1.2 mg/kg/day . Dosing of children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The total daily dose in children and adolescents should not exceed 1.4 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is less.

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of 40 mg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 80 mg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. After 2 to 4 additional weeks, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 100 mg in patients who have not achieved an optimal response. There are no data that support increased effectiveness at higher doses . Dosing of children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The maximum recommended total daily dose in children and adolescents over 70 kg and adults is 100 mg.

2.2 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. The benefit of maintaining pediatric patients (ages 6-15 years) with ADHD on STRATTERA after achieving a response in a dose range of 1.2 to 1.8 mg/kg/day was demonstrated in a controlled trial. Patients assigned to STRATTERA in the maintenance phase were generally continued on the same dose used to achieve a response in the open label phase. The physician who elects to use STRATTERA for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient . [see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

2.3 General Dosing Information

STRATTERA may be taken with or without food.

STRATTERA can be discontinued without being tapered.

STRATTERA capsules are not intended to be opened, they should be taken whole . [see Patient Counseling Information ( )] 17.6

The safety of single doses over 120 mg and total daily doses above 150 mg have not been systematically evaluated.

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

— For those ADHD patients who have hepatic insufficiency (HI), dosage adjustment is recommended as follows: For patients with moderate HI (Child-Pugh Class B), initial and target doses should be reduced to 50% of the normal dose (for patients without HI). For patients with severe HI (Child-Pugh Class C), initial dose and target doses should be reduced to 25% of normal . Dosing adjustment for hepatically impaired patients[see Use In Specific Populations ( )] 8.6

— In children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs, STRATTERA should be initiated at 0.5 mg/kg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 1.2 mg/kg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated. Dosing adjustment for use with a strong CYP2D6 inhibitor or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs

In children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, STRATTERA should be initiated at 40 mg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 80 mg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.
Cymbalta

Cymbalta

Cymbalta should be swallowed whole and should not be chewed or crushed, nor should the capsule be opened and its contents sprinkled on food or mixed with liquids. All of these might affect the enteric coating. Cymbalta can be given without regard to meals.

2.1 Initial Treatment

— Cymbalta should be administered at a total dose of 40 mg/day (given as 20 mg twice daily) to 60 mg/day (given either once daily or as 30 mg twice daily). For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg/day dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer any additional benefits. The safety of doses above 120 mg/day has not been adequately evaluated . Major Depressive Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

— For most patients, the recommended starting dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg administered once daily. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg once daily dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit. Nevertheless, if a decision is made to increase the dose beyond 60 mg once daily, dose increases should be in increments of 30 mg once daily. The safety of doses above 120 mg once daily has not been adequately evaluated . Generalized Anxiety Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

— The recommended dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg administered once daily. There is no evidence that doses higher than 60 mg confer additional significant benefit and the higher dose is clearly less well tolerated . For patients for whom tolerability is a concern, a lower starting dose may be considered. Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.3

Since diabetes is frequently complicated by renal disease, a lower starting dose and gradual increase in dose should be considered for patients with renal impairment . [see Dosage and Administration ( ), Use in Specific Populations ( ), and Clinical Pharmacology ( )] 2.38.1012.3

— The recommended dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg administered once daily. Treatment should begin at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. Some patients may respond to the starting dose. There is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions . Fibromyalgia[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.4

— The recommended dose for Cymbalta is 60 mg once daily. Dosing may be started at 30 mg for one week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. There is no evidence that higher doses confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions . Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.5

2.2 Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

— It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in MDD was demonstrated with Cymbalta as monotherapy. Cymbalta should be administered at a total dose of 60 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment . Major Depressive Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

— It is generally agreed that episodes of generalized anxiety disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in GAD was demonstrated with Cymbalta as monotherapy. Cymbalta should be administered in a dose range of 60-120 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment . Generalized Anxiety Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

— As the progression of diabetic peripheral neuropathy is highly variable and management of pain is empirical, the effectiveness of Cymbalta must be assessed individually. Efficacy beyond 12 weeks has not been systematically studied in placebo-controlled trials. Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain

— Fibromyalgia is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of Cymbalta in the management of fibromyalgia has been demonstrated in placebo-controlled studies up to 3 months. The efficacy of Cymbalta was not demonstrated in longer studies; however, continued treatment should be based on individual patient response. Fibromyalgia

— The efficacy of Cymbalta has not been established in placebo-controlled studies beyond 13 weeks. Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain

2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

— It is recommended that Cymbalta should ordinarily not be administered to patients with any hepatic insufficiency . Hepatic Insufficiency[see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Use in Specific Populations ( )] 5.148.9

— Cymbalta is not recommended for patients with end-stage renal disease or severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) . Severe Renal Impairment[see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Use in Specific Populations ( )] 5.148.10

— No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any drug, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage in elderly patients, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose . Elderly Patients[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.5

— There are no adequate and well-controlled studies in pregnant women; therefore, Cymbalta should be used during pregnancy only if the potential benefit justifies the potential risk to the fetus . Pregnant Women[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.1

Lilly maintains a pregnancy registry to monitor the pregnancy outcomes of women exposed to Cymbalta while pregnant. Healthcare providers are encouraged to register any patient who is exposed to Cymbalta during pregnancy by calling the Cymbalta Pregnancy Registry at 1-866-814-6975 or by visiting www.cymbaltapregnancyregistry.com

— Because the safety of duloxetine in infants is not known, nursing while on Cymbalta is not recommended . Nursing Mothers[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.3

2.4 Discontinuing Cymbalta

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of Cymbalta and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.7

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with Cymbalta. Conversely, at least 5 days should be allowed after stopping Cymbalta before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications ( )]. 4.1

2.6 Use of Cymbalta with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start Cymbalta in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications ( )]. 4.1

In some cases, a patient already receiving Cymbalta therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, Cymbalta should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 5 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with Cymbalta may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.4

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with Cymbalta is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.4
Prenatal Plus

Prenatal Plus

As a dietary adjunct before, during and after pregnancy, take one tablet daily with a meal, or as directed by a physician.
Pramipexole Dihydrochlo...

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are taken orally, with or without food.

If a significant interruption in therapy with pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets have occurred, re-titration of therapy may be warranted.

2.2 Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level to avoid intolerable adverse effects and orthostatic hypotension. Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets should be titrated gradually in all patients. The dose should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of dyskinesia, hallucinations, somnolence, and dry mouth.

Dosing in Patients with Normal Renal Function

Initial Treatment

Doses should be increased gradually from a starting dose of 0.375 mg/day given in three divided doses and should not be increased more frequently than every 5 to 7 days. A suggested ascending dosage schedule that was used in clinical studies is shown in the following table:
Table 1 Ascending Dosage Schedule of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets for Parkinson’s Disease Week Dosage (mg) Total Daily Dose (mg) 1 0.125 TID 0.375 2 0.25 TID 0.75 3 0.5 TID 1.50 4 0.75 TID 2.25 5 1 TID 3.0 6 1.25 TID 3.75 7 1.5 TID 4.50
Maintenance Treatment

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets were effective and well tolerated over a dosage range of 1.5 to 4.5 mg/day administered in equally divided doses three times per day with or without concomitant levodopa (approximately 800 mg/day).

In a fixed-dose study in early Parkinson's disease patients, doses of 3 mg, 4.5 mg, and 6 mg per day of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were not shown to provide any significant benefit beyond that achieved at a daily dose of 1.5 mg/day. However, in the same fixed-dose study, the following adverse events were dose related: postural hypotension, nausea, constipation, somnolence, and amnesia. The frequency of these events was generally 2-fold greater than placebo for pramipexole doses greater than 3 mg/day. The incidence of somnolence reported with pramipexole at a dose of 1.5 mg/day was comparable to placebo.

When pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are used in combination with levodopa, a reduction of the levodopa dosage should be considered. In a controlled study in advanced Parkinson's disease, the dosage of levodopa was reduced by an average of 27% from baseline.

Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment
Table 2 Dosing of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets in Parkinson’s Disease Patients with Renal Impairment Renal Status Starting Dose (mg) Maximum Dose (mg) Normal to mild impairment (creatinine Cl > 50 mL/min) 0.125 TID 1.5 TID Moderate impairment (creatinine Cl = 30 to 50 mL/min) 0.125 BID 0.75 TID Severe impairment (creatinine Cl = 15 to <30 mL/min) 0.125 QD 1.5 QD Very severe impairment (creatinine Cl < 15 mL/min and hemodialysis patients) The use of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets not been adequately studied in this group of patients.
Discontinuation of Treatment

Pramipexole dihydrochloride Tablets should be tapered off at a rate of 0.75 mg per day until the daily dose has been reduced to 0.75 mg. Thereafter, the dose should be reduced by 0.375 mg per day. In some studies, however, abrupt discontinuation was uneventful.
Pramipexole Dihydrochlo...

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are taken orally, with or without food.

If a significant interruption in therapy with pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets have occurred, re-titration of therapy may be warranted.

2.2 Parkinson’s Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level to avoid intolerable adverse effects and orthostatic hypotension. Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets should be titrated gradually in all patients. The dose should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of dyskinesia, hallucinations, somnolence, and dry mouth.

Dosing in Patients with Normal Renal Function

Initial Treatment

Doses should be increased gradually from a starting dose of 0.375 mg/day given in three divided doses and should not be increased more frequently than every 5 to 7 days. A suggested ascending dosage schedule that was used in clinical studies is shown in the following table:
Table 1 Ascending Dosage Schedule of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets for Parkinson’s Disease Week Dosage (mg) Total Daily Dose (mg) 1 0.125 TID 0.375 2 0.25 TID 0.75 3 0.5 TID 1.50 4 0.75 TID 2.25 5 1 TID 3.0 6 1.25 TID 3.75 7 1.5 TID 4.50
Maintenance Treatment

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets were effective and well tolerated over a dosage range of 1.5 to 4.5 mg/day administered in equally divided doses three times per day with or without concomitant levodopa (approximately 800 mg/day).

In a fixed-dose study in early Parkinson's disease patients, doses of 3 mg, 4.5 mg, and 6 mg per day of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were not shown to provide any significant benefit beyond that achieved at a daily dose of 1.5 mg/day. However, in the same fixed-dose study, the following adverse events were dose related: postural hypotension, nausea, constipation, somnolence, and amnesia. The frequency of these events was generally 2-fold greater than placebo for pramipexole doses greater than 3 mg/day. The incidence of somnolence reported with pramipexole at a dose of 1.5 mg/day was comparable to placebo.

When pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are used in combination with levodopa, a reduction of the levodopa dosage should be considered. In a controlled study in advanced Parkinson's disease, the dosage of levodopa was reduced by an average of 27% from baseline.

Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment
Table 2 Dosing of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets in Parkinson’s Disease Patients with Renal Impairment Renal Status Starting Dose (mg) Maximum Dose (mg) Normal to mild impairment (creatinine Cl > 50 mL/min) 0.125 TID 1.5 TID Moderate impairment (creatinine Cl = 30 to 50 mL/min) 0.125 BID 0.75 TID Severe impairment (creatinine Cl = 15 to <30 mL/min) 0.125 QD 1.5 QD Very severe impairment (creatinine Cl < 15 mL/min and hemodialysis patients) The use of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets not been adequately studied in this group of patients.
Discontinuation of Treatment

Pramipexole dihydrochloride Tablets should be tapered off at a rate of 0.75 mg per day until the daily dose has been reduced to 0.75 mg. Thereafter, the dose should be reduced by 0.375 mg per day. In some studies, however, abrupt discontinuation was uneventful.
Sotalol Hydrochloride

Sotalol Hydrochloride

As with other antiarrhythmic agents, sotalol hydrochloride should be initiated and doses increased in a hospital with facilities for cardiac rhythm monitoring and assessment (see ). Sotalol should be administered only after appropriate clinical assessment (see ), and the dosage of sotalol hydrochloride must be individualized for each patient on the basis of therapeutic response and tolerance. Proarrhythmic events can occur not only at initiation of therapy, but also with each upward dosage adjustment. INDICATIONS AND USAGEINDICATIONS AND USAGE

Adults

Dosage of sotalol hydrochloride should be adjusted gradually, allowing 3 days between dosing increments in order to attain steady-state plasma concentrations, and to allow monitoring of QT intervals. Graded dose adjustment will help prevent the usage of doses which are higher than necessary to control the arrhythmia. The recommended initial dose is 80 mg twice daily. This dose may be increased, if necessary, after appropriate evaluation to 240 or 320 mg/day (120 to 160 mg twice daily). In most patients, a therapeutic response is obtained at a total daily dose of 160 to 320 mg/day, given in two or three divided doses. Some patients with life-threatening refractory ventricular arrhythmias may require doses as high as 480 to 640 mg/day; however, these doses should only be prescribed when the potential benefit outweighs the increased risk of adverse events, in particular proarrhythmia. Because of the long terminal elimination half-life of sotalol, dosing on more than a BID regimen is usually not necessary.

Children

As in adults the following precautionary measures should be considered when initiating sotalol treatment in children: initiation of treatment in the hospital after appropriate clinical assessment; individualized regimen as appropriate; gradual increase of doses if required; careful assessment of therapeutic response and tolerability; and frequent monitoring of the QT interval and heart rate. c

For children aged about 2 years and greater

For children aged about 2 years and greater, with normal renal function, doses normalized for body surface area are appropriate for both initial and incremental dosing. Since the Class III potency in children (see ) is not very different from that in adults, reaching plasma concentrations that occur within the adult dose range is an appropriate guide. From pediatric pharmacokinetic data the following is recommended. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

For initiation of treatment, 30 mg/m three times a day (90 mg/m total daily dose) is approximately equivalent to the initial 160 mg total daily dose for adults. Subsequent titration to a maximum of 60 mg/m (approximately equivalent to the 360 mg total daily dose for adults) can then occur. Titration should be guided by clinical response, heart rate and QT , with increased dosing being preferably carried out in-hospital. At least 36 hours should be allowed between dose increments to attain steady-state plasma concentrations of sotalol in patients with age-adjusted normal renal function. 222c

For children aged about 2 years or younger

For children aged about 2 years or younger, the above pediatric dosage should be reduced by a factor that depends heavily upon age, as shown in the following graph, age plotted on a logarithmic scale in months.

For a child aged 20 months, the dosing suggested for children with normal renal function aged 2 years or greater should be multiplied by about 0.97; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.97) = 29.1 mg/m , administered three times daily. For a child aged 1 month, the starting dose should be multiplied by 0.68; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.68) = 20 mg/m , administered three times daily. For a child aged about 1 week, the initial starting dose should be multiplied by 0.3; the starting dose would be (30 X 0.3) = 9 mg/m . Similar calculations should be made for increased doses as titration proceeds. Since the half-life of sotalol decreases with decreasing age (below about 2 years), time to steady-state will also increase. Thus, in neonates the time to steady-state may be as long as a week or longer. 222

In all children, individualization of dosage is required. As in adults sotalol hydrochloride should be used with particular caution in children if the QT is greater than 500 msec on therapy, and serious consideration should be given to reducing the dose or discontinuing therapy when QT exceeds 550 msec. cc

Dosage in Renal Impairment

Adults

Because sotalol is excreted predominantly in urine and its terminal elimination half-life is prolonged in conditions of renal impairment, the dosing interval (time between divided doses) of sotalol should be modified (when creatinine clearance is lower than 60 mL/min) according to the following table.
Creatinine Clearance mL/min Dosing Interval (hours) a >60 12 30 to 59 24 10 to 29 36 to 48 <10 Dose should be individualized
The initial dose of 80 mg and subsequent doses should be administered at these intervals. See following paragraph for dosage escalations. a

Since the terminal elimination half-life of sotalol hydrochloride is increased in patients with renal impairment, a longer duration of dosing is required to reach steady-state. Dose escalations in renal impairment should be done after administration of at least 5 to 6 doses at appropriate intervals (see table above). Extreme caution should be exercised in the use of sotalol in patients with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis. The half-life of sotalol is prolonged (up to 69 hours) in anuric patients. Sotalol, however, can be partly removed by dialysis with subsequent partial rebound in concentrations when dialysis is completed. Both safety (heart rate, QT interval) and efficacy (arrhythmia control) must be closely monitored.

Children

The use of sotalol hydrochloride in children with renal impairment has not been investigated. Sotalol elimination is predominantly via the kidney in the unchanged form. Use of sotalol in any age group with decreased renal function should be at lower doses or at increased intervals between doses. Monitoring of heart rate and QT is more important and it will take much longer to reach steady-state with any dose and/or frequency of administration. c

Transfer to Sotalol

Before starting sotalol, previous antiarrhythmic therapy should generally be withdrawn under careful monitoring for a minimum of 2 to 3 plasma half-lives if the patient's clinical condition permits (see ). Treatment has been initiated in some patients receiving I.V. lidocaine without ill effect. After discontinuation of amiodarone, sotalol should not be initiated until the QT interval is normalized (see ). Drug InteractionsWARNINGS

Preparation of Extemporaneous Oral Solution

Sotalol hydrochloride syrup 5 mg/mL can be compounded using Simple Syrup containing 0.1% sodium benzoate (Syrup, NF) available from Humco Laboratories as follows:
Measure 120 mL of Simple Syrup. Transfer the syrup to a 6-ounce amber plastic (polyethylene terephthalate [PET]) prescription bottle. NOTE: An oversized bottle is used to allow for a headspace, so that there will be more effective mixing during shaking of the bottle. Add five (5) sotalol hydrochloride 120 mg tablets to the bottle. These tablets are added intact; it is not necessary to crush the tablets. NOTE: The addition of the tablets can also be done first. The tablets can also be crushed if preferred. If the tablets are crushed, care should be taken to transfer the entire quantity of tablet powder into the bottle containing the syrup. Shake the bottle to wet the entire surface of the tablets. If the tablets have been crushed, shake the bottle until the endpoint is achieved. Allow the tablets to hydrate for at least two hours. After at least two hours have elapsed, shake the bottle intermittently over the course of at least another two hours until the tablets are completely disintegrated. NOTE: The tablets can be allowed to hydrate overnight to simplify the disintegration process.
The endpoint is achieved when a dispersion of fine particles in the syrup is obtained.

This compounding procedure results in a solution containing 5 mg/mL of sotalol HCI. The fine solid particles are the water-insoluble inactive ingredients of the tablets.

This extemporaneously prepared oral solution of sotalol HCI (with suspended inactive particles) must be shaken well prior to administration. This is to ensure that the amount of inactive solid particles per dose remains constant throughout the duration of use.

Stability studies indicate that the suspension is stable for three months when stored at controlled room temperature (20°-25°C/68°-77°F) and ambient humidity.

Transfer to Betapace AF from Sotalol ®

Patients with a history of symptomatic AFIB/AFL who are currently receiving sotalol for the maintenance of normal sinus rhythm should be transferred to Betapace AF because of the significant differences in labeling (i.e., patient package insert for Betapace AF , dosing administration, and safety information). ®®

Adults

Dosage of sotalol hydrochloride should be adjusted gradually, allowing 3 days between dosing increments in order to attain steady-state plasma concentrations, and to allow monitoring of QT intervals. Graded dose adjustment will help prevent the usage of doses which are higher than necessary to control the arrhythmia. The recommended initial dose is 80 mg twice daily. This dose may be increased, if necessary, after appropriate evaluation to 240 or 320 mg/day (120 to 160 mg twice daily). In most patients, a therapeutic response is obtained at a total daily dose of 160 to 320 mg/day, given in two or three divided doses. Some patients with life-threatening refractory ventricular arrhythmias may require doses as high as 480 to 640 mg/day; however, these doses should only be prescribed when the potential benefit outweighs the increased risk of adverse events, in particular proarrhythmia. Because of the long terminal elimination half-life of sotalol, dosing on more than a BID regimen is usually not necessary.

Children

As in adults the following precautionary measures should be considered when initiating sotalol treatment in children: initiation of treatment in the hospital after appropriate clinical assessment; individualized regimen as appropriate; gradual increase of doses if required; careful assessment of therapeutic response and tolerability; and frequent monitoring of the QT interval and heart rate. c

For children aged about 2 years and greater

For children aged about 2 years and greater, with normal renal function, doses normalized for body surface area are appropriate for both initial and incremental dosing. Since the Class III potency in children (see ) is not very different from that in adults, reaching plasma concentrations that occur within the adult dose range is an appropriate guide. From pediatric pharmacokinetic data the following is recommended. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

For initiation of treatment, 30 mg/m three times a day (90 mg/m total daily dose) is approximately equivalent to the initial 160 mg total daily dose for adults. Subsequent titration to a maximum of 60 mg/m (approximately equivalent to the 360 mg total daily dose for adults) can then occur. Titration should be guided by clinical response, heart rate and QT , with increased dosing being preferably carried out in-hospital. At least 36 hours should be allowed between dose increments to attain steady-state plasma concentrations of sotalol in patients with age-adjusted normal renal function. 222c

For children aged about 2 years or younger

For children aged about 2 years or younger, the above pediatric dosage should be reduced by a factor that depends heavily upon age, as shown in the following graph, age plotted on a logarithmic scale in months.

For a child aged 20 months, the dosing suggested for children with normal renal function aged 2 years or greater should be multiplied by about 0.97; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.97) = 29.1 mg/m , administered three times daily. For a child aged 1 month, the starting dose should be multiplied by 0.68; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.68) = 20 mg/m , administered three times daily. For a child aged about 1 week, the initial starting dose should be multiplied by 0.3; the starting dose would be (30 X 0.3) = 9 mg/m . Similar calculations should be made for increased doses as titration proceeds. Since the half-life of sotalol decreases with decreasing age (below about 2 years), time to steady-state will also increase. Thus, in neonates the time to steady-state may be as long as a week or longer. 222

In all children, individualization of dosage is required. As in adults sotalol hydrochloride should be used with particular caution in children if the QT is greater than 500 msec on therapy, and serious consideration should be given to reducing the dose or discontinuing therapy when QT exceeds 550 msec. cc

For children aged about 2 years and greater

For children aged about 2 years and greater, with normal renal function, doses normalized for body surface area are appropriate for both initial and incremental dosing. Since the Class III potency in children (see ) is not very different from that in adults, reaching plasma concentrations that occur within the adult dose range is an appropriate guide. From pediatric pharmacokinetic data the following is recommended. CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

For initiation of treatment, 30 mg/m three times a day (90 mg/m total daily dose) is approximately equivalent to the initial 160 mg total daily dose for adults. Subsequent titration to a maximum of 60 mg/m (approximately equivalent to the 360 mg total daily dose for adults) can then occur. Titration should be guided by clinical response, heart rate and QT , with increased dosing being preferably carried out in-hospital. At least 36 hours should be allowed between dose increments to attain steady-state plasma concentrations of sotalol in patients with age-adjusted normal renal function. 222c

For children aged about 2 years or younger

For children aged about 2 years or younger, the above pediatric dosage should be reduced by a factor that depends heavily upon age, as shown in the following graph, age plotted on a logarithmic scale in months.

For a child aged 20 months, the dosing suggested for children with normal renal function aged 2 years or greater should be multiplied by about 0.97; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.97) = 29.1 mg/m , administered three times daily. For a child aged 1 month, the starting dose should be multiplied by 0.68; the initial starting dose would be (30 X 0.68) = 20 mg/m , administered three times daily. For a child aged about 1 week, the initial starting dose should be multiplied by 0.3; the starting dose would be (30 X 0.3) = 9 mg/m . Similar calculations should be made for increased doses as titration proceeds. Since the half-life of sotalol decreases with decreasing age (below about 2 years), time to steady-state will also increase. Thus, in neonates the time to steady-state may be as long as a week or longer. 222

In all children, individualization of dosage is required. As in adults sotalol hydrochloride should be used with particular caution in children if the QT is greater than 500 msec on therapy, and serious consideration should be given to reducing the dose or discontinuing therapy when QT exceeds 550 msec. cc

Dosage in Renal Impairment

Adults

Because sotalol is excreted predominantly in urine and its terminal elimination half-life is prolonged in conditions of renal impairment, the dosing interval (time between divided doses) of sotalol should be modified (when creatinine clearance is lower than 60 mL/min) according to the following table.
Creatinine Clearance mL/min Dosing Interval (hours) a >60 12 30 to 59 24 10 to 29 36 to 48 <10 Dose should be individualized
The initial dose of 80 mg and subsequent doses should be administered at these intervals. See following paragraph for dosage escalations. a

Since the terminal elimination half-life of sotalol hydrochloride is increased in patients with renal impairment, a longer duration of dosing is required to reach steady-state. Dose escalations in renal impairment should be done after administration of at least 5 to 6 doses at appropriate intervals (see table above). Extreme caution should be exercised in the use of sotalol in patients with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis. The half-life of sotalol is prolonged (up to 69 hours) in anuric patients. Sotalol, however, can be partly removed by dialysis with subsequent partial rebound in concentrations when dialysis is completed. Both safety (heart rate, QT interval) and efficacy (arrhythmia control) must be closely monitored.

Children

The use of sotalol hydrochloride in children with renal impairment has not been investigated. Sotalol elimination is predominantly via the kidney in the unchanged form. Use of sotalol in any age group with decreased renal function should be at lower doses or at increased intervals between doses. Monitoring of heart rate and QT is more important and it will take much longer to reach steady-state with any dose and/or frequency of administration. c

Adults

Because sotalol is excreted predominantly in urine and its terminal elimination half-life is prolonged in conditions of renal impairment, the dosing interval (time between divided doses) of sotalol should be modified (when creatinine clearance is lower than 60 mL/min) according to the following table.
Creatinine Clearance mL/min Dosing Interval (hours) a >60 12 30 to 59 24 10 to 29 36 to 48 <10 Dose should be individualized
The initial dose of 80 mg and subsequent doses should be administered at these intervals. See following paragraph for dosage escalations. a

Since the terminal elimination half-life of sotalol hydrochloride is increased in patients with renal impairment, a longer duration of dosing is required to reach steady-state. Dose escalations in renal impairment should be done after administration of at least 5 to 6 doses at appropriate intervals (see table above). Extreme caution should be exercised in the use of sotalol in patients with renal failure undergoing hemodialysis. The half-life of sotalol is prolonged (up to 69 hours) in anuric patients. Sotalol, however, can be partly removed by dialysis with subsequent partial rebound in concentrations when dialysis is completed. Both safety (heart rate, QT interval) and efficacy (arrhythmia control) must be closely monitored.

Children

The use of sotalol hydrochloride in children with renal impairment has not been investigated. Sotalol elimination is predominantly via the kidney in the unchanged form. Use of sotalol in any age group with decreased renal function should be at lower doses or at increased intervals between doses. Monitoring of heart rate and QT is more important and it will take much longer to reach steady-state with any dose and/or frequency of administration. c

Transfer to Sotalol

Before starting sotalol, previous antiarrhythmic therapy should generally be withdrawn under careful monitoring for a minimum of 2 to 3 plasma half-lives if the patient's clinical condition permits (see ). Treatment has been initiated in some patients receiving I.V. lidocaine without ill effect. After discontinuation of amiodarone, sotalol should not be initiated until the QT interval is normalized (see ). Drug InteractionsWARNINGS

Preparation of Extemporaneous Oral Solution

Sotalol hydrochloride syrup 5 mg/mL can be compounded using Simple Syrup containing 0.1% sodium benzoate (Syrup, NF) available from Humco Laboratories as follows:
Measure 120 mL of Simple Syrup. Transfer the syrup to a 6-ounce amber plastic (polyethylene terephthalate [PET]) prescription bottle. NOTE: An oversized bottle is used to allow for a headspace, so that there will be more effective mixing during shaking of the bottle. Add five (5) sotalol hydrochloride 120 mg tablets to the bottle. These tablets are added intact; it is not necessary to crush the tablets. NOTE: The addition of the tablets can also be done first. The tablets can also be crushed if preferred. If the tablets are crushed, care should be taken to transfer the entire quantity of tablet powder into the bottle containing the syrup. Shake the bottle to wet the entire surface of the tablets. If the tablets have been crushed, shake the bottle until the endpoint is achieved. Allow the tablets to hydrate for at least two hours. After at least two hours have elapsed, shake the bottle intermittently over the course of at least another two hours until the tablets are completely disintegrated. NOTE: The tablets can be allowed to hydrate overnight to simplify the disintegration process.
The endpoint is achieved when a dispersion of fine particles in the syrup is obtained.

This compounding procedure results in a solution containing 5 mg/mL of sotalol HCI. The fine solid particles are the water-insoluble inactive ingredients of the tablets.

This extemporaneously prepared oral solution of sotalol HCI (with suspended inactive particles) must be shaken well prior to administration. This is to ensure that the amount of inactive solid particles per dose remains constant throughout the duration of use.

Stability studies indicate that the suspension is stable for three months when stored at controlled room temperature (20°-25°C/68°-77°F) and ambient humidity.

Transfer to Betapace AF from Sotalol ®

Patients with a history of symptomatic AFIB/AFL who are currently receiving sotalol for the maintenance of normal sinus rhythm should be transferred to Betapace AF because of the significant differences in labeling (i.e., patient package insert for Betapace AF , dosing administration, and safety information). ®®
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer’s Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets have been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer’s disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride tablets steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Rivastigmine Tartrate

Rivastigmine Tartrate

Dementia of the Alzheimer's type

The dosage of Rivastigmine Tartrate Capsules shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials in Alzheimer’s Disease is 6 to 12 mg/day, given as twice a day dosing (daily doses of 3 to 6 mg BID). There is evidence from the clinical trials that doses at the higher end of this range may be more beneficial. The starting dose of Rivastigmine Tartrate Capsules is 1.5 mg twice a day (BID). If this dose is well tolerated, after a minimum of 2 weeks of treatment, the dose may be increased to 3 mg BID. Subsequent increases to 4.5 mg BID and 6 mg BID should be attempted after a minimum of 2 weeks at the previous dose. If adverse effects (e.g., nausea, vomiting, abdominal pain, loss of appetite) cause intolerance during treatment, the patient should be instructed to discontinue treatment for several doses and then restart at the same or next lower dose level. If treatment is interrupted for longer than several days, treatment should be reinitiated with the lowest daily dose and titrated as described above (see ). The maximum dose is 6 mg BID (12 mg/day).
WARNINGS
Dementia associated with Parkinson's Disease

The dosage of Rivastigmine Tartrate Capsules shown to be effective in the single controlled clinical trial conducted in dementia associated with Parkinson’s Disease is 3 to 12 mg/day, given as twice-a-day dosing (daily doses of 1.5 to 6 mg BID). In that medical condition, the starting dose of Rivastigmine Tartrate Capsules is 1.5 mg BID; subsequently, the dose may be increased to 3 mg BID and further to 4.5 mg BID and 6 mg BID, based on tolerability, with a minimum of 4 weeks at each dose. Rivastigmine Tartrate Capsules should be taken with meals in divided doses in the morning and evening.
Sulindac

Sulindac

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of sulindac and other treatment options before deciding to use sulindac. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see ). WARNINGS

After observing the response to initial therapy with sulindac, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient's needs.

Sulindac should be administered orally twice a day with food. The maximum dosage is 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day are not recommended.

In osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended starting dosage is 150 mg twice a day. The dosage may be lowered or raised depending on the response.

A prompt response (within one week) can be expected in about one-half of patients with osteoarthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, and rheumatoid arthritis. Others may require longer to respond.

In acute painful shoulder (acute subacromial bursitis/supraspinatus tendinitis) and acute gouty arthritis, the recommended dosage is 200 mg twice a day. After a satisfactory response has been achieved, the dosage may be reduced according to the response. In acute painful shoulder, therapy for 7-14 days is adequate. In acute gouty arthritis, therapy for 7 days is adequate. usuallyusually
Fenofibrate

Fenofibrate

2.1 General Considerations

Patients should be placed on an appropriate lipid-lowering diet before receiving Fenofibrate tablets for oral use, and should continue this diet during treatment with Fenofibrate tablets for oral use. Fenofibrate tablets for oral use can be given without regard to meals.

The initial treatment for dyslipidemia is dietary therapy specific for the type of lipoprotein abnormality. Excess body weight and excess alcoholic intake may be important factors in hypertriglyceridemia and should be addressed prior to any drug therapy. Physical exercise can be an important ancillary measure. Diseases contributory to hyperlipidemia, such as hypothyroidism or diabetes mellitus should be looked for and adequately treated. Estrogen therapy, thiazide diuretics and beta-blockers, are sometimes associated with massive rises in plasma triglycerides, especially in subjects with familial hypertriglyceridemia. In such cases, discontinuation of the specific etiologic agent may obviate the need for specific drug therapy of hypertriglyceridemia.

Lipid levels should be monitored periodically and consideration should be given to reducing the dosage of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use if lipid levels fall significantly below the targeted range.

Therapy should be withdrawn in patients who do not have an adequate response after two months of treatment with the maximum recommended dose of 145 mg once daily.

2.2 Primary Hypercholesterolemia or Mixed Dyslipidemia

The initial dose of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use is 145 mg once daily.

2.3 Severe Hypertriglyceridemia

The initial dose is 48 to 145 mg per day. Dosage should be individualized according to patient response, and should be adjusted if necessary following repeat lipid determinations at 4 to 8 week intervals. The maximum dose is 145 mg once daily.

2.4 Impaired Renal Function

Treatment with Fenofibrate tablets for oral use should be initiated at a dose of 48 mg per day in patients having mild to moderately impaired renal function, and increased only after evaluation of the effects on renal function and lipid levels at this dose. The use of Fenofibrate tablets for oral use should be avoided in patients with severe renal impairment . [see Use in Specific Populations and Clinical Pharmacology ] (8.6)(12.3)

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function . [see Use in Specific Populations ] (8.5)

2.5 Geriatric Patients

Dose selection for the elderly should be made on the basis of renal function . [see Use in Specific Populations ] (8.5)
Lescol Xl

Lescol Xl

2.1     General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/ day.

LESCOL/LESCOL XL can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not break, crush or chew LESCOL XL tablets or open LESCOL capsules prior to administration.

Do not take two LESCOL 40 mg capsules at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, 80 mg as one LESCOL XL tablet administered as a single dose at any time of the day or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of <25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2     Adult Patients with Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on either LESCOL or LESCOL XL. The recommended starting dose for LESCOL is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one LESCOL 40 mg capsule twice daily. Do not take two LESCOL 40 mg capsules at one time.

The recommended starting dose for LESCOL XL is one 80 mg tablet administered as a single dose at any time of the day.

2.3     Pediatric Patients (10-16 years of age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one 20 mg LESCOL capsule. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered either as LESCOL capsules 40 mg twice daily or one LESCOL XL 80 mg tablet once daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy [ ] . see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and CLINICAL STUDIES(14)1

National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. 89(3):495-501. 1992. 1Pediatrics.

2.4     Use with Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg b.i.d. LESCOL in patients taking cyclosporine . [see Drug Interactions 7.1]

2.5     Use with Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg b.i.d. LESCOL in patients taking fluconazole . [see Drug Interactions 7.2]
Nifedipine

Nifedipine

The dosage of nifedipine needed to suppress angina and that can be tolerated by the patient must be established by titration. Excessive doses can result in hypotension.

Therapy should be initiated with the 10 mg capsule. The starting dose is one 10 mg capsule, swallowed whole, 3 times/day. The usual effective dose range is 10–20 mg three times daily. Some patients, especially those with evidence of coronary artery spasm, respond only to higher doses, more frequent administration, or both. In such patients, doses of 20–30 mg three or four times daily may be effective. Doses above 120 mg daily are rarely necessary. More than 180 mg per day is not recommended.

In most cases, nifedipine titration should proceed over a 7–14 day period so that the physician can assess the response to each dose level andmonitor the blood pressure before proceeding to higher doses.

If symptoms so warrant, titration may proceed more rapidly provided that the patient is assessed frequently. Based on the patient’s physical activity level, attack frequency, and sublingual nitroglycerin consumption, the dose of nifedipine may be increased from 10 mg t.i.d. to 20 mg t.i.d. and then to 30 mg t.i.d. over a three-day period.

In hospitalized patients under close observation, the dose may be increased in 10 mg increments over four- to six-hour periods as required to control pain and arrhythmias due to ischemia. A single dose should rarely exceed 30 mg.

Co-administration of nifedipine with grapefruit juice is to be avoided (See and ). CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPRECAUTIONS: Other Interactions

No “rebound effect” has been observed upon discontinuation of nifedipine. However, if discontinuation of nifedipine is necessary, sound clinical practice suggests that the dosage should be decreased gradually with close physician supervision.

Co-Administration with Other Antianginal Drugs

Sublingual nitroglycerin may be taken as required for the control of acute manifestations of angina, particularly during nifedipine titration. See , for information on coadministration of nifedipine with beta blockers or long-acting nitrates. PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions
Itraconazole

Itraconazole

Itraconazole Capsules should be taken with a full meal to ensure maximal absorption. Itraconazole Capsules must be swallowed whole.

Itraconazole Capsules are a different preparation than SPORANOX (itraconazole) Oral Solution and should not be used interchangeably. ®

Treatment of Blastomycosis and Histoplasmosis

The recommended dose is 200 mg once daily (2 capsules). If there is no obvious improvement, or there is evidence of progressive fungal disease, the dose should be increased in 100-mg increments to a maximum of 400 mg daily. Doses above 200 mg/day should be given in two divided doses.

Treatment of Aspergillosis

A daily dose of 200 to 400 mg is recommended.

Treatment in Life-Threatening Situations

In life-threatening situations, a loading dose should be used.

Although clinical studies did not provide for a loading dose, it is recommended, based on pharmacokinetic data, that a loading dose of 200 mg (2 capsules) three times daily (600 mg/day) be given for the first 3 days of treatment.

Treatment should be continued for a minimum of three months and until clinical parameters and laboratory tests indicate that the active fungal infection has subsided. An inadequate period of treatment may lead to recurrence of active infection.

Itraconazole Capsules and SPORANOX (itraconazole) Oral Solution should not be used interchangeably. Only the oral solution has been demonstrated effective for oral and/or esophageal candidiasis. ®

Treatment of Onychomycosis

Toenails with or without fingernail involvement: The recommended dose is 200 mg (2 capsules) once daily for 12 consecutive weeks.

Treatment of Onychomycosis

Fingernails only: The recommended dosing regimen is 2 treatment pulses, each consisting of 200 mg (2 capsules) b.i.d. (400 mg/day) for 1 week. The pulses are separated by a 3-week period without itraconazole.

Use in Patients with Renal Impairment

Limited data are available on the use of oral itraconazole in patients with renal impairment. Caution should be exercised when this drug is administered in this patient population. (See and .) CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Special PopulationsPRECAUTIONS

Use in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Limited data are available on the use of oral itraconazole in patients with hepatic impairment. Caution should be exercised when this drug is administered in this patient population. (See , , and .) CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Special PopulationsWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS
Strattera

Strattera

2.1 Acute Treatment

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of approximately 0.5 mg/kg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 1.2 mg/kg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. No additional benefit has been demonstrated for doses higher than 1.2 mg/kg/day . Dosing of children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The total daily dose in children and adolescents should not exceed 1.4 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is less.

— STRATTERA should be initiated at a total daily dose of 40 mg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 80 mg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. After 2 to 4 additional weeks, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 100 mg in patients who have not achieved an optimal response. There are no data that support increased effectiveness at higher doses . Dosing of children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14

The maximum recommended total daily dose in children and adolescents over 70 kg and adults is 100 mg.

2.2 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. The benefit of maintaining pediatric patients (ages 6-15 years) with ADHD on STRATTERA after achieving a response in a dose range of 1.2 to 1.8 mg/kg/day was demonstrated in a controlled trial. Patients assigned to STRATTERA in the maintenance phase were generally continued on the same dose used to achieve a response in the open label phase. The physician who elects to use STRATTERA for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient . [see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

2.3 General Dosing Information

STRATTERA may be taken with or without food.

STRATTERA can be discontinued without being tapered.

STRATTERA capsules are not intended to be opened, they should be taken whole . [see Patient Counseling Information ( )] 17.6

The safety of single doses over 120 mg and total daily doses above 150 mg have not been systematically evaluated.

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

— For those ADHD patients who have hepatic insufficiency (HI), dosage adjustment is recommended as follows: For patients with moderate HI (Child-Pugh Class B), initial and target doses should be reduced to 50% of the normal dose (for patients without HI). For patients with severe HI (Child-Pugh Class C), initial dose and target doses should be reduced to 25% of normal . Dosing adjustment for hepatically impaired patients[see Use In Specific Populations ( )] 8.6

— In children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs, STRATTERA should be initiated at 0.5 mg/kg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 1.2 mg/kg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated. Dosing adjustment for use with a strong CYP2D6 inhibitor or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs

In children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, STRATTERA should be initiated at 40 mg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 80 mg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.
Duloxetine

Duloxetine

Duloxetine should be swallowed whole and should not be chewed or crushed, nor should the capsule be opened and its contents sprinkled on food or mixed with liquids. All of these might affect the enteric coating. Duloxetine can be given without regard to meals.

2.1 Initial Treatment

— Duloxetine should be administered at a total dose of 40 mg/day (given as 20 mg twice daily) to 60 mg/day (given either once daily or as 30 mg twice daily). For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg/day dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer any additional benefits. The safety of doses above 120 mg/day has not been adequately evaluated . Major Depressive Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

— For most patients, the recommended starting dose for duloxetine is 60 mg administered once daily. For some patients, it may be desirable to start at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. While a 120 mg once daily dose was shown to be effective, there is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit. Nevertheless, if a decision is made to increase the dose beyond 60 mg once daily, dose increases should be in increments of 30 mg once daily. The safety of doses above 120 mg once daily has not been adequately evaluated . Generalized Anxiety Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

— The recommended dose for duloxetine is 60 mg administered once daily. There is no evidence that doses higher than 60 mg confer additional significant benefit and the higher dose is clearly less well tolerated . For patients for whom tolerability is a concern, a lower starting dose may be considered. Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.3

Since diabetes is frequently complicated by renal disease, a lower starting dose and gradual increase in dose should be considered for patients with renal impairment . [see Dosage and Administration ( ), Use in Specific Populations ( ), and Clinical Pharmacology ( )] 2.38.1012.3

— The recommended dose for duloxetine is 60 mg administered once daily. Treatment should begin at 30 mg once daily for 1 week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. Some patients may respond to the starting dose. There is no evidence that doses greater than 60 mg/day confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions . Fibromyalgia[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.4

— The recommended dose for duloxetine is 60 mg once daily. Dosing may be started at 30 mg for one week, to allow patients to adjust to the medication before increasing to 60 mg once daily. There is no evidence that higher doses confer additional benefit, even in patients who do not respond to a 60 mg dose, and higher doses are associated with a higher rate of adverse reactions . Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.5

2.2 Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment

— It is generally agreed that acute episodes of major depression require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in MDD was demonstrated with duloxetine as monotherapy. Duloxetine should be administered at a total dose of 60 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment . Major Depressive Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.1

— It is generally agreed that episodes of generalized anxiety disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacological therapy. Maintenance of efficacy in GAD was demonstrated with duloxetine as monotherapy. Duloxetine should be administered in a dose range of 60-120 mg once daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the continued need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment . Generalized Anxiety Disorder[see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

— As the progression of diabetic peripheral neuropathy is highly variable and management of pain is empirical, the effectiveness of duloxetine must be assessed individually. Efficacy beyond 12 weeks has not been systematically studied in placebo-controlled trials. Diabetic Peripheral Neuropathic Pain

— Fibromyalgia is recognized as a chronic condition. The efficacy of duloxetine in the management of fibromyalgia has been demonstrated in placebo-controlled studies up to 3 months. The efficacy of duloxetine was not demonstrated in longer studies; however, continued treatment should be based on individual patient response. Fibromyalgia

— The efficacy of duloxetine has not been established in placebo-controlled studies beyond 13 weeks. Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain

2.3 Dosing in Special Populations

— It is recommended that duloxetine should ordinarily not be administered to patients with any hepatic insufficiency . Hepatic Insufficiency[see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Use in Specific Populations ( )] 5.138.9

—Duloxetine is not recommended for patients with end-stage renal disease or severe renal impairment (estimated creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) . Severe Renal Impairment[see Warnings and Precautions ( ) and Use in Specific Populations ( )] 5.138.10

— No dose adjustment is recommended for elderly patients on the basis of age. As with any drug, caution should be exercised in treating the elderly. When individualizing the dosage in elderly patients, extra care should be taken when increasing the dose . Elderly Patients[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.5

— There are no adequate and well-controlled studies in pregnant women; therefore, duloxetine should be used during pregnancy only if the potential benefit justifies the potential risk to the fetus . Pregnant Women[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.1

Lilly maintains a pregnancy registry to monitor the pregnancy outcomes of women exposed to duloxetine while pregnant. Healthcare providers are encouraged to register any patient who is exposed to duloxetine during pregnancy by calling the Cymbalta Pregnancy Registry at 1-866-814-6975 or by visiting www.cymbaltapregnancyregistry.com

— Because the safety of duloxetine in infants is not known, nursing while on duloxetine is not recommended . Nursing Mothers[see Use in Specific Populations ( )] 8.3

2.4 Discontinuing Duloxetine

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of duloxetine and other SSRIs and SNRIs have been reported. A gradual reduction in the dose rather than abrupt cessation is recommended whenever possible . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.7

2.5 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with duloxetine. Conversely, at least 5 days should be allowed after stopping duloxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications ( )]. 4.1

2.6 Use of Duloxetine with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start duloxetine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications ( )]. 4.1

In some cases, a patient already receiving duloxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, duloxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 5 days or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with duloxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.4

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with duloxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use . [see Warnings and Precautions ( )] 5.4
Afeditab Cr

Afeditab Cr

Dosage should be adjusted according to each patient’s needs. It is recommended that nifedipine extended-release tablets be administered orally once daily on an empty stomach. Afeditab CR is an extended release dosage form and tablets should be swallowed whole, not bitten or divided. In general, titration should proceed over a 7 to 14 day period starting with 30 mg once daily. Upward titration should be based on therapeutic efficacy and safety. The usual maintenance dose is 30 mg to 60 mg once daily. Titration to doses above 90 mg daily is not recommended. ®

If discontinuation of Afeditab CR is necessary, sound clinical practice suggests that the dosage should be decreased gradually with close physician supervision. Co-administration of nifedipine with grapefruit juice is to be avoided (See and ). ®CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGYPRECAUTIONS

Care should be taken when dispensing Afeditab CR to assure that the extended-release dosage form has been prescribed. ®
Amantadine Hydrochlorid...

Amantadine Hydrochloride

The dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules may need reduction in patients with congestive heart failure, peripheral edema, orthostatic hypotension, or impaired renal function (see ). Dosage for Impaired Renal Function

Dosage for Prophylaxis and Treatment of Uncomplicated Influenza A Virus Illness

Adult

The adult daily dosage of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 200 mg; two 100 mg capsules as a single daily dose. The daily dosage may be split into one capsule of 100 mg twice a day. If central nervous system effects develop in once-a-day dosage, a split dosage schedule may reduce such complaints. In persons 65 years of age or older, the daily dosage of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg.

A 100 mg daily dose has also been shown in experimental challenge studies to be effective as prophylaxis in healthy adults who are not at high risk for influenza-related complications. However, it has not been demonstrated that a 100 mg daily dose is as effective as a 200 mg daily dose for prophylaxis, nor has the 100 mg daily dose been studied in the treatment of acute influenza illness. In recent clinical trials, the incidence of central nervous system (CNS) side effects associated with the 100 mg daily dose was at or near the level of placebo. The 100 mg dose is recommended for persons who have demonstrated intolerance to 200 mg of amantadine hydrochloride daily because of CNS or other toxicities.

Pediatric Patients

1 yr. to 9 yrs. of age

The total daily dose should be calculated on the basis of 2 to 4 mg/lb/day (4.4 to 8.8 mg/kg/day), but not to exceed 150 mg per day.

9 yrs. to 12 yrs. of age

The total daily dose is 200 mg given as one capsule of 100 mg twice a day. The 100 mg daily dose has not been studied in this pediatric population. Therefore, there are no data which demonstrate that this dose is as effective as or is safer than the 200 mg daily dose in this patient population.

Prophylactic dosing should be started in anticipation of an influenza A outbreak and before or after contact with individuals with influenza A virus respiratory tract illness.

Amantadine hydrochloride capsules should be continued daily for at least 10 days following a known exposure. If amantadine is used chemoprophylactically in conjunction with inactivated influenza A virus vaccine until protective antibody responses develop, then it should be administered for 2 to 4 weeks after the vaccine has been given. When inactivated influenza A virus vaccine is unavailable or contraindicated, amantadine hydrochloride capsules should be administered for the duration of known influenza A in the community because of repeated and unknown exposure.

Treatment of influenza A virus illness should be started as soon as possible, preferably within 24 to 48 hours after onset of signs and symptoms, and should be continued for 24 to 48 hours after the disappearance of signs and symptoms.

Dosage for Parkinsonism

Adult

The usual dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg twice a day when used alone. Amantadine has an onset of action usually within 48 hours.

The initial dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg daily for patients with serious associated medical illnesses or who are receiving high doses of other antiparkinson drugs. After one to several weeks at 100 mg once daily, the dose may be increased to 100 mg twice daily, if necessary.

Occasionally, patients whose responses are not optimal with amantadine hydrochloride capsules at 200 mg daily may benefit from an increase up to 400 mg daily in divided doses. However, such patients should be supervised closely by their physicians.

Patients initially deriving benefit from amantadine hydrochloride capsules not uncommonly experience a fall-off of effectiveness after a few months. Benefit may be regained by increasing the dose to 300 mg daily. Alternatively, temporary discontinuation of amantadine hydrochloride capsules for several weeks, followed by reinitiation of the drug, may result in regaining benefit in some patients. A decision to use other antiparkinson drugs may be necessary.

Dosage for Concomitant Therapy

Some patients who do not respond to anticholinergic antiparkinson drugs may respond to amantadine hydrochloride capsules. When amantadine hydrochloride capsules or anticholinergic antiparkinson drugs are each used with marginal benefit, concomitant use may produce additional benefit.

When amantadine and levodopa are initiated concurrently, the patient can exhibit rapid therapeutic benefits. Amantadine hydrochloride capsules should be held constant at 100 mg daily or twice daily while the daily dose of levodopa is gradually increased to optimal benefit.

When amantadine is added to optimal well-tolerated doses of levodopa, additional benefit may result, including smoothing out the fluctuations in improvement which sometimes occur in patients on levodopa alone. Patients who require a reduction in their usual dose of levodopa because of development of side effects may possibly regain lost benefit with the addition of amantadine hydrochloride capsules.

Dosage for Drug Induced Extrapyramidal Reactions

Adult

The usual dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg twice a day. Occasionally, patients whose responses are not optimal with amantadine hydrochloride capsules at 200 mg daily may benefit from an increase up to 300 mg daily in divided doses.

Dosage for Impaired Renal Function

Depending upon creatinine clearance, the following dosage adjustments are recommended:

CREATININE CLEARANCE

(mL/min/1.73m ) 2

AMANTADINE

HYDROCHLORIDE

CAPSULES DOSAGE

30 to 50

200 mg 1st day and 100 mg each day thereafter

15 to 29

200 mg 1st day followed by 100 mg on

alternate days

<15

200 mg every 7 days

The recommended dosage for patients on hemodialysis is 200 mg every 7 days.
Torsemide

Torsemide

Torsemide tablets may be given at any time in relation to a meal, as convenient. Special dosage adjustment in the elderly is not necessary. The usual initial dose is 10 mg or 20 mg of once-daily oral torsemide. If the diuretic response is inadequate, the dose should be titrated upward by approximately doubling until the desired diuretic response is obtained. Single doses higher than 200 mg have not been adequately studied. The usual initial dose of torsemide is 20 mg of once-daily oral torsemide. If the diuretic response is inadequate, the dose should be titrated upward by approximately doubling until the desired diuretic response is obtained. Single doses higher than 200 mg have not been adequately studied. The usual initial dose is 5 mg or 10 mg of once-daily oral torsemide, administered together with an aldosterone antagonist or a potassium-sparing diuretic. If the diuretic response is inadequate, the dose should be titrated upward by approximately doubling until the desired diuretic response is obtained. Single doses higher than 40 mg have not been adequately studied. Chronic use of any diuretic in hepatic disease has not been studied in adequate and well-controlled trials. The usual initial dose is 5 mg once daily. If the 5 mg dose does not provide adequate reduction in blood pressure within 4 to 6 weeks, the dose may be increased to 10 mg once daily. If the response to 10 mg is insufficient, an additional antihypertensive agent should be added to the treatment regimen.
General Congestive Heart Failure Chronic Renal Failure Hepatic Cirrhosis Hypertension
Mexiletine Hydrochlorid...

Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The dosage of mexiletine hydrochloride must be individualized on the basis of response and tolerance, both of which are dose-related. Administration with food or antacid is recommended. Initiate mexiletine therapy with 200 mg every eight hours when rapid control of arrhythmia is not essential. A minimum of two to three days between dose adjustments is recommended. Dose may be adjusted in 50 or 100 mg increments up or down.

As with any antiarrhythmic drug, clinical and electrocardiographic evaluation (including Holter monitoring if necessary for evaluation) are needed to determine whether the desired antiarrhythmic effect has been obtained and to guide titration and dose adjustment.

Satisfactory control can be achieved in most patients by 200 to 300 mg given every eight hours with food or antacid. If satisfactory response has not been achieved at 300 mg q8h, and the patient tolerates mexiletine well, a dose of 400 mg q8h may be tried. As the severity of CNS side effects increases with total daily dose, the dose should not exceed 1200 mg/day.

In general, patients with renal failure will require the usual doses of mexiletine hydrochloride. Patients with severe liver disease, however, may require lower doses and must be monitored closely. Similarly, marked right-sided congestive heart failure can reduce hepatic metabolism and reduce the needed dose. Plasma level may also be affected by certain concomitant drugs (see , ). PRECAUTIONSDrug Interactions

Loading Dose

When rapid control of ventricular arrhythmia is essential, an initial loading dose of 400 mg of mexiletine hydrochloride may be administered, followed by a 200 mg dose in eight hours. Onset of therapeutic effect is usually observed within 30 minutes to two hours.

Q12H Dosage Schedule

Some patients responding to mexiletine may be transferred to a 12 hour dosage schedule to improve convenience and compliance. If adequate suppression is achieved on a mexiletine hydrochloride dose of 300 mg or less every eight hours, the same total daily dose may be given in divided doses every 12 hours while carefully monitoring the degree of suppression of ventricular ectopy. This dose may be adjusted up to a maximum of 450 mg every 12 hours to achieve the desired response.

Transferring to Mexiletine Hydrochloride

The following dosage schedule, based on theoretical considerations rather than experimental data, is suggested for transferring patients from other Class I oral antiarrhythmic agents to mexiletine: mexiletine hydrochloride treatment may be initiated with a 200 mg dose, and titrated to response as described above, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of quinidine sulfate, 3 to 6 hours after the last dose of procainamide, 6 to 12 hours after the last dose of disopryramide or 8 to 12 hours after the last dose of tocainide.

In patients in whom withdrawal of the previous antiarrhythmic agent is likely to produce life-threatening arrhythmias, hospitalization of the patient is recommended.

When transferring from lidocaine to mexiletine, the lidocaine infusion should be stopped when the first oral dose of mexiletine hydrochloride is administered. The infusion line should be left open until suppression of the arrhythmia appears to be satisfactorily maintained. Consideration should be given to the similarity of the adverse effects of lidocaine and mexiletine and the possibility that they may be additive.
Fexofenadine Hydrochlor...

Fexofenadine Hydrochloride

adults and children 12 years of age and over take one 180 mg tablet with water once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours children under 12 years of age do not use adults 65 years of age and older ask a doctor consumers with kidney disease ask a doctor
Diovan

Diovan

2.1     Adult Hypertension

The recommended starting dose of Diovan (valsartan) is 80 mg or 160 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-depleted. Patients requiring greater reductions may be started at the higher dose. Diovan may be used over a dose range of 80 mg to 320 mg daily, administered once a day.

The antihypertensive effect is substantially present within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. If additional antihypertensive effect is required over the starting dose range, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 320 mg or a diuretic may be added. Addition of a diuretic has a greater effect than dose increases beyond 80 mg.

No initial dosage adjustment is required for elderly patients, for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment, or for patients with mild or moderate liver insufficiency. Care should be exercised with dosing of Diovan in patients with hepatic or severe renal impairment.

Diovan may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Diovan may be administered with or without food.

2.2     Pediatric Hypertension 6 to 16 Years of Age

For children who can swallow tablets, the usual recommended starting dose is 1.3 mg/kg once daily (up to 40 mg total). The dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses higher than 2.7 mg/kg (up to 160 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients 6 to 16 years old.

For children who cannot swallow tablets, or children for whom the calculated dosage (mg/kg) does not correspond to the available tablet strengths of Diovan, the use of a suspension is recommended. Follow the suspension preparation instructions below (see ) to administer valsartan as a suspension. When the suspension is replaced by a tablet, the dose of valsartan may have to be increased. The exposure to valsartan with the suspension is 1.6 times greater than with the tablet. Preparation of Suspension

No data are available in pediatric patients either undergoing dialysis or with a glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m . 2[see Pediatric Use (8.4)]

Diovan is not recommended for patients <6 years old . [see Adverse Reactions (6.1), Clinical Studies (14.1)]

Preparation of Suspension (for160 mL of a 4mg/mL suspension)

Add 80 mL of Ora-Plus * oral suspending vehicle to an amber glass bottle containing 8 Diovan 80 mg tablets, and shake for a minimum of 2 minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of 1 additional minute. Add 80 mL of Ora-Sweet SF * oral sweetening vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension for at least 10 seconds to disperse the ingredients. The suspension is homogenous and can be stored for either up to 30 days at room temperature (below 30ºC/86ºF) or up to 75 days at refrigerated conditions (2-8ºC/35-46ºF) in the glass bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the bottle well (at least 10 seconds) prior to dispensing the suspension. ®®

*Ora-Sweet SF and Ora-Plus are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc. ®®

2.3     Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose of Diovan is 40 mg twice daily. Uptitration to 80 mg and 160 mg twice daily should be done to the highest dose, as tolerated by the patient. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials is 320 mg in divided doses.

2.4     Post-Myocardial Infarction

Diovan may be initiated as early as 12 hours after a myocardial infarction. The recommended starting dose of Diovan is 20 mg twice daily. Patients may be uptitrated within 7 days to 40 mg twice daily, with subsequent titrations to a target maintenance dose of 160 mg twice daily, as tolerated by the patient. If symptomatic hypotension or renal dysfunction occurs, consideration should be given to a dosage reduction. Diovan may be given with other standard post-myocardial infarction treatment, including thrombolytics, aspirin, beta-blockers, and statins.
Dexamethasone Intensol ...

Dexamethasone Intensol Solution

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Chlorhexidine Gluconate...

Chlorhexidine Gluconate Rinse

Chlorhexidine gluconate oral rinse therapy should be initiated directly following a dental prophylaxis. Patients using chlorhexidine gluconate oral rinse should be reevaluated and given a thorough prophylaxis at intervals no longer than six months.

Recommended use is twice daily oral rinsing for 30 seconds, morning and evening after tooth brushing. Usual dosage is 15 ml (marked in cap) of undiluted chlorhexidine gluconate oral rinse. Patients should be instructed to not rinse with water, or other mouthwashes, brush teeth, or eat immediately after using chlorhexidine gluconate oral rinse. Chlorhexidine gluconate oral rinse is not intended for ingestion and should be expectorated after rinsing.
Triamterene Hydrochloro...

Triamterene Hydrochlorothiazide

The usual dose of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg is one or two tablets daily, given as a single dose, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see ). The usual dose of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 75 mg/50 mg, is one tablet daily, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see ). There is no experience with the use of more than one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 75 mg/50 mg daily or more than two triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg daily. Clinical experience with the administration of two triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg daily in divided doses (rather than as a single dose) suggests an increased risk of electrolyte imbalance and renal dysfunction. WARNINGSWARNINGS

Patients receiving 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 75 mg/50 mg directly. Patients receiving 25 mg hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 37.5 mg/25 mg directly.

In patients requiring hydrochlorothiazide therapy and in whom hypokalemia cannot be risked, therapy may be initiated with triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg. If an optimal blood pressure response is not obtained with this product the dose should be increased to two tablets daily as a single dose, or to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 75 mg/50 mg daily. If blood pressure still is not controlled, another antihypertensive agent may be added (see ). PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions

Clinical studies have shown patients taking less bioavailable formulations of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide in daily doses of 25 to 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide and 50 to 100 mg of triamterene may be safely changed to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 37.5 mg/25 mg daily. All patients changed from less bioavailable formulations of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide to this tablet formulation should be monitored clinically and for serum potassium after the transfer.
Isradipine

Isradipine

The dosage of isradipine should be individualized. The recommended initial dose of isradipine is 2.5 mg b.i.d. alone or in combination with a thiazide diuretic. An antihypertensive response usually occurs within 2-3 hours. Maximal response may require 2-4 weeks. If a satisfactory reduction in blood pressure does not occur after this period, the dose may be adjusted in increments of 5 mg/day at 2-4 week intervals up to a maximum of 20 mg/day. Most patients, however, show no additional response to doses above 10 mg/day, and adverse effects are increased in frequency above 10 mg/day.

The bioavailability of isradipine (increased AUC) is increased in elderly patients (above 65 years of age), patients with hepatic functional impairment, and patients with mild renal impairment. Ordinarily, the starting dose should still be 2.5 mg b.i.d. in these patients.
Acetaminophen And Diphe...

Acetaminophen And Diphenhydramine Hcl

adults and children 12 years or over:
take 2 captabs at bedtine if needed do not take more than directed
childrens under 12 years do not use
Nystatin

Nystatin

The usual therapeutic dosage is one to two tablets (500,000 to 1,000,000 units nystatin) three times daily. Treatment should generally be continued for at least 48 hours after clinical cure to prevent relapse.
Atorvastatin Calcium

Atorvastatin Calcium

2.1 Hyperlipidemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia ( Types IIa and IIb) Fredrickson

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 or 20 mg once daily. Patients who require a large reduction in LDL-C (more than 45%) may be started at 40 mg once daily. The dosage range of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 to 80 mg once daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets can be administered as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. The starting dose and maintenance doses of atorvastatin calcium tablets should be individualized according to patient characteristics such as goal of therapy and response (see current ). After initiation and/or upon titration of atorvastatin calcium tablets, lipid levels should be analyzed within 2 to 4 weeks and dosage adjusted accordingly. NCEP Guidelines

2.2 Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia in Pediatric Patients (10 to 17 years of age)

The recommended starting dose of atorvastatin calcium tablets is 10 mg/day; the maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population). Doses should be individualized according to the recommended goal of therapy [see current , , and ]. Adjustments should be made at intervals of 4 weeks or more. NCEP Pediatric Panel GuidelinesClinical Pharmacology (12)Indications and Usage (1.2)

2.3 Homozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The dosage of atorvastatin calcium tablets in patients with homozygous FH is 10 to 80 mg daily. Atorvastatin calcium tablets should be used as an adjunct to other lipid-lowering treatments (e.g., LDL apheresis) in these patients or if such treatments are unavailable.

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Lowering Therapy

Atorvastatin calcium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. The combination of HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors (statins) and fibrates should generally be used with caution [see , ]. Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1)Drug Interactions (7)

2.5 Dosage in Patients With Renal Impairment

Renal disease does not affect the plasma concentrations nor LDL-C reduction of atorvastatin; thus, dosage adjustment in patients with renal dysfunction is not necessary [see , ]. Warnings and Precautions, Skeletal Muscle (5.1)Clinical Pharmacology, Pharmacokinetics (12.3)

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine, Clarithromycin, Itraconazole, or Certain Protease Inhibitors

In patients taking cyclosporine or the HIV protease inhibitors (tipranavir plus ritonavir) or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor (telaprevir), therapy with atorvastatin should be avoided. In patients with HIV taking lopinavir plus ritonavir, caution should be used when prescribing atorvastatin and the lowest dose necessary employed. In patients taking clarithromycin, itraconazole, or in patients with HIV taking a combination of saquinavir plus ritonavir, darunavir plus ritonavir, fosamprenavir, or fosamprenavir plus ritonavir, therapy with atorvastatin should be limited to 20 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed. In patients taking the HIV protease inhibitor nelfinavir or the hepatitis C protease inhibitor boceprevir, therapy with atorvastatin should be limited to 40 mg, and appropriate clinical assessment is recommended to ensure that the lowest dose necessary of atorvastatin is employed [see , ]. Warnings and Precautions,Skeletal Muscle (5.1)Drug Interactions (7)
Fluvastatin Sodium

Fluvastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/day.

Fluvastatin capsules can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not open fluvastatin capsules prior to administration.

Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥ 25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of < 25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2 Adult Patients with Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on fluvastatin capsules. The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin capsules is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one fluvastatin 40 mg capsule twice daily. Do not take two fluvastatin 40 mg capsules at one time.

2.3 Pediatric Patients (10 to 16 Years of Age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one 20 mg fluvastatin capsule. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered as fluvastatin capsules 40 mg twice daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy. [See NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and .] Clinical Studies (14)1

National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. 89(3):495-501. 1992. 1Pediatrics.

2.4 Use with Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin capsules in patients taking cyclosporine . [see ] Drug Interactions (7.1)

2.5 Use with Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg BID fluvastatin capsules in patients taking fluconazole . [see ] Drug Interactions (7.2)
Ketorolac Tromethamine

Ketorolac Tromethamine

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of ketorolac tromethamine tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use ketorolac tromethamine tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals. In adults, the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and ketorolac tromethamine tablets is not to exceed 5 days. In adults, the use of ketorolac tromethamine tablets is only indicated as continuation therapy to IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine.

Transition from IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine (single- or multiple-dose) to multiple-dose ketorolac tromethamine tablets:

Patients age 17 to 64: 20 mg PO once followed by 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day

Patients age ≥ 65, renally impaired, and/or weight < 50 kg (110 lbs): 10 mg PO once followed by 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not> 40 mg/day

Note:

should be given . Oral formulationnotas an initial dose

for the individual patient. Use minimum effective dose

Do of 4 to 6 hours. not shorten dosing interval

the combined duration of use of IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine and ketorolac tromethamine tablets is not to exceed 5 days. Total duration of treatment in adult patients:

The following table summarizes ketorolac tromethamine tablet dosing instructions in terms of age group:
Table 4: Summary of Dosing Instructions Patient Population Ketorolac Tromethamine Tablets (following IV or IM dosing of ketorolac tromethamine) Age < 17 years Oral not approved Adult Age 17 to 64 years 20 mg once, then 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day Adult Age ≥ 65 years, renally impaired, and/or weight < 50 kg 10 mg once, then 10 mg q4 to 6 hours prn not > 40 mg/day
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, usual starting doses are 120 to 240 mg once daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 120 to 540 mg once daily. Current clinical experience with 540 mg dose is limited; however, the dose may be increased to 540 mg once daily. Hypertension.

Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient's needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg to 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 540 mg once daily. When necessary, titration should be carried out over 7 to 14 days. Angina.

Concomitant use with Other Cardiovascular Agents.

May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride therapy. 1.Sublingual Nitroglycerin (NTG).

. Diltiazem hydrochloride may be safely co-administered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 2Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy.

(See and .) 3.Beta-blockersWARNINGSPRECAUTIONS

Diltiazem hydrochloride has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other. 4.Antihypertensives.

Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the capsule contents. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any capsule contents/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules is not recommended.
Ery-tab

Ery-tab

In most patients, ERY-TAB (erythromycin delayed-release tablets) are well absorbed and may be dosed orally without regard to meals. However, optimal blood levels are obtained when ERY-TAB 250 mg, ERY-TAB 333 mg or ERY-TAB 500 mg tablets are given in the fasting state (at least 1/2 hour and preferably 2 hours before meals). ®®®®

Adults

The usual dose is 250 mg four times daily in equally spaced doses. The 333 mg tablet is recommended if dosage is desired every 8 hours. If twice-a-day dosage is desired, the recommended dose is 500 mg every 12 hours. Dosage may be increased up to 4 g per day according to the severity of the infection. However, twice-a-day dosing is not recommended when doses larger than 1 g daily are administered.

Children

Age, weight, and severity of the infection are important factors in determining the proper dosage. The usual dosage is 30 to 50 mg/kg/day, in equally divided doses. For more severe infections, this dose may be doubled but should not exceed 4 g per day.

In the treatment of streptococcal infections of the upper respiratory tract (e.g., tonsillitis or pharyngitis), the therapeutic dosage of erythromycin should be administered for at least ten days.

The American Heart Association suggests a dosage of 250 mg of erythromycin orally, twice a day in long-term prophylaxis of streptococcal upper respiratory tract infections for the prevention of recurring attacks of rheumatic fever in patients allergic to penicillin and sulfonamides. 4

Conjunctivitis of the Newborn Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

Oral erythromycin suspension 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses for at least 2 weeks. 4

Pneumonia of Infancy Caused by Chlamydia trachomatis

Although the optimal duration of therapy has not been established, the recommended therapy is oral erythromycin suspension 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses for at least 3 weeks.

Urogenital Infections During Pregnancy Due to Chlamydia trachomatis

Although the optimal dose and duration of therapy have not been established, the suggested treatment is 500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day or two erythromycin 333 mg tablets orally every 8 hours on an empty stomach for at least 7 days. For women who cannot tolerate this regimen, a decreased dose of one erythromycin 500 mg tablet orally every 12 hours, one 333 mg tablet orally every 8 hours or 250 mg by mouth four times a day should be used for at least 14 days. 6

For adults with uncomplicated urethral, endocervical, or rectal infections caused by Chlamydia trachomatis, when tetracycline is contraindicated or not tolerated

500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day or two 333 mg tablets orally every 8 hours for at least 7 days. 6

For patients with nongonococcal urethritis caused by Ureaplasma urealyticum when tetracycline is contraindicated or not tolerated

500 mg of erythromycin by mouth four times a day or two 333 mg tablets orally every 8 hours for at least seven days. 6

Primary Syphilis

30 to 40 g given in divided doses over a period of 10 to 15 days.

Acute pelvic inflammatory disease caused by N. gonorrhoeae

500 mg Erythrocin Lactobionate-I.V. (erythromycin lactobionate for injection, USP) every 6 hours for 3 days, followed by 500 mg of erythromycin base orally every 12 hours, or 333 mg of erythromycin base orally every 8 hours for 7 days.

Intestinal Amebiasis

Adults

500 mg every 12 hours, 333 mg every 8 hours or 250 mg every 6 hours for 10 to 14 days.

Children

30 to 50 mg/kg/day in divided doses for 10 to 14 days.

Pertussis

Although optimal dosage and duration have not been established, doses of erythromycin utilized in reported clinical studies were 40 to 50 mg/kg/day, given in divided doses for 5 to 14 days.

Legionnaires' Disease

Although optimal dosage has not been established, doses utilized in reported clinical data were 1 to 4 g daily in divided doses.

Preoperative Prophylaxis for Elective Colorectal Surgery

Listed below is an example of a recommended bowel preparation regimen.

A proposed surgery time of 8:00 a.m. has been used.

Pre-op Day 3

Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Bisacodyl, 1 tablet orally at 6:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 2

Minimum residue or clear liquid diet. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m., 2:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. Enema at 7:00 p.m. and 8:00 p.m.

Pre-op Day 1

Clear liquid diet. Supplemental (IV) fluids as needed. Magnesium sulfate, 30 mL, 50% solution (15 g) orally at 10:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. Neomycin sulfate (1.0 g) and erythromycin base (two 500 mg tablets, three 333 mg tablets or four 250 mg tablets) orally at 1:00 p.m., 2:00 p.m. and 11:00 p.m. No enema.

Day of Operation

Patient evacuates rectum at 6:30 a.m. for scheduled operation at 8:00 a.m.
Terbinafine Hydrochlori...

Terbinafine Hydrochloride

● ●
Fingernail onychomycosis: One 250 mg tablet once daily for 6 weeks.

Toenail onychomycosis: One 250 mg tablet once daily for 12 weeks.

The optimal clinical effect is seen some months after mycological cure and cessation of treatment. This is related to the period required for outgrowth of healthy nail.
Delzicol

Delzicol

2.1 Dosage for Treatment of Mildly to Moderately Active Ulcerative Colitis

For adults, the recommended dosage of DELZICOL is two 400 mg capsules to be taken three times daily (total daily dose of 2.4 grams), for a duration of 6 weeks Adults [see Clinical Studies ( )]. 14.1

Pediatrics For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the recommended total daily dose of DELZICOL is weight-based (up to maximum of 2.4 grams/day). DELZICOL capsules are to be taken twice daily for a duration of 6 weeks [see Clinical Studies ( )]. 14.1
Pediatric Dosage by Weight WeightGroup (kg) Daily Dose (mg/kg/day) Maximum Daily Dose (grams/day) 17 to < 33 36 to 71 1.2 33 to < 54 37 to 61 2.0 54 to 90 27 to 44 2.4
2.2 Dosage for Maintenance of Remission of Ulcerative Colitis in Adults

For the maintenance of remission of ulcerative colitis, the recommended dose of DELZICOL in adults is 1.6 g daily, in divided doses . [see Clinical Studies ( )] 14.2

2.3 Important Administration Instructions

Do not open, crush, break, or chew the capsules. Swallow whole with water.

Before prescribing DELZICOL capsules, children should be assessed for the ability to swallow capsules. DELZICOL should be dosed at least 1 hour before a meal or 2 hours after a meal.

Two DELZICOL 400 mg capsules should not be substituted with one mesalamine delayed-release 800 mg tablet.

2.4 Testing Prior to DELZICOL Administration

Evaluate renal function prior to initiation of DELZICOL [see Warnings and Precautions ( )]. 5.1

Carilion Materials Management

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Carilion Materials Management Drugs